Home

469 Motor Management Relay

Contents

1. 39IA3Q AINO 98908 51409 i aul 5021 l 1021 ev e e e ez 1 woof oo seno ce 553007 Pius 96 Tw 55 14035 804 st ism HHS duo ye Nen A 37m E ssov HHE EE YOLOW p 5 HOLMS PMS SI uB g TE 5 jue dar RES ws Suc lue 1L 77h amp Sce Sce 7 HOLOW 5 2 ina 029 6c di uB 8 newosssv er pus Ics 13634 3i0mas 810 na D E ava 1 1 3 210 snis 910 EET duo 92 cue AV 134 LN3A39VNVIN SOLON 697 E ors 2 NOUSSNdamOO lez NI 24 18 NE 0d 18 as d zz 21790715 22 548 8 39 38945 E 22 02 15 t z 2 24 15 24 OE 335 E PIUS 02 FISNOML 98 duvds 5758 a aomas 9 naviy 1
2. 2 2 4 Digital Inputs DIGITAL COUNTER Configuration Frequerntcy iiec iri rid GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH Block from start Timing accuracy Licet LOAD SHED Conftig r tione Timing accuragy PRESSURE SWITCH ConfIQuFOLloFt s c eed SLAY ascen terit Block from start Timing accuragy REMOTE SWITCH Configuration Timing accuracy SPEED SWITCH CONTIQUIOLION cerent delay xut Timing accuracy eite TACHOMETER Configuration VIBRATION SWITCH ConfigUFdElon stie ette Time deldy Timing 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL assign to digital inputs 1 to 4 50 times a second O to 1 000 000 000 Alarm assign to digital inputs 1 to 4 0 1 to 5000 0 s in steps of 0 1 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 250 ms or 0 596 of total time Trip and Alarm assign to digital inputs 1 to 4 100 ms maximum Trip assign to digital inputs 1 to 4 0 1 to 100 0 s in steps of 0 1 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 250 ms or 0 596 of total time Trip and Alarm assign to digital inputs1 to 4 100 ms maximum Trip and Alarm assign to digital inputs1 to 4 1 0 to 250 0 in steps of 0 1 250 ms maximum Trip assign to digital inputs 1 to 4 1
3. 2 8 tige 6 30 CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVES 2 TE 5 43 voltage dependent overload sesenta 5 50 5 51 CUTOUT PANELS n ater rer deridet dee de 3 4 D DATE eddie mee T 5 13 6 10 6 39 DEFAULT MESSAGES adig uper ete eee bee cycle time description flash messages removing setpoints MM DEMAND caleulatirigidermanad ia eerte ee Or OR 5 89 current power specifications DEMAND DATA CLEARING eiccin n E tete R 5 15 DEMAND PERIGD i ee p E NE NE UAR 5 89 DERATIING FACTOR eie eee en er re delete RE ed ds 5 55 DESCRIPTION aite tret ter ig et ee Eas 2 1 DEVICE NUMBERS tiep e erred eei lett eee dn 2 2 DEVICENET actual values hera ti ee teers AGNOSTIC ELECTRIC S EFERENIT IL ee Ren rae HE 5 65 FFERENTIAL CT PRIMARY 315r tre dee ere i retired ttd ede FFERENTIAL CURRENT INPUTS tette FFERENTIAL CURRENT TESTING FFERENTIAL PHASE CURRENT INPUTS GITAL COUNTER actual values ere specifications DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION capture trace Em 5 32 digital COUNTER ER Ee Bee 5 30 5 5 32 lodd shied rerit e
4. MULTILIN USE ONLY Mvarh METERING MWh METERING N NAMEPLATE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE ite i ei eii NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEMA DERATING NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY 1 NUMBER OF EMERGENCY RESTARTS 6 31 NUMBER OF MOTOR STARTS ott a er TR Or e es 6 31 NUMERICAL SETPOINT Ses tette a Deed eene este ets 1 10 OPEN DELTA 3 17 6 22 OPEN SENSOR cerei 5 75 OPERATE OUTPUT 5 5 35 ORDER CODE recedente n MN LM 6 36 ORDER 1 2 4 5 70 5 73 OUTPUT 4 3 OUTPUT RELAY TESTING 7 10 OUTPUT RELAYS 5 9 practices tenente tens 5 7 auxiliary description UTR operating restart mode setpoints m OUTPUTS ANALOG OVERCURRENT ground INSTANTANEOUS uae rette ettet cie tbi Ce eed tee e E EH Ede ia 2 9 phase difiterentigl ie He it etae e ER CS 2 10 SPECICATION S 2 9 OVERFREQUENCY SOLO OMICS
5. gt N ESSAGE PreTrip 0 Units Immediately prior to issuing a trip the 469 takes a snapshot of motor parameters and stores them as pre trip values that allow for troubleshooting after the trip occurs The CAUSE OF LAST TRIP message is updated with the current trip and the screen defaults to that message All trip features are automatically logged as date and time stamped events as they occur This information may include motor speed 2 Speed feature or Assignable Digital Input phase and ground currents RTD temperatures voltages frequency power quantities and analog inputs This information can be cleared using the 81 469 SETUP V CLEAR gt V CLEAR LAST TRIP DATA settings The CAUSE OF LAST TRIP actual value has the following range No Trip to Date Incomplete Sequence Remote Trip Speed Switch Load Shed Pressure Switch Vibration Switch General Sw Overload Short Circuit Mechanical Jam Undercurrent Current Unbalance Ground Fault Phase Differential Acceleration Tachometer RTDs 1 to 12 Undervoltage Overvoltage Phase Reversal Frequency Reactive Power Power Factor Underpower Analog Inputs 1 to 4 Single Phasing Reverse Power Analog Diff 1 2 Analog Diff 3 4 Phase differential and ground currents are recorded 1 cycle prior to the trip All other pre trip data is recorded 50 ms prior to the trip Thus some values will not be recorded upon instantane
6. New Settings File Remove Settings Edit Settings Properties Select Item Set Factory Default Values Write Settings to Device Print Settings Fle Print Preview Settings Float In Main Window For Help press F1 The Open dialog box will appear prompting for a previously saved Settings file gt As for any other Windows application browse for the file to add then click Open The new file and complete path will be added to the file list Creating a New Settings File using Motor Settings Auto Config The EnerVista 469 Setup software allows the user to create new Settings files independent of a connected device These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date One method of doing this the EnerVista Motor Settings Auto Config option allows the user to easily create new Settings Files automatically using a guided step by step process as outlined below The Motor Settings Auto Config option does NOT allow the user to configure existing Settings Files The following procedure illustrates how to create new Settings Files using the Motor Settings Auto Config option 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 gt Atthe top of the screen click on the Motor Settings Auto Config button n GE Multilin ETUP OR gt Onthe main menu select File gt Motor Set
7. LEE To prepare for new trending gt Select Stop to stop the data logger and Reset to clear the screen gt Select the graphs to be displayed through the pull down menu beside each channel description gt Select the Sample Rate through the pull down menu If you want to save the information captured by trending gt Check the box besides Log Samples to File The following dialog box will appear requesting for file name and path The file is saved as csv comma delimited values file which can be viewed and manipulated with compatible third party software Ensure that the sample rate not less than 5 seconds otherwise some data may not get written to the file Trending File Setup Filename Program Files GE Power Manag E ce Limit File Capacity To fi k Samples Approximate File Size 001 NOTE If Sample Rate is less than 5 secs some data may not get written to the file 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 43 4 5 limit the size of the saved file gt Enter a number in the Limit File Capacity To box The minimum number of samples is 1000 At a sampling rate of 5 seconds 1 sample every 5 seconds the file will contain data collected during the past 5000 seconds The EnerVista 469 Setup software will automatically estimate the size of the trending file Press Run to start the data logger If the Log Samples to
8. DEMAND 0 Amps PEAK REAL POWER DEMAND 0 kW PEAK REACTIVE POWER PEAK APPARENT POWER 0 to 100000 0 to 99999 kW O to 99999 kvar O to 65535 kVA 0 to 100000 A 0 to 99999 kw 0 to 99999 kvar 01065535 kVA The values for current and power demand are shown The power demand values are not shown if the RATIO is programmed as None Peak Demand information is cleared with the S1 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA gt V CLEAR PEAK DEMAND DATA settings Demand is shown only for positive real and positive reactive power 6 3 7 Analog Inputs PATH ACTUAL VALUES V A2 METERING DATA V ANALOG INPUTS INPUTS ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL lt gt 9 09 00 09 09 1 2 0 Units 3 0 Units 4 0 Units 1 2 ANALOG 1 2 0 Units Range Range Range Range Range Range 50000 to 50000 Seen only if Analog Input is programmed 50000 to 50000 Seen only if Analog Input is programmed 50000 to 50000 Seen only if Analog Input is programmed 50000 to 50000 Seen only if Analog Input is programmed 5100 to 490096 Seen only if Analog In Diff 1 2 set to 96Diff 10
9. nro SHIELD HoT COMPENSATION RETURN COMPENSATION 2 HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HoT 5 2 AUXILIARY 12 COMPENSATION RETURN 14 COMPENSATION M15 COMPENSATION 7 RETURN COMPENSATION 5 BLOCK HOT START COMPENSATION RETURN 6 SERVICE COMPENSATION on ner RTD 10 on HOT 012 compensanon 870 11 89 GE Multilin DI3 RTD RETURN D14 COMPENSATION 12 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY 1 TRIP coL SUPERVISION Fit 5 NS RTD 3 1 TRIP RTD 4 DO NOT HIPOT TEST RTD 6 3 AUXILIARY HIPOT TEST 1900 for 1 Second OR 1600 V AC FOR 1 MINUTE AS PER UL 508 4 ALARM REMOVE FILTER GROUND G11 DURING TEST nr STARTER STATUS 017 EMERGENCY RESTART REMOTE RESET 019 ASSIGNABLE INFUT 1 020 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 2 021 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 5 022 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 4 025 COMMON D24 SWrcH 24Vde ee RSS access ina Nd ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG INPUTS ec i 2 5 ome ea
10. HORT CIRCUIT actual values specifications gj HORT CIRCUIT TRIP SEDOM MULATE FAULT MU LATE FAULTSFEAUDLT 5 33 MULATE e e Rees MULATION MODE pci NGLE LINE DIAGRAM PEASING NGLE VT OPERATION LAVE ADDRESS tette iot i aida iius OFTWARE o ete hardware requirements O OVELVICW saving serial communications PECIFICATIONS iiie PEED PEED SW ATC Ela oce eter diss pee PEED S WUTC TRIP iiie i aede n e te des PEED2 ACCELERATION Gu pepper even lae eee rs 5 107 PEED2 O L SETUP PEED2 PHASE SEQUENCE n t teer iced 5 19 PEED2 UNDERCURRE Ntc tire ree er pe er diete este 5 107 TALE TIME SAFE Idee ane uite vede 5 47 5 106 TANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES descriptio e fedet dept nts 5 39 equation GUC DM e E EE multipliers selection TART BLOCK RELAY 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY
11. E gt 500 Sensor 24 20 ANALOG CURRENT OUTPUT LIE Active RONG e 410 20 0 10 1 must specified with order s tae petebat duit 1 of full scale 4 to 20 mA input 1200 Q 010 1 mA input 10 ioter tenete 36 isolated with RTDs and analog inputs 4 Assignable phase A B and C current three phase average current ground current phase AN AB BN BC and CN CA voltages three phase average voltage hottest stator RTD hottest bearing RTD hottest other RTD RTDs 1 to 12 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 7 2 8 2 2 3 WARNING Protection OUTPUT RELAYS CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION power factor 3 phase real kW apparent kVA and reactive kvar power thermal capacity used relay lockout time current demand kvar kW and kVA demand motor load torque Relay contacts are unsafe to touch when the 469 is energized If the output relay contacts are required for low voltage accessible applications it is the customer s responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels Configuration etaed 6 Electromechanical Form C Contact material ss silver alloy Operate time 10 ms Make carry ee 10 A continuous 30 A for 0 25 Max ratings for 1
12. hotbed OVERLOAD ALARM OVERLOAD CURVE MULTIPLIERS 2 ctt tn eene dee 5 40 OVERLOAD CURVE SETUP tree en iere ie etie de 5 39 OVERLOAD CURVE iiiter tnnt tnnt emnt 7 11 OVERLOAD CURVES graph 5 52 selection setpoints standard 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTERI standard scere peste ce n ei voltage dependent m oce ertet OVERLOAD PICKUP OVERLOAD TRIPS OVERREACH FIETER ies p oett oen OH aeter tae tests OVERTORQUE SETUP OVERVIEW siii iere gei e tsa eee Ue NER ERU ERU Hd OVERVOLTAGE SELDOM 5 78 dle TER 2 9 COMICS 6 31 aee iren thee dde pite adeb eee dts 5 edente flash messages os PEAK DEMAND PHASE CT PRIMARY cie tie EIGHT Tee etie e tese 5 17 PHASE CTS adic e ede io ae Dd ted notte EDU 3 13 8 PHASE CURRENT TEST tee ede Ren e re tre preste 7 3 PHASE CURRENT INPUTS descriptio ed eene re eere le e HER e C ee PEE EE 3 13 dern AC 2 6 PHASE CURRENT AVER
13. 1 5 specify with order s P jor m Less than 0 2 VA at rated load Conversion 0 05 to 20 x CT Nominal 20 to 70 Hz Frequency range serere 20to 120 Hz ACGUFOCV secet at 2 x CT 0 5 of 2 x CT at gt 2 x 1 of 20 x CT CT withstand e 1 second at 80 x rated current 2 seconds at 40 x rated current continuous at 3 x rated current RTD INPUTS 3 Wire TYPES ante 100 Q Platinum DIN 43760 100 Q Nickel 120 Q Nickel 10 Copper RTD sensing current 5 mA sOlO UON acierto dero 36 Vpk isolated with analog inputs and outputs 50 10 250 Accuracy 2 Lead resistance 25 Max per lead for Pt and Ni type 3 Max per lead for Cu type i pet et e RE ensues 21000 Q Short low alarm 50 C TRIP COIL SUPERVISION Applicable voltage 20 to 300 V DC V AC Trickle current 2105 VOLTAGE INPUTS VT ratio 1 00 to 300 00 1 in steps of 0 01 VT Seconda cR 273 V AC full scale Conversion range 0 05 to 1 00 x full scale Nominal 20 to 70 Hz Frequency range 20to 120 Hz PC CUR CY ui cr ctt 0 5 of full scale Max continuous 280 V AC
14. 00 tte 5 33 PREFERENGES caet tet Hide ton at ie edad Ri ede tds 5 9 PRESET DIGITAL COUNT ER itii tr recte c em einen et 5 16 PRESSURE edere edet eie ied ten 3 19 PRESSURE reset entered t EYE NUR D cee 2 11 PRESSURE SWITCRHALARM octets ee dens 5 28 PRESSURE SWITCH TRIP PRESSURE TRANS DU GER RR dn 5 94 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION ue iier 3 2 PRODUC MON TESTS ette e teer er ERO ees 2 14 PROTECTION FEATURE tete tee 2 3 PROXIMITY PROBE rete ter 3 19 PULSE OUTPUT ii aede tee 5 89 R REACTIVE POWER consumption specifications metering specifications REACTIVE POWER DEMAND REACTIVE POWER TRIPS eara E eee REAL POWER consumption amp 2 12 metering SPECI 2 13 REAL POWER DEMAND 5 5 tro tte tee Er rt eti 6 15 REAL TIME CLOCK diee eri teret 5 13 6 10 REDUCED LEAD NUMBER iet eterne ee itt 3 20 REDUCED VOLTAGE START A STOtUS INP Ut usce tee e mere e de adt auxiliary B status Input iic contactor control circuit current characteristics serie tette reete pecore Eee ES ee peter eee e Cana A te its specifications REDUCED
15. 4 5 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY enerVista INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt Click on Next to begin the installation The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista 469 Setup software to the Windows start menu gt Click Finish to end the installation The 469 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown below Launchpad enervVista LAUNCH I PAD 750 760 MII Foniy M Family 463 CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES 4 5 Connecting EnerVista 469 Setup to the Relay 4 3 1 Configuring Serial Communications Before starting verify that the serial cable is properly connected to either the RS232 port on the front panel of the device for 5232 communications or to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device for 85485 communications See Hardware on page 4 11 for connection details This example demonstrates an RS232 connection For 5485 communications the GE F485 converter will be required Refer to F485 manual for additional details To configure the relay for Ethernet communications see Configuring Ethernet Communications on page 4 18 gt Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 469 Setup software available from the GE EnerVista See the previous section for the installation procedure
16. NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE 4000 V The manner in which the voltage transformers are connected must be entered here A value of None for vr CONNECTION TYPE indicates that no voltage measurement is required Note that phase reversal is disabled for single VT operation All voltages are assumed balanced Also frequency is only available for AN or AB connections The ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION settings is seen only if the CONNECTION TYPE is Open Delta or Wye If voltage measurements are to be made the turns ratio of the voltage transformers must be entered The VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO must be chosen such that the secondary voltage of the VTs is between 40 and 240 V when the primary is at MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE All voltage protection features that require a level settings are programmed as a percent of the MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE or rated voltage where MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE represents the rated design voltage line to line For example given the motor nameplate voltage as 4160 V and the VTs are 4160 120 Open Delta set the voltage sensing settings as follows VT CONNECTION TYPE Open Delta VT RATIO 54 67 1 MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE 4160 5 3 3 Power System PATH SETTINGS gt S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V POWER SYSTEM INOMINAL SYSTEM Range 50 Hz 60 Hz Variable FREQUENCY 60 Hz SYSTEM PHASE Range ABC ACB MESSAGE SEQUENCE ABC SPEED2 PHASE Range ABC ACB MESSAGE SEQUENCE ABC 469 MOTOR MANA
17. 1055 OF pen lo test aes 4 3 MAXIMUM 5 15 5 24 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION tnter 3 1 MECHANICAL JAM trip MECHANICAL JAM TRIPS MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD xi RR erede METERING c apparent power 5 m LOW QU MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LINE VOLTAGE 5 47 5 106 MODEL INFORMATION eee tes 6 36 MONITOR COMM PORT 1 tte 5 102 MOTOR COOLING MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR INFORMATION RESETTING 2 20 7 0 00001 0 0000 0000006 00000040400 5 16 MOTOR LOAD actual values e er aere i calculation period filter interval MOTOR LOAD AVERAGE eene ERO Oe MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE m MOTOR RUNNING HOURS MOTOR SPEED LUE 6 5 MOTOR SPEE MOTOR STARTING MOTOR STARTS MOTOR MOTOR STATUS LEDS eer eee ae A MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS MOTOR TRIPS nite tecti tco e o MOUNTING ABS
18. digital itiputs sn functiona tries ground CT accuracy um m ground CUEN output relays mee see nene RE Ha His V pre dr bee ed overload curves phase current decl Cy oneri ee tte p eere eei rare ees phase revers ee ret Fer a eite gei e tds power measurement Pp SMOG En simulation mode WUD CACC n 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTERI voltage Input CY mere eee e eret br voltage phase FEVERS ate n dene lee pod d ret TEXT SETPOINTS t pete etes THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM THERMAL CAPACITY USED actual value algorithm learned margin for Start Inhibit SEDOM emend tmd PHAR 5 38 With RTD BIOS 5 57 THERMAL LIMITS UI m description high inertial load THERMAL MODEL T 5 56 curve selection description sudden Sext eene nd specifications event record overtorque tipo XE 2 12 TORQUE ALARM MESSA
19. CHANNEL IDENTIFIER COLOR SCALE GROUP STYLE DISPLAY ORDEI MN Solid Automatic Phasel Group 1 Solid Automatic ____ 17 Group 1 Solid Automatic PhaselaDif Group 1 Solid Automatic PhaselbDif E Group 1 Solid Automatic Group 1 Solid Automatic IE gt Group Solid None Phase Van gt Group 2 Solid None PhaseVbn mmmmm Solid None 5 p Graph Display Phasor Display Display Axis Names Select Reference Phase Van Scale Magnitudes Samples Cycle 12 Digital Channels Auto Detect Auto Display Axis Time Units C ms ddhh mm ss sss Graph Background C M teen 2 gt Change the color of each graph as desired gt Select other options as required by checking the appropriate boxes gt Click OK to store these graph attributes and to close the window The Waveform Capture window will reappear with the selected graph attributes available for use 4 6 5 Phasors The EnerVista 469 Setup software can be used to view the phasor diagram of three phase currents and voltages The phasors are for phase voltages Va Vb and Vc phase currents la Ib and Ic With the EnerVista 469 Setup software running and communications established gt Open Actual Values gt
20. teet e e t ee ce e ete eds FAULT SIMULATION FEATURES FIRMWARE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL FORCE RELAY OPERATION 5 101 FREQUENCY event 6 33 frequelh y ui ette 6 6 Si agt iet 5 system frequency os TH COMES ERE FRONT PANEL G 8 GENERAL COUNTERS 6 31 GENERAL SWITCH EUIS 5 32 ONS MOREM 2 11 GETTING STARTED 1 1 GROUND CT COPE 3 15 PRI BIDEN setpoints GROUND CTs GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT TESTING GROUND FAULT trip co GROUN GROUND FAULT CTs FOR 50 0 025 A GROUN GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT te qe toe tte 5 63 SPECIN COONS ne ECCLE 2 9 H HOT COLD CURVE RATIO sss HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO HOTTEST STATOR SETUP 4 13 INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE TRIPS ttr repre 6 30 INPUT SWITCH TRIPS 2 rne cedet cene cete tite eet 6 30 INPUTS 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL analog EAN EM ce
21. 4 5 PlugAndPlay_All PLUG amp PLAY IED DASHBOARD 1 469 Relay 1 Dashboard Front Panel Dashboard Front Panel 15 x Device Status All devices are communicating successfully with enerVista VIEWPOINT FIGURE 4 13 Plug and Play Dashboard Click the Dashboard button below the 469 icon to view the device information We have now successfully accessed our 469 through EnerVista Viewpoint 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL E pan 1 Overview Wye MultiNET 1 Metering Power Demand Energy Analysis Phase B Prase Vbn 699 2 Computes Valges tor 2V3 148 Degrees LAGMLEAD Ven 147 265 Degrees LAG LEAD Jan 10 2001 Feb 28 2002 06 36 Nov 21 2000 0 Nov 21 2000 0 Jul 3 2003 0337 17 Reactive _ 800 00 var 800 00 var Time of Max 2192003 03 47 28pm 03 0347 5509 FIGURE 4 14 EnerVista Plug and Play Screens For additional information on EnerVista viewpoint please visit the EnerVista website at INSTRUCTION Digital Energy Multilin Chapter 5 5 1 Overview 5 1 1 Settings Message Map Settings 469 Motor Management Relay The 469 has a considerable number of programmable settings which makes it extremely flexible The settings have been grouped into a number of
22. Poe iere Pei sensor connections SOLD OMNES a 5 specifications cioe eic P 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER I RTD BIAS description S oir t d ee D dr e e etti e RED ett dr SR eee 3 21 3 22 MAXIMUMS ctt eb ee RTD SHORT LOW TEMP MADDEN REDS VLOG x em ees REDS 7 T RU NIN ING HOW RS seite emere tre ep eed ere ttd S SEL Pi eee A 5 8 S10 POWER ELEMENTS tieni 5 80 SIT MONITORING eed iet ette e Pete admins 5 86 5 91 S13 469 TESTINGO i tiara nere 5 98 S14 TWO SPEED MOTOR sienne tenete re eerie tene 5 103 S2 SYSTEM SETUP ies eens 5 17 Settings 1 30 53 DIGITAL INPUTS 5 24 Settings Example t 1 32 OUTPUTJREDAYS otto Sores 5 34 55 THERMAL MODEL settings example S6 CURRENT ELEMENTS settings example 57 MOTOR STARTING SOLO IA
23. RDS ETOO anere a Ee M MI RTDs 7 TO 10 81011 e OPEN SENSOR SHORT LOW TEMP ttt ttt ttt ttt 5 75 59 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS acides ee e UO ade ien cas 9 76 UNDERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL o tme e e rettet uet evectus FREQUENCY RE C 510 POWER ELEMENTS POWER MEASUREMENT CONVENTIONS esee tentent 5 80 POWER FACTOR aic te cenar ote ect et BEACTIUEIPOWER NEU UNDERPOWER acer m ERR REVERSE POWER TORQUE SETUP ics etti endi e d v eee ER nera OVERTORQUE S11 MONITORING TRIP COUNTER STARTER FAILURE DEMAND PULSE OUTPUT ANALOUGINPETS OUTPUTS aiiis ti HH d D 5 91 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5 91 ANALOG INPUTS re 5 93 ANALOG INPUT DIFF 1 2 5 95 ANALOG INPUT DIFF 35 4 rte 5 96 513 469 TESTING 4 MULATION MODE ett cota DLE E PRESFAULET SETUP ice titer teile tee He P RU e ERR FAULTS ETOR S ede T Mr deter uscd sche TESTOUTPUT RELAYS ettari uineas ct e c eR c DIL LIN TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS COMM PORT MONITOR3 eitis e A EUR RI
24. APPLIED EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED LINE NEUTRAL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE A N VOLTAGE B N VOLTAGE C N VOLTAGE READING 30V 300 V 50V 500 V 100 V 1000 V 150 V 1500 V 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 252 7 6 3 CHAPTER 7 TESTING APPLIED EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED LINE NEUTRAL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE A N VOLTAGE B N VOLTAGE C N VOLTAGE READING 200 V 2000 V 270V 2700 V Ground and Differential Accuracy Test The 469 specification for differential current and 1 A 5 A ground current input accuracy is 0 5 of 1 CT for the 5 A input and 0 5 of 5 x CT for the 1 A input Perform the steps below to verify accuracy 5 A Input gt Alter the fol lowing settings 2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V GROUND CT Secondary S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING GROUND CT PRIMARY 1000 A S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT Secondary S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT PRIMARY 1000 A Measured values should be 5 A gt Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only gt Verify accuracy of the measured values View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA gt CURRENT METERING INJECTED EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CURRENT GROUND CURRENT 5 A UNIT READING CURRENT P
25. MESSAGE gt NUMBER OF STARTER Range 0 to 50000 gt OPERATIONS 0 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 31 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Two of the 469 general counters count the number of motor starts or start attempts and the number of Emergency Restarts performed to start a given motor over time This may be useful information when troubleshooting a motor failure When either of these counters exceeds 50000 that counter will reset to 0 This information can be cleared with the s1 469 SETUP gt V INSTALLATION gt V RESET MOTOR INFORMATION settings Another of the 469 General counters will count the number of starter operations performed over time This counter is incremented any time the motor is stopped either by a trip or normal stop This may be useful information for starter maintenance When the counter exceeds 50000 that counter will reset to 0 This information may be cleared with the 81 469 SETUP gt V INSTALLATION gt V RESET STARTER INFORMATION settings If one of the assignable digital inputs is programmed as Digital Counter that counter measurement will appear here The counter can be reset to zero if the counter is of the incrementing type or pre set to a predetermined value using the 51 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA gt V PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER settings 6 5 3 Timers PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A4 MAINTENANCE gt V TIMERS Range 0 to 100000 hrs MOTOR RUNNING BI HOURS
26. 469 when the simulation mode is Simulate Pre Fault The values entered as Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 469 when the simulation mode is Simulate Fault If the simulation mode Pre Fault to Fault is selected the Pre Fault values will be substituted for the period of time specified by the delay followed by the Fault values If a trip occurs simulation mode will revert to Off Selecting Off for the simulation mode will place the 469 back in service If the 469 measures phase current or control power is cycled simulation mode will automatically revert to Off If the 469 is to be used for training it might be desirable to allow all learned parameters statistical information and event recording to update when operating in simulation mode If however the 469 has been installed and will remain installed on a specific motor it might be desirable to short the 469 Test input C3 and C4 to prevent all of this data from being corrupted or updated In any case when in simulation mode the 469 In Service LED indicator will flash indicating that the 469 is not in protection mode 5 98 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 14 2 Pre Fault Setup PATH SETTINGS S13 469 TESTING gt V PRE FAULT SETUP PRE PRE FAULT CURRENT 0 00 to 20 00 x CT in steps of FAULT gt 6 0 00 0 01 ESSAGE gt PRE FAULT CURRENT Range 0 00 to
27. Simulate Pre Fault PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 E INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE gt Simulate Pre Setting the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION to Simulate Pre Fault allows the user to start the Simulate Pre Fault mode as per the 13 469 TESTING gt SIMULATION MODE gt SIMULATION MODE setting via a switch input This is typically used for relay or system testing There are no additional Digital Input settings associated with this value Simulate Fault PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Simulate Fault Setting the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION to Simulate Fault allows the user to start the Simulate Fault mode as per the 13 469 TESTING gt SIMULATION MODE gt SIMULATION MODE setting via a switch input This is typically used for relay or system testing There are no additional Digital Input settings associated with this value Simulate Pre Fault Fault PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 6 INPUT 1 FUNCTION 5ee above ASSIGNABLE Sim Pre Setting the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION to Sim Pre Fault Fault allows the user to start the Simulate Pre Fault to Fault mode as per the 13 469 TESTING gt SIMULATION MODE gt SIMULATION MODE setting via a switch input This is typically used for relay or system testing There are no ad
28. gt REAL POWER kW g 0 Range 50000 to 50000 kW in steps of eid REAL POWER kW MAX 1000 kW 1 Q The 469 has four analog output channels 4 to 20 mA 0 to 1 mA as ordered Each channel may be individually configured to represent a number of different measured parameters as shown in the table below The minimum value programmed represents the 4 mA output The maximum value programmed represents the 20 mA output If the maximum is programmed lower than the minimum the output will function in reverse four of the outputs are updated once every 50 ms Each parameter may only be used once For example the analog output parameter may be chosen as Hottest Stator RTD fora 4 to 20 mA output If the minimum is set 0 C and the maximum is set for 250 C the analog output channel will output 4 mA when the Hottest Stator RTD temperature is at O C 12 mA when it is 125 and 20 mA when it is 250 C 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 91 5 92 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Table 5 3 Analog Output Parameter Selection Table PARAMETER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP DEFAULT MIN MAX Phase A Current to 100000 A 1 0 100 Phase B Current to 100000 A 1 0 100 Phase C Current 0 to 100000 1 0 100 Avg Phase Current 0 to 100000 A 1 0 100 AB Line
29. 4 5 2 Saving Settings to a File 4 5 3 Before upgrading firmware it is very important to save the current 469 settings to a file on your PC After the firmware has been upgraded it will be necessary to load this file back into the 469 Refer to Downloading and Saving Settings Files on page 4 24 for details on saving relay settings to a file Loading New Firmware Loading new firmware into the 469 flash memory is accomplished as follows gt Connect the relay to the local PC and save the settings to a file as shown in Downloading and Saving Settings Files on page 4 24 gt Select the Communications gt Update Firmware menu item The warning message shown below will appear Select Yes to proceed or No the cancel the process Do not proceed unless you have saved the current settings 469Setup 3 All settings will be LOST Do you want to proceed An additional message will be displayed to ensure the is connected to the relay front port as the 469 cannot be upgraded via the rear RS485 ports The EnerVista 469 Setup software will request the new firmware file 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 35 4 5 gt Locate firmware to load into the 469 The firmware filename has the following format 30 I 500 A8 000 t Modification Number 000 none GE Multilin use only Firmware Version Required 469 hardware revi
30. 45 days when control power is off TESTING The table below lists the 469 type tests Standard Test Name Level EIA 485 RS485 Communications Test 32 units at 4000 ft GE Temperature Cycling 50 C 80 EC 60068 2 38 Composite Temperature Humidity 65 10 C at 9396 RH EC 60255 5 Dielectric Strength 2300 V AC EC 60255 5 mpulse Voltage 5kV EC 60255 5 nsulation Resistance gt 100 500 V AC 105 60255 21 1 Sinusoidal Vibration 2g EC 60255 22 1 Damped Oscillatory Burst 1 MHz 2 5 1 60255 22 2 Electrostatic Discharge Direct 8kV EC 60255 22 3 Radiated RF Immunity 10 V m EC 60255 22 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity 4 kV EC 60255 22 5 Surge Immunity 4kV 2 kV EC 60255 22 6 Conducted RF Immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz 10 V m EC 60255 25 Radiated RF Emission Group 1 Class A EC 60255 25 Conducted RF Emission Group 1 Class A EC 60529 Ingress of Solid Objects and Water IP 40 front IP20 back EC 61000 4 11 Voltage Dip Voltage Interruption 096 4096 10096 EEE C37 90 1 Fast Transient SWC 4 37 90 1 Oscillatory Transient SWC 2 5 kV EEE C37 90 5 Electrostatic Discharge Air and Direct 15kV 8kV PRODUCTION TESTS Thermal cycling operational test at ambient reducing to 40 C and then increasing to 60 Dielectric strength 1 9 kV AC for 1 second or 1 6 kV AC for 1 min
31. 50 25 RTD BIAS 5 CENTER T C 154 MAXIMUM STATOR TEMPERATURE 0 0 40 80 120 160 200 130 155 RTD BIAS RTD BIAS RTD BIAS MIN VALUE CENTER VALUE MAX VALUE 806550A1 CDR FIGURE 1 9 RTD Bias Example 1 You should now be familiar with maneuvering through and editing settings messages As such we will now limit our discussion to just the values that must be programmed to meet the requirements of the example application Any settings not explicitly mentioned should be left at the factory default value 144 52 System Settings The S2 settings page contains settings for entering the characteristics of the equipment on the motor electrical system In our example these characteristics are specified under the Power System Data and Instrument Transformer Data headings in the previous sub section From this information and the resulting calculations program the page 52 settings as indicated 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED For current transformers make the following change in the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING settings page PHASE CT PRIMARY 400 A MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA 548 A GROUND CT 5 A Secondary GROUND CT PRIMARY 50 A PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT None ENABLE 2 SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION No For current transformers make the following change in the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING settings
32. ENTER while at the Demand Metering sub page heading to display the following Press 4 MESSAGE key to return to the Demand Metering sub page heading 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED gt Press the MESSAGE V key to display the next actual value of this sub page Actual values and settings messages always have a colon separating the name of the value and the actual value or settings This particular message displays the current demand as measured by the relay The menu path to this value is shown as A2 METERING DATA gt V DEMAND METERING gt CURRENT DEMAND Settings and actual values messages are referred to in this manner throughout the manudl For example the A3 LEARNED DATA gt MOTOR STARTING gt LEARNED ACCELERATION TIME path representation describes the following key press sequence gt Press the MENU key until the actual value header appears on the display MESSAGE or ENTER key gt Press the MESSAGE V key until the A3 LEARNED DATA message is displayed gt Press the MESSAGE P or ENTER key to display MOTOR STARTING message Press the MESSAGE ENTER key to reach the LEARNED ACCELERATION TIME message and the corresponding actual value Press the MESSAGE key to display the next actual value message as shown below LEARNED STARTING CURRENT 0A gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys to scroll the display up and down through all the actual va
33. GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT Pick p level eee 0 1 to 1 0 x CT primary in steps of 0 01 Time delay 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Pick p decuracy sets as per ground current input Operate time 0 ms time delay 25 ms 60 Hz I gt 1 5 x Pickup 30 ms 50 Hz I gt 1 5 x Timing accuragy e 50 ms scite teet Trip and Alarm Applies if Voltage phase A detected Motor Status Running and frequency within 596 of nominal 50ms if these conditions are not met JOGGING BLOCK Starts hour e 1105 steps of 1 Time between starts 0 to 500 min Timing accuracy s 0 5 s or 0 596 of total time este edet Block MECHANICAL JAM Pickup levels tette 1 01 to 3 00 x FLA in steps of 0 01 of any one phase blocked on start TIME uscita een 1to 30s in steps of 1 Pickup accuracy as per phase current inputs Timing accuragy 0 5 5 El ments rescate OVERLOAD STALL PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL Overload curves 15 standard overload curves custom curve voltage dependent custom curve for high inertia starting all curves time out against average phase current ET Phase unbalance Hot cold curve ratio Stator RTD Running cool rate Stopped cool Rate Line voltage Overload picku
34. N gt N z 2 E 2 E E 2 E E 2 E OJIK Q o o o Q 2 Q Q Q Q 2 Q Q Q Q Q Q H H H H H H H H tj H H H H H z z 5 2 z z z z z z z z z H H H H H H H H H H H H m m y m y m Range Disabled Enabled 12 alphanumeric characters Diff Abs Diff 1 lt gt 2 1 gt 2 2 gt 1 Always Start Run O to 5000 s in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 0 to 500 in steps of 1 or 0 to 50000 Units in steps of 1 0 1 to 300 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 0 to 500 in steps of 1 or 0 to 50000 Units in steps of 1 0 1 to 300 0 s in steps of 0 1 This settings menu is seen only if Analog Inputs 1 and 2 are enabled The ANALOG IN DIFF 1 2 TRIP LEVEL and ANALOG IN DIFF 1 2 ALARM LEVEL settings are shown units of 96 if the ANALOG IN DIFF 1 2 COMPARISON is Diff or in units defined by the ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS settings if ANALOG IN DIFF 1 2 COMPARISON is Abs Diff og inputs and activate alarms or trips based on their difference which can be an ab
35. Remote Alarm PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 89 INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE gt Remote Alarm EVENTS Off REMOTE ALARM Range 20 alphanumeric characters ESSAGE 4 Range Latched Unlatched ESSAGE lt gt 9 ALARM Unlatched lt gt Range Alarm Alarm 6 Aux2 Alarm amp ESSAGE Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Aux3 Auxiliary2 None Range On Off REMOTE ALARM These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Remote Alarm Once the Remote Alarm function is chosen for one of the assignable digital inputs the settings messages shown here will follow the assignment message An alarm relay may be selected and the name of the alarm may be altered A contact closure on the digital input assigned as Remote Alarm will cause an alarm within 100 ms with the name that has been chosen Multiple sources may be used to trigger a remote alarm by paralleling inputs see FIGURE 5 4 Remote Alarm Trip from Multiple Sources on page 5 27 Remote Trip PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 L 6 INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Remote Trip Range 20 character alphanumeric ESSEE REMOTE TRIP NAME g p Remote Trip ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp MESSAGE RELAYS amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY
36. gt Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window Click the Add Site button to define a new site V Enterthe desired site name in the Site Name field If desired a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site In this example we will use Pumping Station 1 as the site name gt Click the OK button when complete The new site will appear in the upper left list in the EnerVista 469 Setup window Click the Add Device button to define the new device Enter desired name the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 4 16 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 gt Select Serial from the Interface drop down list This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper RS232 functionality Device Setup AddSite Add Device B Derete B Device Name 469 Relay 1 E Pumping Station 1 Description 468 Motor Management Relay 469 Relay 1 Color Interface Serial Slave address 1 COMPot Baud Rate None T Bits p sess gt Order Code 469 5 20 408 Ok X Cancel Enter the slave address and COM port values from the 51 469 SETUP V SERIAL PORTS menu in the Slave Address and COM Port fields Enter t
37. kVAR 0 5 kW 0 3 pf 72 5 0 7 pf 1 00 pf 0 7 pf 0 3 pf 72 5 Rotation lag 45 lag 02 lag 45 lead lead Va 0 0 0 0 0 Vc 60 60 60 60 60 la 45 15 330 285 260 Ib 285 255 210 165 140 Ic 165 135 90 45 20 kw kVAR 0 kW 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES When the relay set for the Wye VT connection type voltages are measured at terminals G2 H1 Vg and H2 with respect to G1 Vcom Refer to the figure below for details The phase to phase voltages are calculated using the following relationships Vab x VA Vbc x VB Vca ev 2 1 2 G1 Ve 806562A1 CDR FIGURE 6 8 Wye VT Connection The quantities displayed by the relay and the EnerVista 469 Setup software are straightforward and follow the phasor diagram shown below Note that all the angles shown are negative or lagging angles Phase Rotation System Voltages Van Vab Vbn Vbc Vcn Vca Measured Voltages Vab VA G2 G1 VB H1 G1 VC H2 G1 Calculated Voltages Van Vab 3 J3 VB Vea 3 VC Displayed Voltages Vbn Van Vcn VC Vab As Calculated Vbc Vbc As Calculated As Calculated FIGURE 6 9 Typical Phas
38. lt UNDERVOLTAGE Range 0 to 50000 TRIPS 0 6 30 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE lt gt OVERVOLTAGE g gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE lt gt PHASE REVERSAL g gt TRIPS 0 gt VOLTAGE FREQUENCY Range 0 to 50000 e TRIPS 0 gt FACTOR Range 0 to 50000 gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE 9 REACTIVE POWER g lt gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE 9 REVERSE POWER g e TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE lt gt UNDERPOWER g gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE 9 ANALOG I P 1 g lt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE A ANALOG I P 2 g gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE 9 ANALOG I P 3 g gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE 9 ANALOG I P 4 g lt gt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE BD ANALOG 1 2 g lt TRIPS 0 Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE lt gt ANALOG 3 4 TRIPS 0 breakdown of number of trips by type is displayed here When the total exceeds 50000 all counters reset to 0 This information can be cleared using the 81 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA gt V CLEAR TRIP COUNTERS settings Messages relating to analog inputs reflect the programmed analog input name 6 5 2 General Counters PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A4 MAINTENANCE gt V GENERAL COUNTERS Range 0 to 50000 NUMBER OF MOTOR STARTS 0 COUNTERS MESSAGE gt OF EMER Range 0 to 50000 x
39. specifications testing tip COUNTES m E ANALOG OUTPUTS setpoints specifications Mr ANS DEVICE NUMBERS APPARENT POWER actual values specifications APPARENT POWER DEMAND APPLICATION EXAMPLE tiers rer FORERO e eds APPLICATION NOTES current transformers APPLICATIONS sc cette cin ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUTS ASYMMETRICAL CURRENT AUXILIARY RELAY see 2 AUXILIARY RELAY and 3 AUXILIARY RELAY AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD tct rr teet e ce pe ern 5 9 6 28 AVERAGE PHASE CURRENT scatto iet tu A E tede tacks 6 11 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL BAUD RATE setpoints 2 5 10 5 11 5 12 Specifications aie ette rr i eee d n at ert ipie Re ettet beer oder de 2 13 BEARING RI Dis te eed reb iere e tere i e Bre e eed 5 70 5 73 BEARING RTO titre remi eie ds 6 30 BLOCK START sucio tiae em eir dame pee dd ra ben doe iae tlt gag 5 7 C CALIBRATION DATE eee RR Nd be ERREUR CAPTURE TRAGE estetico e eat ere ne ete pe ette ten CAUSE OF EVENTS TABLE CERTIFICATIONS s etr reins CHANGING PASSCODE
40. x 20x CT x VT Xx scale Timing accuracy s 0 5 s or 0 596 of total time 2 2 6 Power Supply wv NOTE 2 2 7 CPU CONTROL POWER LO HI must be specified with order POM GO ee 20 to 60 V DC 20 to 48 V AC at 48 to 62 Hz RIG p 90 to 300 V DC 70 to 265 V AC at 48 to 62 Hz eR 45 max 25 VA typical Total loss of voltage ride through time 096 control power 16 7 ms FUSE HI and LO VOLT Current actes 2 50A sse endete festes 5 x 20 mm SLO BLO HRC Littelfuse high breaking capacity Model no e 215 02 5 An external fuse must be used if the supply voltage exceeds 250 V COMMUNICATIONS 5252 1 front panel non isolated 85485 2 isolated together at 36 Vo Baud rotes teens 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 for RS485 9600 RS232 PORTY oiana None Odd Even Ethernet 10Base T RJ45 connector Modbus TCP IP Version 2 0 IEEE 802 3 MODBUS Modbus Modbus RTU half duplex DEVICENET cette 125 250 500K 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 13 2 2 8 Testing A WARNING CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION MAC iei 010 63 Connection type Explicit Messages Poll 1 0 Change Of State ODVA certified CLOCK ACCUFOGCV Lasse herren ttd 1 minute month Supercap backup life
41. 1 05 x FLA T lt gt Range 0 5 to 999999 in steps of 0 1 1 10 x FLA T Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 1 20 x FLA 795 4 lt gt Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 1 30 x FLA 507 2 pus Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 1 40 x FLA 364 6 Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 7 amp 1 50 x FLA 280 0 lt gt Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 1 75 x FLA 169 7 Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 2 00 x FLA 116 6 lt gt Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 gt 2 25 x FLA 86 1 oe lt gt Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 2 50 x FLA 66 6 Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 gt 2 75 x FLA 53 3 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 105 ESSAG 9 09 9 09 69 69 09 69 09 69 69 09 69 09 69 07 60 09 69 ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG rm ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG rm ESSAGE ESSAG rm ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAGE 5 106 m Ww Ww N o 1 N oH s N N m A D 4 50 x FLA 18 2 4 75 x FLA 16 2 5 00 x FLA 14 6 6 00 x F
42. 100 101 5 5 5 6 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS ESSAGE lt gt See 101 ESSAGE See page 102 COMMUNICATION gt m ESSAGE ae See page 102 MULTILIN gt 5 103 SETTINGS 107 gt m MESSAGE See page 107 SPEED2 5 1 2 Trips Alarms and Blocks The 469 has three basic categories of protection elements They are trips alarms and blocks TRIPS A 469 trip feature may be assigned to any combination of the two Auxiliary relays 2 AUXILIARY and 3 AUXILIARY in addition to the 1 TRIP Relay If a Trip becomes active the appropriate LED indicator on the 469 faceplate will illuminate to show which of the output relays has operated In addition to the Trip relay s a trip will always operate the Block Start relay Trip features are may be programmed as latched or unlatched Once a relay has been operated by a latched trip a reset must be performed to clear the trip when the condition is no longer present If there is a lockout time the Block Start relay will not reset until the lockout time has expired If an unlatched trip feature becomes active that trip will reset itself and associated output relays as soon as the condition that caused the trip ceases Immediately prior to issuing a trip the 469 takes a snapshot of motor parameters and stores them as pre trip values which will allow for troubleshooting after the trip occurs The c
43. 5 93 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS gt Range 50000 to 50000 steps of 1 MESSAGE 2 ide Units reflect ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS above e Range Over Under MESSAGE ANALOG INPUT 1 g TRIP _ Range 0 1 to 300 0 s steps of 0 1 Bere INPUT 1 There are 4 analog inputs 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 0 to 1 mA as selected These inputs may be used to monitor transducers such as vibration monitors tachometers pressure transducers etc These inputs may be used for alarm and tripping purposes The inputs are sampled every 50 ms The level of the analog input is also available over the communications port Before the input may be used it must be configured A name may be assigned for the input units may be assigned and a minimum and maximum value may be assigned Also the trip and alarm features may be blocked from start for a specified time delay If the block time is 0 there is no block and the trip and alarm features will be active when the motor is stopped or running If a time is programmed other than 0 the feature will be disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires Once the input is setup both the trip and alarm features may be configured In addition to programming a level and time delay the pickup settings may be used to dictate whether the feature picks up when the measured value is over or under the level For example if a pressure transducer is to be used
44. 54 1553 RELAY lt lt gt n cq DIAGRAM lt 8 25 gt gt SPARE lt lt 28 27 gt gt spare TRIP FROM T OTHER PROTECTION lt lt 61 gt gt SPARE N w iz enm SPARE aa SPARE Gi te SPAR SR469 are Hey SPARE 4 8j SPARE 98v CS T STOP 5110 a 619 Guz SPARE 19 uode SPARE 5 eT ey raj SPARE 1 pua 6v 256 OL 5117 Sens SPARE 5 V 20 2 5 00001 sij SPARE l vi 5118 5116 SOW THIS 5 00001 lt 1 2 SCH 1 UT SPARE SPARE 58469 58469 86 GR V _ SPARE 8 7 SPARE 410 qj SPAR CS T START TOC 7 8127 SPARE MAJ SPARE n4 13 Se 7 qns SPARE 3 PS2 f bb 24 es SPARE 2014 11 20 12 21 22 10 30 10 394005 20 806551A1 CDR FIGURE 1 4 Typical Breaker Control Diagram 1 22 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED TO BREAKER CONTROL DIACRAM SR469 52 10 1 RTU STATION RESET T MONITOR
45. COMMUNIGATIONS CONTROL ettet da tide et bit 5 20 REDUCED VOLTAGE Rr EE RR Ar Ee e ER 5 21 S3 DIGITAL INPUTS DESCRIPTION ann aa a STARTER STATU S dem ETE 5 25 ASSIGNABLE INPUTS 1 4 5 25 S4 OUTPUT as FREE D REPQEE FU ER Urt 5 34 DESCRIPTION RELAY RESET eere rete bete aber t uu og FORCE OUTPUT RELAY Det S5 THERMAL MODEL MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD CURVE SETUP are ra pee tcn etre e e 5 39 56 CURRENT ELEMENTS EE E Ek Uo eee kv prev e 5 59 SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP OVERLOAD ALARM MECHANICAL JAM CURRENT UNBALANCE 2 cree trente ee t ER abes uoa 5 62 GROUND FAULT PHASE DIFFERENTIAL sssessssscssesesssesssscesssscsssesessesesssesssscessscessssessesesssssssssesssseeseesssseesssecsssess 5 64 87 MOTOR STARTING PEE ETENE RNN 5 66 ACCELERATION TIMER rico irte rere Rr p teen 5 66 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC III TABLE OF CONTENTS START INHIBI T ete JOGGING BLOCK RESTART BLOCK 58 RTD TYPES nocan n
46. ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE lt gt 9 09 9 6909 09 0909 8960 09 7 ALARM TEMPERATURE 809 7 RELAYS 7 HIGH ALARM TEMPERATURE 80 C 7 ALARM EVENTS Off 7 TRIP 7 TRIP VOT ING ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS RTD 47 TRIP TEMPERATURE 90 C Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Stator Bearing Ambient Other None 8 alphanumeric characters Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched RTD 1 to RTD 12 Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS RTDs 7 through 10 default to Bearing RTD type There are individual alarm and trip configurations for each RTD This allows one of the RTDs to be turned off if it malfunctions The alarm level high alarm level and the trip level are normally set slightly above the n
47. If the 469 is applied on a synchronous motor it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied Therefore this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied From that point forward the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active Once the kvar level exceeds either the positive or negative level for the specified delay a trip or alarm will occur indicating a positive or negative kvar condition The reactive power alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step 469 MOTOR MANAGEME NT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 11 4 Underpower PATH SETTINGS gt V S10 POWER ELEMENTS gt V UNDERPOWER UNDERPOWER 6 MESSAGE MESSAGE Ped ESSAGE ESSAGE bod ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE pad ESSAGE ESSAGE BLOCK UNDERPOWER FROM START UNDERPOWER ALARM LEVEL 2 kW E T os TEE eo n UNDERPOWER ALARM DELAY 1 s UNDERPOWER ALARM EVENTS Off UNDERPOWER TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP 5 UNDERPOWER TRIP LEVEL 1 kW UNDERPOWER TRIP DELAY 1 s Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 1 to 30 5 steps of 1
48. On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 1 to 30 5 in steps of 1 If enabled once the magnitude of total power falls below the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay a trip or alarm will occur The Underpower element is active only when the motor is running and will be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time defi ned by the BLOCK ELEMENT FROM START settings e g this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element trips or alarms A value of 0 means the feature is not blocked from start If a value other than 0 is entered the feature will be di sabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires The pickup level should be set lower than motor loading during normal operations For example underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions Loss of load conditions will not a ways cause a significant loss of current Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss or pump cavitation This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 83 5 11 5 Reverse Power CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS PATH SETTINGS gt V S10 POWER ELEMENTS gt V REVERSE POW
49. Pickup 70 of nominal voltage starting 80 of nominal voltage running Time Delay 13 0 s Other Considerations e The function will be active only if there is voltage in the line feeding the motor to avoid nuisance trips due to the lack of voltage The 469 will consider the bus energized only 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED ifthe measured voltage is greater than 2096 of nominal voltage A trip condition will be initiated only if undervoltage is detected in all the phases e In order to monitor for VT Fuse Failure or to monitor for undervoltage in one phase only set an Alarm when the voltage is 9096 of nominal voltage both during start and running For the Undervoltage element enter the following values in the 89 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS gt V UNDERVOLTAGE settings page Press the ENTER key to save and then the MESSAGE key after each settings is completed to move to the next message U V ACTIVE ONLY IF BUS ENERGIZED Yes UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM Unlatched ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS Alarm UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM PICKUP 0 9 x RATED STARTING U V ALARM PICKUP 0 9 x RATED UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM DELAY 0 0 s UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM EVENTS Yes U U NDERVOLTAGE TRIP Latched NDRVOLTAGE TRIP MODE 3 Phase ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP PICKUP 0 8 x RATED STARTING U V TRIP PICKUP 0 7 x RATED UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP DELAY 13 0 s 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INST
50. See 82 ESSAGE UNDERPOWER See page 83 ESSAGE REVERSE See page 84 ESSAGE TORQUE See page 84 ESSAGE gt See page 85 gt OVERTORQUE END OF PAGE e e S 86 SETTINGS TRIP 709 MESSAGE lt gt CU NT See page 87 MESSAGE gt 87 gt DEMAND gt 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS lt gt gt SETTINGS gt SETTINGS 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL ESSAG rm ESSAGE ESSAG rm ESSAG rm ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAG rm ESSAG ESSAG rm ESSAG rm ESSAGE ESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE lt gt gt lt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Bg ANALOG B ANALOG 7 ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG INPUT gt ANALOG INPUT gt Bg SIMULATION See See See See See See See See See See See See See See See See See page page page page page page page page page page page page page page page page page 87 87 89 91 91 91 91 93 93 93 93 95 96 98 99
51. gt STARTER STATUS m This input is necessary for all motors The 469 determines that a motor has stopped when the phase current falls below the level that the relay can measure 596 of CT primary Monitoring an auxiliary contact from the breaker or contactor prevents the relay from detecting additional starts when an unloaded motor is loaded or issuing a block start after an unloaded motor is started and running at less than 596 CT rated primary current If Starter Auxiliary A is chosen terminals D16 and D23 are monitored to detect the breaker or contactor state open signifying the breaker or contactor is open and shorted signifying closed The 469 will then determine that a motor has made the transition from running to stopped only when the measured current is less than 596 CT ratio and the a contact is open If Starter Auxiliary B is chosen terminals D16 and D23 are monitored to detect the breaker or contactor state open signifying the breaker or contactor is closed and shorted signifying open The 469 then determines that a motor has made the transition from running to stopped only when the measured current is less than 596 CT ratio and the b contact is closed 5 4 3 Assignable Inputs 1 4 Main Menu PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 1 FUNCTION Range see below ASSIGNABLE 7 m 6 INPUT 2 FUNCTION see below ASSIGNABLE 7
52. typical estimate 230 conservative estimate EQ 5 4 where is per unit locked rotor current Motor Cooling The thermal capacity used value decreases exponentially when the motor current is less than the OVERLOAD PICKUP settings This reduction simulates motor cooling The motor cooling time constants should be entered for both stopped and running cases Since cooling is exponential the time constants are one fifth of the total time from 10096 thermal capacity used to 096 A stopped motor normally cools significantly slower than a running motor Motor cooling is calculated as 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 55 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS ed sed start end TC ced end EQ 5 5 TC leq Ja hot x 100 E used end ol pkp cold 9 EQ 5 6 where TCuseq thermal capacity used start value caused by overload condition TC seq Value dictated by the hot cold safe stall ratio when the motor is running 0 when the motor is stopped t time in minutes T Cool Time Constant running or stopped leg equivalent motor heating current ol pkp overload pickup settings as a multiple of FLA hot cold hot cold safe stall ratio 1
53. wl ER dwog Af 5 Wouvsnaanoo za 21 518 21 54 16 401918 335 _ a w Ll 01 BY 2s 2 9NINV38 sc pis 9L 010A NOUVSN3dROO va 22 38 ar 2 84 15 94 aie S NZ 8d 1S NZ B8d 18 gt d T 828 7f1z a3svud EI HOLVLS 5 as Exe 5 3sv d si 40 00 15 P G 301915 25 24 15 PINS 51 84 15 sa wane Z Ni ad is E Nouvsw3amoo 21 51238 18 dwog f 1 0MINOO 33 _ Z 3015 di 5d 15 21 84 15 1 YOLVLS 35019 15 15 01 1 3 oiv 15 81 84 15 pius 5 1 84 15 2 MOlvIS IOLIVSN3dWOO t 8d 385 nir air w RESI 4 OL asna 0028948 dwog 9 asvua 0115 15 Se va is 20 4 15 3011 35 40H di Vd 1S 92 34 15 42 15 3101915 gws pius v SIVE 114 Nune Que gv Ni vd 18 NI Vd 1S _ Ni vd 1S WVMHOVI
54. 106491C 469 Communications Guide The DeviceNet option is implemented by the 469 relay using the AnyBus S DeviceNet HMS module as a communication adapter The module is ODVA certified and acts as a server between the relay and the DeviceNet network The following master slave connection objects are supported by the 469 DeviceNet implementation e Explicit Messaging Connection e Poll I O Connection e Change of State or Cyclic I O Connection The following objects have been implemented Object Class DeviceNet objects Identity object 01 Message Router object 02h DeviceNet object 03 Assembly object 048 Connection object 05h Acknowledge Handler object 2Bh 469 specific objects Data Input Mapping object Parameter Data Input Mapping object BOh Refer to publication GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide for additional details on the DeviceNet implementation 5 12 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 2 4 Real Time Clock PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V REAL TIME CLOCK REAL DATE MM DD YYYY Range 01 to 12 01 to 31 1995 to TIME gt 01 01 1994 2094 TIME HH MM SS Range 00 to 25 hrs 00 to 59 min 00 12 00 00 to 59 sec The correct time and date must be entered for event recorder events to be correctly time date stamped A supercap backed internal clock runs for 45 days even when power is off It has
55. 12 11 2 1 H2 G1 RN Vb 5 VOLTAGE INPUTS o 806758A7 DWG GROUND BUS FIGURE 3 20 Wye Voltage Transformer Connection 3 2 6 Digital Inputs Y NOTE CAUTION The digital inputs of the 469 relay are designed for dry contact connection In an application where the contact inputs need to be connected to the 469 relay digital inputs using long cable it is recommended that you use interposing auxiliary contacts to interface between the 469 relay and the long digital input cable This will help prevent the relay falsely sensing the digital input as closed due to induced voltage on the cables as a result of the capacitive effect It is recommended that you use shielded twisted pair wires grounded at one end only for digital inputs and avoid locating these wires in close to current carrying cables contactors or other sources of high EMI DO NOT INJECT VOLTAGES TO DIGITAL INPUTS DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY There are 9 digital inputs designed for dry contact connections only Two of the digital inputs Access and Test have their own common terminal the balance of the digital inputs share one common terminal see FIGURE 3 12 Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3 11 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION In addition the 24 V DC switch supply is brought out for control power of an inductive or capacitive proximity probe The NPN transist
56. 6 3 FUNCTION Range see below ASSIGNABLE Off 6 INPUT 4 FUNCTION Range see below ASSIGNABLE J 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 25 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS There are four 4 user assignable digital inputs configurable to a number of different functions see below or turned Off Once a function is chosen any messages that follow may be used to set pertinent parameters for operation Each function may only be chosen once Assignable Inputs 1 to 4 are activated by shorting D19 to 022 respectively with 023 The range for the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION settings is Off Remote Alarm Remote Trip Speed Switch Trip Load Shed Trip Pressure Sw Alarm Pressure Switch Trip Vibration Sw Alarm Vibration Sw Trip Digital Counter Tachometer General Sw A General Sw B General Sw C General Sw D Capture Trace Simulate Pre Fault Simulate Fault Simulate Pre Fault Fault Two speed motor protection is enabled with the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V ENABLE 2 SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION settings If the two speed motor feature is enabled Assignable Input 4 is dedicated as the two speed motor monitor and terminals D22 and 023 are monitored for a contact closure Closure of the contact signifies that the motor is in Speed 2 or High Speed If the input is open it signifies that the motor is in Speed 1 This allows the 469 to determine which settings should be active at any given point in time
57. 9 79 to 10 19 sec 10000 A 10 00 5 55 sec 5 44 to 5 66 sec 7 3 2 Power Measurement Test The specification for reactive and apparent power is 1 of x2 x CT x VT x VT full scale at layg lt 2 x CT Perform the steps below to verify accuracy 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 71 gt Alter the following settings CHAPTER 7 TESTING S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt PHASE CT PRIMARY 1000 S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt VT CONNECTION TYPE Wye S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt V VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO 10 00 1 gt Inject current and apply voltage as per the table below gt Verify accuracy of the measured values gt View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA gt V POWER METERING Vc 120 V 21689 Vc 120 Z168 INJECTED INJECTED EXPECTE TOLERAN MEASURE EXPECT MEASURE CURRENT 1A CURRENT 5A D LEVEL CERANGE D POWER ED D POWER UNIT APPLIED UNIT APPLIED OF OFPOWER QUANTIT POWER FACTOR VOLTAGE the VOLTAGE Ia is the POWER QUANTITY Y FACTOR reference vector reference vector QUANTIT Y la 1 209 la 5 40 Ib 1 21209 Ib 5 21209 3329 Ic 1 A 22409 Ic 5 A 22409 to 120 23426 1 120 23422 3424 3519 0 95 lag Vb 120 V 21029 Vb 120 V 21029 kW Vc 120 V 22229 Vc 120 V 72229 1 209 la 5 40 Ib 1 A 21209 I
58. CALIBRATION INFORMATION DIAGNOSTICS Ere Rte Re DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FLASH MESSAGES onec Deb ere 7 TESTING DIEN e M IP E ELE pM DEUS US 7 1 TEST SETUP tete 7 1 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING esee 7 3 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST ccsssssssssssssssesssesssesssessecsssessecssscssecssscsnsceseeeseceseeesecesees 7 3 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY 7 3 GROUND AND DIFFERENTIAL ACCURACY TEST my GE MULTILIN 50 0 025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST 1 5 TEST eiie CHR RA AG UAR CREER 7 5 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION sss 7 7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS cbe ect tte ei e tee 7 8 OUTPUT RELAYS ota e tta C A 7 10 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 7 11 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST 7 11 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST 7 11 UNBALANCE MEST 7 12 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST 7 13 SHORPGIRCUIT EST zu ra te ceteri 7 14 APPENDIX TWO PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ertet rear eniris i pro 1 DESCRIPTION ec i tete 1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC V TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC VI C
59. CHANGING SETPOINTS CLEAR DATA d aiite ete ee aee usd decirte dece e unn IEEE COMMUNICATIONS OMG TS PEE 5 102 5 20 5 102 85232 4 11 4 16 4 18 5485 3 24 4 12 4 16 4 18 cc 5 10 5 20 5 102 specifications WIIG CONTACTOR ALTERNATE WIRING 3 24 CONTROL POWER it GOSGCRIP TOM ie stc iecore cipe coe cis paca COOL TIME CONSTANTS eere CORE BALANCE GROUND feror M M 3 15 siepe D 3 16 CTs mig 3 16 3 13 3 14 5 17 ground 8 phase 5 see CURRENT TRANSFORMER CURRENT o nee ee e ete reet 5 87 6 15 CURRENT METERIING nier t Ete 6 11 CURRENT SEN SING i iiie erit ete rete e e e e HERE 5 17 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ca M A 6 CURRENT UNBALANCE actual value event record pre trip value 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTERI AN ML 5 62
60. CHAPTER 7 TESTING S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt VT CONNECTION TYPE Wye or Delta S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V POWER SYSTEM gt V SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE ABC S9 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS gt V PHASE REVERSAL gt PHASE REVERSAL TRIP Latched S9 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS gt V PHASE REVERSAL gt V ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip gt Apply voltages as per the table below Verify the 469 operation on voltage phase reversal Vc 120 V Z120 APPLIED VOLTAGE EXPECTED RESULT OBSERVED RESULT 8 NO TRIP 8 NO TRIP 4 PHASE REVERSAL 4 PHASE REVERSAL TRIP TRIP Va 120 V Z0 Vb 120V 21209 8 Vc 120 V Z240 120 V Z0 Vb 120 V 22409 4 7 5 5 Short Circuit Test The 469 specification for short circuit timing is 50 ms The pickup accuracy is as per the phase current inputs Perform the steps below to verify the performance of the short circuit element S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING S6 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt SHORT CIRCU S6 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt SHORT CIRCU S6 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt SHORT CIRCU CT 56 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt SHORT CIRCU gt Alter the following settings PHASE CT PRIMARY 1000 IT TRIP gt SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP On IT TRIP gt ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip IT TRIP gt SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP PICKUP 5 0 x IT TRIP gt V INTENTIONAL S C DELAY 0 gt Inject current as per the table below resetting the unit after each trip by pr
61. Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Instruction Manual Software Revision 5 1x Manual P N 1601 0122 A9 Manual Order Code GEK 106474H Copyright 2010 GE Multilin GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham Ontario Canada L6E 183 Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098 Internet http www GEmultilin com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to 005094 UL A3775 2010 Incorporated All rights reserved GE Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay instruction manual for revision 5 1x 469 Motor Management Relay is a registered trademark of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part numbers contained in this manual are subject to change without notice and should therefore be verified by GE Multilin before ordering Part number 1601 0122 9 April 2010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents 1 GETTING STARTED IMPORTANT PROCEDURES Rr ne disais 1 1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS u cccccssssssssssssssessssesssccsssssscssscssssssssssssssssssssssusssucsssessucssseesseesee INSPECTION CHECKLIST MANUAL ORGANIZATION USING THE RELAY aa MENU NA
62. E POWER FACTOR TRIP 1 0 8 El 2 0 to 5000 s steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 0 05 to 1 00 in steps of 0 01 Enter 1 00 to turn feature off 0 05 to 1 00 in steps of 0 01 Enter 1 00 to turn feature off 0 2 to 30 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 0 05 to 1 00 in steps of 0 01 Enter 1 00 to turn feature off 0 05 to 1 00 in steps of 0 01 Enter 1 00 to turn feature off 0 2 to 30 0 s in steps of 0 1 5 applied on a synchronous motor it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power the field has been applied Therefore this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied From that point forward the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active Once the power factor is less than either the Lead or Lag level for the specified delay a trip or alarm will occur indicating a Lead or Lag condition The power factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step The 469 is not designed to estimate power factor when both of the following condition
63. HGF3C 5 95 1 81 46 10 143 m 28 58 1 i 5 24 25 152 40 1 6 38 162 05 38 85 85 Jy _ LL 1 06 5 25 m 26 92 6 00 A 6 152 40 ed 133 35 2 28 X 38 SLOTS 7 X 10 SECONDARY EXCITING RMS VOLTAGE 60 Hz A APPENDIX 10000 05 01 0 2 SECONDARY EXCITING RMS AMPS 60 Hz le 1 001 002 005 0 01 02 0 5 10 2 5 10 808840A1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX HGF5C mi 4 10 2 98 17125 104 1 75 7 32 5 0 56 4 0 44 X 1 00 SLOTS 14 2 11 2 25 4 SECONDARY VOLTAGE 60 Hz 4 25 107 001 002 005 01 02 0 05 01 02 05 10 2 5 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT 60Hz 171 5 6 75 22 40 88 a 808841A1 4 0 56 DIA HOLES 14 2 10000 L 1 LLL FI 0 56 L 4 0 44 X 1 00 SLOTS p 142 11 21 25 4 g x 1 57 11 10 282 0 44 IT 0 75 100 19 o x1 z 9 5 L Ill 8 711 11 47 a 291 3 a 001 002 005 01 02 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 SECONDARY EXC
64. INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Remote Trip Once the Remote Trip function is chosen for one of the assignable digital inputs the settings messages shown here will follow the assignment message A trip relay may be selected and the name of the trip may be altered A contact closure on the digital input assigned as Remote Trip will cause a trip within 100 ms with the name that has been chosen Multiple sources may be used to trigger a remote trip by paralleling inputs REMOTE PUSH BUTTON 469 Digital Input Dry contact from other device 808716A1 CDR FIGURE 5 4 Remote Alarm Trip from Multiple Sources Speed Switch Trip PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 B 0 INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Speed Switch Trip ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 RELAYS SPEED SWITCH TRIP Range 1 0 to 250 0 s in steps of 0 1 TIME DELAY 5 0 s These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Speed Switch Trip When this function is assigned to a digital input the following will occur When a transition from stopped to start is detected a timer will be loaded with the delay programmed If that delay expires before a contact closure is detected a trip will occur Once the motor is stopped the scheme is reset Load Shed Trip
65. INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER I see 5 START BLOCK RELAY START BLOCKS osten rere TRES EE 6 9 eee ee ERR 5 66 STARTER IARE LE RET 5 86 e 5 16 5 24 6 31 status status switch STARTING CURRENT rte rtr treten rie STARTING THERMAL CAPACITY STARTS HOUR STARTS HOUR BLOCK us STATOR RESISTANCE ertet terere Bender ee nn R TO Daiei ce eere dete nte STATOR STATUS sire E Diese rere been i RR dO e HERE SUMMATION SYSTEM FREQUENCY SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE T TACHOMETER VOUS event pre trip value rostri em er retine specifications TACHOMETER TRIPS USED MARGIN rente en eret TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TERMINALS LOCATIONS qe 3 9 SPC CINCO Em 2 16 terminal list TEST ANALOG OUTPUT TEST OUTPUT RELEAYS tede ette ce teet ile ee 5 101 TEST SUITE a Us E decesserit ean anaes 5 24 TESTS analog Input output E etta pb differential
66. MOTOR HOT coumensaron 870 7 um NI I ee MOTOR Senn arp 8 E a gt PUMP HOT START COIL RTD 9 I TL 2 10 SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR 98 10 11 60 OUTPUT CONTACTS Multilin SHOWN WITH NO IND EFFECT 469 CONTROL POWER STARTER STATUS MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY 24 8 Li g ACCESS he COMPUTER AUXILIARY ANALOG 1 0 Ld RS485 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG INPUTS ET ze Sl el lll e A CL KT TT COMPUTER RS232 T MASTER TS ba common COMMON PORT gia LTHERMAL CAPACITY 4 20 LAG MOTOR tow Low ANALOG p STATOR RTDs BEARING BEARING2 BEARING BEARING INPUT jas SELF POWERED VIBRATION TRANSDUCERS PLC or COMPUTER 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 07 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Chapter 4 Interfaces 4 1 Faceplate Interface 4 1 1 4 1 2 Description Display The front panel provides local operator interface with a liquid crystal display LED status indicators control keys and progra
67. Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A8 SECT SECT CHANGE DESCRIPTION A7 A8 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A8 3 1 7 3 1 7 3 11 3 2 1 3 2 1 Figure 3 12 revised 3 1 Revision CT drawings revised 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX Table A 3 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A7 SECT SECT CHANGE DESCRIPTION A6 A7 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A7 5 11 6 5 11 6 Update Change Pole Pairs to step 1 Table A 4 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision SECT SECT CHANGE DESCRIPTION 5 6 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A6 2 1 3 2 1 3 Update Change DC power supply range Table A 5 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A5 PAG PAG CHANGE DESCRIPTION E E A4 A5 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A5 2 14 2 14 Update Changes to ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE value Table A 6 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A4 PAG PAG CHANGE DESCRIPTION E E A3 A4 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A4 3 22 3 22 Update Updated DIELECTRIC STRENGTH section Table A 7 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A3 PAG PAG CHANGE DESCRIPTION E E A2 A3 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 01
68. Phase A Current E 4 Phasor Set 1 5 Select Phasor Sets Graphl Graph2 469 Relay 1 Phasors New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data The following phasor diagram illustrates the vector diagram of our example By definition power factor is the cosine of the angle between the phase to neutral voltages and the corresponding phase current In this example 18 2 is the angle between Van and la Vbn and Ib and Vcn and Ic Since the relay is measuring phase phase quantities and Vab is the reference phasor the angle displayed by the relay takes into consideration the 30 angle between phase phase and phase neutral voltages 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 21 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Phase Rotation uec eL System Voltages Vab Vbc Vca N Vcn Measured Voltages Vab VA G2 G1 VC H2 G1 Vab lb Calculated Voltage uu Vac Vbc Displayed Voltages Va Vab Vb 0 Vbc Vbe 806559A1 CDR FIGURE 6 7 Phasor Diagram for Open Delta Example Table 6 1 Three phase Open Delta VT Connection ABC 0 3 pf 72 5 0 7 pf 1 00 pf 0 7 pf 0 3 pf 72 5 Rotation lag 45 lag 02 lag 45 lead lead Va 0 0 02 0 0 Vc 300 300 300 300 300 la 100 75 30 345 320 Ib 220 195 150 105 80 Ic 340 315 270 225 200 kw
69. Pickup accuracy 2 2 0 100 ms or 0 5 of total time Alarm induction motors only POWER FACTOR aues eee opted 0 01 lead or lag to 1 00 Pickup leuel cce 0 99 to 0 05 in steps of 0 01 lead and lag tede dte tees 0 2 to 30 0 s in steps of 0 1 Block fromy start arisini 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 Pickup accuracy 0 02 TIMING aceuracys cet 100 ms or 0 596 of total time bet eec Trip and Alarm PRONG m 010 65535 kVA ACCUFQCVS eite triente lt 2 X CT 1 of 3 x 2x CTX VT X scale lavg gt 2 X CT 1 5 of x 20 x CT x VT x Elermernte cette tete Trip and Alarm RONGE S 0 10 99999 Pickup 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 0 2 to 30 0 s in steps of 0 1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION Block fromyistart actes 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 Pickup accuracy 2 layg lt 2 x CT 1 of 3 x 2 x CTX VT x scale at lgyg gt 2 X CT 1 5 of 43 x 20x CT x VT x scale Timing accuracy s 100ms or 0 596 of total time Trip and Alarm RANGES 0 to 99999 kw PICKUP is teret 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 TIME deliye 1 to 30 5 steps of 1 Block from start d 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1 Pickup Accuracy lgyg lt 2 x CT 41 of 3 x 2x CT x VT X scale lavg gt 2 x CT 1 5 of
70. S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt PHASE CT PRIMARY 1000 S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA 1000 55 THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL gt SELECT CURVE STYLE Standard 55 THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL gt V OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL 1 10 S5 THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL gt V UNBALANCE BIAS FACTOR 0 55 THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL gt V HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO 1 00 S5 THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL gt V ENABLE RTD BIASING No S5 THERMAL MODEL gt CURVE SETUP gt STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE NUMBER 4 Any trip must be reset prior to each test gt Short the emergency restart terminals momentarily immediately prior to each overload curve test to ensure that the thermal capacity used is zero Failure to do so will result in shorter trip times gt Inject the current of the proper amplitude to obtain the values as shown gt Verify the trip times Motor load may be viewed in A2 METERING DATA gt CURRENT METERING Thermal capacity used and estimated time to trip may be viewed in 1 STATUS gt MOTOR STATUS AVERAGE PICKUP EXPECTED TOLERANCE MEASURED PHASE LEVEL TIME TO RANGE TIME TO CURRENT TRIP TRIP DISPLAYED 1050A 1 05 never n a 1200A 1 20 795 44 sec 779 53 to 811 35 sec 1750A 1 75 169 66 sec 166 27 to 173 05 sec 3000 A 3 00 43 73 sec 42 86 to 44 60 sec 6000 A 6 00 9 99 sec
71. The number of cycles to average can be determined by using current waveform capture The number of cycles to complete one stroke can be determined from this waveform This value can be used as the starting point for the motor load filter interval Additional fine tuning may be required This settings is not seen if NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY is Variable This averaging may increase trip alarm times by 16 7 ms for every cycle averaged WARNING 5 2 5 Communications Serial Communications The following settings appear when the relay is ordered with the regular enhanced E option PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE ADDRESS Range 1 to 254 in steps of 1 COMPUTER RS485 Range 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 Range None Odd Even AUXILIARY 85485 Range 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 BAUD RATE 9600 Bm AUXILIARY RS485 Range None Odd Even ESSAGE lt gt The 469 has three 3 serial communications ports supporting subset of the Modbus protocol Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide The front panel RS232 has a fixed baud rate of 9600 a fixed data frame of 1 start 8 data and 1 stop bits with no parity The front port is for local use only and responds regardless of the slave address programmed This port may be connected to a personal computer running EnerVista 469 Setup The software can download and upload settings files as well as upgrade the 469 firmware ESSAG
72. _ 780 6018 1798 6 601 8 798 6 423 6 _ 0 1532 780 992 5 121 9 992 5 121 9 2765 If FLA 1000 then 780 1000 1000 jg 92674 EQ 7 4 and since lavg 926 7 lt 1000 FLA the 469 unbalance is 926 7 469 Unbalance 0 1532 x x 10096 14 296 EQ 7 5 1000 The 469 specification for unbalance accuracy is 296 Perform the steps below to verify accuracy gt Alter the following settings S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt PHASE CT PRIMARY 1000 A S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA 1000 A gt Inject the values shown in the table below gt Verify accuracy of the measured values gt View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA gt CURRENT METERING INJECTED CURRENT EXPECTED MEASURED UNBALANCE UNBALANCE 1A UNIT 5 A UNIT LEVEL LEVEL la 0 78 A ZO la 3 9 Z0 21139 Ib 5 21139 14 lc 1 2472 Ic 5 A Z247 la 1 56 02 la 7 8 A Z0 Ib 2 A 2472 Ib 10 A 22479 15 Ilc 2 A 21139 Ic 10 A 21139 la 0 39 A 202 la 1 95 A 40 10 0 5 72479 2 5 72479 7 Ilc 0 5 41139 1 25 21139 7 3 4 Voltage Phase Reversal Test The 469 can detect voltage phase rotation and protect against phase reversal To test the phase reversal element perform the following steps 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 13 gt Alter the following settings
73. and a motor with the following specifications Motor Nameplate FLA 87 A Low Resistance Grounded Maximum Fault 400 A The following settings are required PHASE CT PRIMARY 100 MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS 87 GROUND CT 5 A Secondary GROUND CT PRIMARY 100 Example 2 Consider a 469 with a 5 A Phase CT secondary and Ground Fault Detection set to Residual and a motor with the following specifications Motor Nameplate FLA 255 A Solidly Grounded Maximum Fault 10000 A Zero Sequence Ground CT 10000 20 500 1 The following settings are required PHASE CT PRIMARY 300 MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS 255 GROUND CT 5 A Secondary GROUND CT PRIMARY 500 Example 3 Again consider a 469 with a 5 A Phase CT secondary and Ground Fault Detection set to Residual and a motor with the following specifications Motor Nameplate FLA 330 A High Resistance Grounded Maximum Fault 5 A The following settings are required 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS PHASE CT PRIMARY 350 MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS 330 GROUND CT 50 0 025 5 3 2 Voltage Sensing PATH SETTINGS gt S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING VT CONNECTION Range Open Delta Wye None VOLTAGE TYPE Range CN OFF or OFF REAGE ENABLE SINGLE VT g OPERATION OFF 4 Range 1 00 1 to 300 00 1 steps of VOLTAGE TRANS 2 FORMER Range 100 to 36000 V steps of 1 T
74. if applicable Time dial or multiplier Any additional intentional time delay Directionality if applicable Define how many output contacts will be energized in response to a given protection function Note that the 469 relay can be programmed to Trip or Alarm and at the same time to energize one a combination or all the 2 auxiliary relays during the process Define if the output relays will be set as failsafe type Define if the 469 relay will be used to start the motor If so gather information on the required conditions to execute the command Define if the 469 will be involved in the motor starting process particularly on reduced voltage start applications Define if the 469 will be applied a multi speed applications Define if the relay will be used to monitor the status of the starter or breaker It is strongly recommended that the 469 be always programmed to monitor the status of the disconnecting device by means of a dry contact connected to one of the digital inputs of the relay Use an auxiliary contact from the breaker or starter either a normally open contact 52a which is normally in open position when the disconnecting device is open or a normally closed contact 52b which is in close position when the breaker or starter is open If the 469 will be used to respond to digital inputs record the following information Digital Input name Condition by which the digital input would be considered ass
75. or asserted logic inputs These messages provide a summary of the present state of the relay The Message LED flashes when there are diagnostic messages available press the MENU key until the relay displays TARGET MESSAGES then press the 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 7 4 8 4 5 MESSAGE P key followed MESSAGE key to scroll through the messages For additional information and a complete list of diagnostic messages refer to Diagnostic Messages on page 6 37 4 1 8 Self Test Warnings The 469 relay performs self test diagnostics at initialization after power up and continuously as a background task to ensure the hardware and software is functioning correctly Self test warnings indicate either a minor or major problem Minor problems are problems that does not compromise motor protection Major problems are very serious problems that compromise all aspects of relay operation Upon detection of either a minor or a major problem the relay will e De energize the self test warning relay e Light the self test warning LED e Flash a diagnostic message periodically on the display screen Table 4 1 Self Test Warnings Message Severity Failure description Caused by detection of a corrupted location in the program memory as determined by a CRC error check Any function of the relay is susceptible to malfunction from this failure Self Test Warning 1 Replace Im
76. program 0 5 1 hot 2 cold starts as the HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX e Programming the START INHIBIT settings to On makes a restart possible as soon as 62 596 50 x 1 25 thermal capacity is available After two 2 cold or one 1 hot start the thermal capacity used will approach 10096 The thermal capacity used decays exponentially see Motor Cooling on page 5 55 for details As such the thermal capacity used after 1 time constant will be 3796 meaning there is enough thermal capacity available for another start Program 300 minutes 5 hours as the COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED settings Thus after two 2 cold or one 1 hot start a stopped motor will be blocked from starting for 5 hours e Since rotor cools faster when the motor is running a reasonable setting for the running cool time constant might be half the stopped cool time constant or 150 minutes 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A 5 3 Current Transformers A 3 1 Ground Fault CTs for 50 0 025 A CT CTs that are specially designed to match the ground fault input of GE Multilin motor protection relays should be used to ensure correct performance These CTs have a 50 0 025 2000 1 ratio and can sense low leakage currents over the relay setting range with minimum error Three sizes are available with 312 inch 5 inch or 8 inch diameter windows
77. 0 A Not seen if ESSAGE lt gt EVENTO1 0 00 A Ground CT is set as None iade 0 B 0 Range 0 to 5000 A Seen only if Phase Differential CT is set gt 0 A Diff gt 5 STATOR Range 50 250 C Seen E if at least 1 RTD is set as Stator gt i _ gt BEARING Range 50 to 250 C Seen ESSAGE if at least 1 RTD is Bearing _ gt HoTTEST OTHER Range 50 to 250 C no Seen ESSAGE if at least 1 RTD is set as Other gt Range 50 to 250 C Seen if at least 1 is Ambient gt vab 0 0 Range 0 to 20000 A Not seen if VT ESSAGE 0 Connection set None gt Van 0 Range 0 to 20000 A Seen only if VT cn EVE Connection set as Wye lt lt 3 gt SYSTEM FREQUENCY Range 0 00 20 00 to 120 00 Hz Not EVENTO1 0 00 Hz seen if VT Connection is None _ o kW 0 Range 50000 to 50000 kVA Not seen ESSAGE kVA if VT Connection is set as None 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 33 6 34 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES POWER FACTOR Range 0 01 to 0 99 Lead or Lag 0 00 ESSAGE EVENTO1 0 00 1 00 Not seen if VT Connection is set as None TORQUE Range 0 to 999999 9 Seen only if ESSAGE AS EVENTO1 0 0 Nm To
78. 0 hr JESSICE TIME BETWEEN Range 0 to 500 min gt sTARTS Range to 60 MESSAGE ET HOUR TIM One of the 469 timers accumulates the total running time for the Motor This may be useful for scheduling routine maintenance When this timer exceeds 100000 it will reset to O This timer can be cleared using the 1 469 SETUP gt V INSTALLATION gt V RESET MOTOR INFORMATION settings The TIME BETWEEN STARTS TIMER value may be viewed here This value might be useful for planning a motor shutdown The STARTS HOUR TIMER value is also viewable here 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 6 5 Event Recorder 6 6 1 Event 01 to Event 256 PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A5 EVENT RECORDER EVENT 01 256 B EVENT TIME EVENT Oi Range hour minutes seconds 01 t gt 9 00 00 00 0 Cause escage DATE OF EVENT 01 Range month day year Jan 01 1992 _ gt MoTOR SPEED DUR Range High Speed Low Speed Seen if two speed feature is enabled DURING Range 0 to 3600 RPM Seen only if a EVENTO1 0 RPM Digital Input is Tachometer TN lt gt 0 0 Range 0 to 100000 A amp 0 A EVEN T e MOTOR LOAD Range 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA j x EVENT01 0 00 x lt CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 0 to 100 EVENTO1 05 gt GROUND CURRENT Range 0 00 to 5000
79. 1 Overview 6 1 1 Actual Values Map The actual values message map is shown below ACTUAL 09 NETWORK e VALUES gt STATUS pos lt gt MESSAGE MOTOR See 5 sTATUS gt MESSAGE LAST See page 5 gt TRIP gt ALARM MESSAGE gt A See page 7 STATUS gt MESSAGE START See page 9 lt gt BLOCKS gt MESSAGE lt gt See page 9 gt MESSAGE REAL See page 10 gt gt MESSAGE lt gt gt ACTUAL 11 e lt gt VALUES gt 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 1 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES gt ESSAGE See page 12 gt TEMPERATURE ESSAGE lt gt 13 VOLTAGE ESSAGE See page 13 gt 55 14 gt 55 See page 15 gt ESSAGE See page 15 lt ANALOG B ESSAGE See page 16 x PHASORS ESSAGE lt gt lt gt gt ACTUAL 8 T ee page 27 VALUES is B ESSAGE See page 28 ESSAGE gt BIP See 28 MAXIMUMS gt gt ESSAGE ANALOG See 29 gt INPUT gt ESSAGE END OF PAGE gt ACTUAL See 30 VALUES gt TRIP MESSAGE S
80. 1 Overview 7 11 TestSetup The purpose of this testing description is to demonstrate the procedures necessary to perform a complete functional test of all the 469 hardware while also testing firmware hardware interaction in the process Since the 469 is packaged in a drawout case a demo case metal carry case in which an 469 may be mounted may be useful for creating portable test set Testing of the relay during commissioning using a primary injection test set will ensure that CTs and wiring are correct and complete 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 1 CHAPTER 7 TESTING 3 PHASE VARIABLE AC TEST SET 62 H1 H2 66 H6 67 H7 68 CONTRO m m m RS485 85485 va wo veom 6 1 1 5 PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE GROUND GROUND PHASE PHASE PHASE VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS BUS DRAWOUT qe INDICATOR F12 B1 RTD SHIELD l 500 Ohms FJ 1 TRIP E11 soo PATE COMPENSATION SUPERVISION F11 hs RTO RETURN SWITCH A4 C
81. 20 00 x CT in steps of lt PHASE B 0 00 x 0 01 esacp lt PRE FAULT CURRENT Range 0 00 to 20 00 x CT in steps of lt gt 0 00 x 0 01 lt PRE FAULT GROUND Range 0 0 to 5000 0 A in steps of 0 1 CURRENT 0 0 ESSAGE gt PRE FAULT VOLT Range 0 00 to 1 10 x RATED in steps of 5 0 01 lt PRE FAULT CURRENT Range 0 to 359 steps of 1 lt gt LAGS VOLTAGE 00 gt PRE FAULT DIFF Range 0 00 to 1 10 x RATED in steps of ESSAGE 2 x AMPS PRE FAULT STATOR Range 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 gt RTD TEMP 40 C ESSAGE gt PRE FAULT BEARING Range 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 gt TEMP 40 C ESSAGE gt PRE FAULT OTHER Range 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 gt TEMP 40 C ESSAGE gt PRE FAULT AMBIENT Range 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 gt RTD TEMP 40 C PRE FAULT SYSTEM Range 45 0 to 70 0 Hz in steps of 0 1 4 gt FREQUENCY 60 0 PRE FAULT ANALOG Range 010 100 in steps of 1 gt 1 05 ESSAGE gt PRE FAULT ANALOG Range 010 100 in steps of 1 j gt INPUT 2 05 PRE FAULT ANALOG Range 0 to 100 in steps of 1 lt gt 3 0 ESSAGE PRE FAULT ANALOG Range 0 to 100 in steps of 1 INPUT 4 0 The values entered under Pre Fault Values will be substitu
82. 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS If turned On the Mechanical Jam element function as follows After a motor start a Trip occurs once the magnitude of la Ib or Ic exceeds the Pickup Level x FLA for a period of time specified by the MECHANICAL JAM DELAY settings This feature may be used to indicate a stall condition when running Not only does it protect the motor by taking it off line quicker than the thermal model overload curve it may also prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment if motor starting torque persists on jammed or broken equipment The MECHANICAL JAM PICKUP level should be set higher than motor loading during normal operation but lower than the motor stall level Normally the delay is set to the minimum time delay or set so that no nuisance trips occur due to momentary load fluctuations 5 7 4 Undercurrent PATH SETTINGS gt V S6 CURRENT ELEM gt V UNDERCURRENT IBLOCK UNDERCUR Range 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1 UNDERCURRENT 6 UNDERCURRENT Range Off Latched Unlatched ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None UNDERCURRENT Range 0 10 to 0 95 x FLA in steps of ESSAGE 001 UNDERCURRENT Range 1 to 60 5 in steps of 1 ALARM UNDERCURRENT Range On Off ALARM gt UNDERCURRENT Range Off Latched Unlatc
83. A 2 1 Selection of Cool Time Constants Thermal limits are not a black and white science and there is some art to setting a protective relay thermal model The definition of thermal limits mean different things to different manufacturers and information is often not available Therefore it is important to remember the goal of the motor protection thermal modeling to thermally protect the motor rotor and stator without impeding the normal and expected operating conditions of the motor The 469 thermal model provides integrated rotor and stator heating protection If supplied with the motor the cooling time constants recommended by the manufacturer should be used Since rotor and stator heating and cooling is integrated into a single model use of the longest cooling time constants rotor or stator is recommended If no cooling time constants are provided by the motor manufacturer settings will have to be determined Before determining the cool time constant settings the motor duty cycle must be considered If the motor is typically started up and run continuously for very long periods of time with no overload duty requirements the cooling time constants can be large making the thermal model conservative If the normal duty cycle of the motor involves frequent starts and stops with a periodic overload duty requirement the cooling time constants will be shorter and closer to the actual thermal limit of the motor Normally motors are rotor l
84. ACCELERATION TIMER y ACCELERATION Range Off Latched Unlatched ACCELERATION TIMER gt ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp MESSAGE RELAYS 2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary Range 1 0 to 250 0 s in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE lt gt 5 The thermal model protects the motor under both starting and overload conditions acceleration timer trip may be used to complement this protection For example if the motor always starts in 2 seconds but the safe stall time is 8 seconds there is no point letting the motor remain in a stall condition for 7 or 8 seconds when the thermal model would take it off line Furthermore the starting torque applied to the driven equipment for that period of time could cause severe damage If enabled the Acceleration Timer functions as follows A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 469 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current Typically current rises quickly to a value in excess of FLA e g 6 x FLA At this point the acceleration timer will be initialized with the ACCELERATION TIMER FROM START value in seconds If the current does not fall below the overload curve pickup level before the timer expires an acceleration trip will occur If the acceleration time of the motor is variable this feature should be set just beyond the longest acceleration time Some motor soft starters allow current to ramp up slowly while others lim
85. ACCESS DENIED TO ACCESS DENIED SHORT ACUEI RESETS ADVANCE THE CUR ENTER PASSCODE SWITCH HAVE BEEN PER SOR FORMED ARE YOU SURE PRESS ENTER TO VERIFY DATA CLEARED DATE ENTRY DATE ENTRY WAS SUCCESSFULLY OUT OF RANGE NOT COMPLETE DEFAULT MESSAGES 6 TO 20 ARE ASSIGNED END OF LIST END OF PAGE FUNCTION ALREADY ASSIGNED FOR ACCESS Sie INVALID PASSCODE INVALID SERVICE KEY PRESSED IS NEW PASSCODE ENTERED CODE ENTERED INVALID HERE HAS BEEN ACCEPTED NO ALARMS NO START BLOCKS ACTIVE DEFAULT MESSAGE DEFAULT MESSAGE DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN ADDED HAS BEEN REMOVED LIST IS FULL PRESS ENTER TO PRESS ENTER TO RESET PERFORMED me REMOVE MESSAGE SUCCESSFULLY DEFAULT MESSAGE settings ACCESS settings ACCESS IS IS NOW PERMITTED NOW RESTRICTED TIME ENTRY WAS TOP OF LIST TOP OF PAGE NOT COMPLETE KEYIS USED TO ADVANCE THE CURSOR Any time a settings that requires text editing is viewed this message will appear immediately to prompt the user to use the decimal key for cursor control If the settings is not altered for one 1 minute the message will flash again THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED ROUNDED settings HAS BEEN STORED e ACCESS DENIED ENTER PASSCODE 469 has passcode security feature If that feature has been enabled not only do the access switch terminals have to be shorted but the passcode must also be entered If the correct passcode has been lost or 46
86. Auxiliary Relays 2 and 3 Each can be selected individually or in combination in response to customer specific requirements which can be initiated by any protection element or function whose ASSIGN RELAYS settings has them selected gt Select the Ss CURRENT ELEM gt SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP gt V ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS settings message ASSIGN TRIP If an application requires the short circuit protection element to operate the Auxiliary Output 3 relay gt Select this output relay by pressing the value key until the desired combination appear in the display ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip amp Auxiliary3 Press the ENTER key to store this change into memory As before confirmation of this action will momentarily flash on the display NEW SETTINGS HAS BEEN STORED 1 3 6 Text Settings Text settings have data values which are fixed in length but user defined in character They may be composed of uppercase letters lowercase letters numerals and a selection of special characters The editing and storing of a text value is accomplished using the decimal VALUE and ENTER keys For example Move to message S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 gt INPUT 1 FUNCTION and scrolling with the VALUE keys select General Sw A The relay will display the following message INPUT 1 FUNCTION General Sw A gt Press the MESSAGE key to view the next settings SWITCH NAME The name of this user defined
87. CADocumerts and Settings 410001262 My Documents 760 Wavetorm Capture Tigher 3 Comtrade Display graph values CURSOR at the corresponding FILE NAME LINES TRIGGER LINE cursor line Cursor Indicates the To move lines locate the mouse pointer Indicates the lines are identified by file name and over the cursor line then click and drag point in time for their colors complete path the cursor to the new location the trigger if saved FIGURE 4 7 Waveform Capture Window Attributes The red vertical line indicates the trigger point of the relay The date and time of the trigger is displayed at the top left corner of the window To match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it make note of the time and date shown in the graph Then find the event that matches the same time and date in the event INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 39 4 40 4 5 recorder The event record will provide additional information on the cause and the system conditions at the time of the event Additional information on how to download and save events is shown in Event Recorder on page 4 45 gt From the window main menu bar press the Preference button to change the graph attributes E enerVista 469Setup Active Screen Waveform C DOCUME 1 410001 1 LOCALS 1 Temp Eile Setpoint Actual Communications View Help I ET i A button The following window will appear Comtrade Setup
88. COMMON A24 Analog Input 2 F05 4 Alarm NO A25 Analog Input 3 FO6 4 Alarm NC A26 Analog Input 4 FO7 5 Block Start Common A27 Analog Input Common F08 6 Service NO B01 RTD Shield F09 6 Service NC B02 Auxiliary RS485 F10 not used B03 Auxiliary 85485 211 Coil Supervision 804 Auxiliary 85485 Common F12 469 Drawout Indicator C01 Access 601 Phase VT Neutral C02 Access 602 Phase VT C03 469 Under Test 603 Differential C04 469 Under Test 504 Differential B 001 7 Hot 605 Differential 002 7 Compensation G06 Phase A CT 003 G07 Phase B CT 004 8 Compensation 608 005 8 Hot G09 1A 5A Ground CT D06 9 Hot 610 50 0 025 Ground 007 9 Compensation G11 Filter Ground 008 Return 612 Safety Ground D09 10 Compensation 01 Phase B VT D10 RTD 10 Hot H02 Phase C VT D11 RTD 11 Hot Differential A CT D12 RTD 11 Compensation 04 Differential CT 013 Return HOS Differential C CT D14 RTD 12 Compensation 06 015 12 H07 Phase B CT D16 Starter Status Phase CT D17 Emergency Restart 09 1A 5A Ground D18 Remote Reset H10 50 0 025 Ground CT D19 Assignable Switch 1 H11 Control Power D20 Assignable Switch 2 H12 Control Power 4 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 IN
89. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window V Click the Add Site button to define a new site Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field If desired a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site gt Click the OK button when complete The new site will appear in the upper left list in the EnerVista 469 Setup window Click the Add Device button to define the new device 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 49 4 5 gt Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site gt Select the appropriate communications interface Ethernet or Serial and fill in the required information for the 469 See Connecting EnerVista 469 Setup to the Relay on page 4 16 for details Device Setup 469 Relay 2 469 Motor Management Relay ptu 3 94 247 116 FIGURE 4 12 Device Setup Screen Example D Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 469 device and upload the order code If a communications error occurs ensure that communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values gt Click OK when complete gt From EnerVista main window select the IED Dashboard item to open the Plug and Play IED dashboard An icon for the 469 will be shown 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL
90. H H H H H A H H H H H w w w w w w w w w w w w Range settings if ANALOG IN DIFF 3 4 COMPARISON is Abs Diff 469 MOTOR MANAGEME Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Disabled Enabled 12 alphanumeric characters Diff Abs Diff 3 lt gt 4 354 4 gt 3 Always Start Run to 5000 s in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 0 to 500 in steps of 1 or 0 to 50000 Units in steps of 1 0 1 to 300 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 0 to 500 in steps of 1 or 0 to 50000 Units in steps of 1 0 1 to 300 0 s in steps of 0 1 This settings menu is seen only if Analog Inputs 3 and 4 are enabled The ANALOG IN DIFF 3 4 TRIP LEVEL and ANALOG IN DIFF 3 4 ALARM LEVEL settings are shown units of 96 if the ANALOG IN DIFF 3 4 COMPARISON is 96Diff or in units defined by the ANALOG INPUT 3 UNITS NT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS This feature compares two of the analog inputs and activate alarms or trips based on the difference between them The difference can b
91. INTERSECT STALL CURRENT 100 SAFE 100 Vline STALL TIME 10 0 at p Q Q El INTERSECT 2 5 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 70 to 9596 in steps of 1 2 00 to 15 00 x FLA in steps of 0 01 0 5 to 999 9 s in steps of 0 1 2 00 to STALL CURRENT MIN VLINE 0 01 in steps of 0 01 2 00 to 15 00 x FLA in steps of 0 01 0 5 to 999 9 s in steps of 0 1 2 00 to STALL CURRENT MIN VLINE 0 01 in steps of 0 01 If the motor is called upon to drive a high inertia load it is quite possible and acceptable for the acceleration time to exceed the safe stall time keeping in mind that a locked rotor condition is different than an acceleration condition In this instance each distinct portion of the thermal limit curve must be known and protection must be coordinated against that curve The relay pro
92. No These commands clear various informative and historical data when the 469 is first applied on a new installation RESET MOTOR INFORMATION Counters for number of motor starts and emergency restarts can be viewed in actual values The 469 also learns various motor characteristics through motor operation These learned parameters include acceleration time starting current and starting thermal capacity Total motor running hours may also be viewed in actual values On a new installation or if new equipment is installed all this information can be reset with this settings RESET STARTER INFORMATION The total number of starter operations can be viewed in actual values Use this settings to clear this counter on a new installation or if maintenance work is done on the breaker or contactor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 3 S2 System Setup 5 3 1 Current Sensing PATH SETTINGS gt V S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING PHASE PRIMARY Range 1 to 5000 in steps of 1 Values CURRENT Not Programmed 25001 denote not MOTOR FULL LOAD Range 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1 Values GROUND CT Range None 1A Secondary 5A ESSAGE gt 50 0 025 Secondary 50 0 025 GROUND CT PRI Range 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1 ESSAGE MARY PHASE DIFFEREN Range None 1A Secondary 5A TIAL Secondary PHASE DIFFEREN Range 1 to 5000 in steps of 1 ESSAGE TIAL ENABLE 2 SPEED Range
93. No ESSAGE CLEAR EVENT Range No Yes RECORDER No These commands may be used to clear various historical data 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CLEAR LAST TRIP DATA Clears the last trip data RESET MWh and Mvarh METERS Resets the MWh and Mvarh metering to zero CLEAR PEAK DEMAND DATA Clears the peak demand values CLEAR MAXIMUMS All maximum RTD temperature measurements are stored and updated each time a new maximum temperature is established This command clears the maximum values 5 2 8 Installation CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS CLEAR ANALOG I P MIN MAX The minimum and maximum analog input values are stored for each analog input These minimum and maximum values may be cleared at any time CLEAR TRIP COUNTERS There are counters for each possible type of trip This command clears these counters PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER When one of the assignable Digital Inputs is configured as Counter this command presets the counter If the counter is an incrementing type setting the preset value to 0 effectively resets the counter CLEAR EVENT RECORDER The event recorder saves the last 256 events automatically overwriting the oldest event If desired this command can clear all events to prevent confusion with old information PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V INSTALLATION RESET MOTOR Range No Yes INSTALLATION 9 INFORMATION No RESET STARTER Range No Yes MESSAGE XY INFORMATION
94. No Yes H SPEED2 PHASE CT Range 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1 PRIMARY 100 A SPEED2 MOTOR Range 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1 ESSAGE 52275 The GROUND CT PRIMARY and PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT PRIMARY settings are seen only if y the GROUND CT is set to Secondary or Secondary IE SPEED2 PHASE CT PRIMARY and SPEED2 MOTOR FLA settings are seen only if two speed motor protection is enabled NOTE As a safeguard PHASE CT PRIMARY and MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS are defaulted to Not Programmed when shipped A block start indicates the 469 was never programmed Once PHASE CT PRIMARY and MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS are entered the alarm resets itself The phase CT should be chosen so the FLA is no less than 5096 of the rated phase CT primary Ideally the phase CT primary should be chosen so the FLA is 10096 of the phase CT primary or slightly less never more The secondary value of 1 or 5 A must be specified at the time of order so that the proper hardware is installed A value for MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA must also be entered The value may be taken from the motor nameplate data sheets The service factor may be entered as overload pickup see 5 Thermal Model on page 5 36 For high resistance grounded systems sensitive ground current detection is possible if the 50 0 025 ground CT input is used To use the 50 0 025 input select 50 0 025 for the GROUND CT settings No additional ground CT message
95. Open Shorted MESSAGE TAL TRIP COIL Range Coil No Coil MESSAGE gt SUPERVISION No The messages shown here may be used to monitor Digital Input status This may be useful during relay testing or during installation Digital Input states will read as shorted if assigned as a tachometer 6 2 7 Real Time Clock PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V REAL TIME CLOCK Range 01 to 12 01 to 31 1995 to DATE 01 01 1994 2094 TIME 12 00 00 The time and date from the 469 real time clock may be viewed here 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 3 A2 Metering Data 6 3 1 Current Metering PATH ACTUAL VALUES V A2 METERING gt CURRENT METERING Range 0 to 100000 A CURRENT 0 e 0 Amps Zu Range 0 to 100000 A AVERAGE PHASE g CURRENT 0 Amps MOTOR LOAD Range 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA 0 00 x FLA CURRENT UNBAL ESSAG U B BIASED MOTOR Range 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA gt LOAD 0 00 x FLA _ _ GROUND CURRENT Range 0 00 to 5000 00 A Not seen if ESSAGE lt gt 0 00 amps Ground CT is set as None A 0 B Range 0 to 5000 A Seen if Phase ESSAGE 0 Differential CT has 14 5A ____ Secondary measured current values displayed here The CURRENT UNBALANCE is defined as the ratio of negative sequence to positive sequence current l gt l4 whe
96. PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 m INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Load Shed Trip ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp MESSAGE RELAYS Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Load Shed Trip Once the load shed trip function is chosen for one of the assignable digital inputs the settings messages shown here will follow the assignment message A trip relay may be selected A contact closure on the switch input assigned as load shed trip will cause a trip within 100 ms 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Pressure Switch Alarm PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 6 INPUT 1 FUNCTION See above ASSIGNABLE Pressure Sw Alarm BLOCK PRES SW Range 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 ALARM PRESSURE SWITCH Range Latched Unlatched ALARM Unlatched ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Auxiliary amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None PRESSURE SW Range 0 1 to 100 0 sec step 0 1 ALARM PRESSURE SW Range On Off MESSAGE These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Pressure Sw Alarm Once the pressure switch alarm function is chosen for one of the assignable digital inputs the settings messages shown her
97. RELAYS Trip ACCELERATION TIMER FROM START 13 s as shown in the acceleration curves at 10096 voltage For the Start Inhibit element enter the following values in the S7 MOTOR STARTING START INHIBIT page Press the MESSAGE key after each settings is completed to move to the next message START INHIBIT BLOCK On TC USED MARGIN 2596 With these settings the 469 relay prevents motor starting if there is insufficient thermal capacity for a successful motor start Refer to Start Inhibit on page 5 66 for additional information There is not information available to set Starts Hour Time Between Starts or the Restart Block features Therefore the following settings must be disabled JOGGING BLOCK Off RESTART BLOCK Off 1 4 9 S8 Temperature The S8 RTD Temperature page contains the settings for the twelve 12 field programmable RTDs that are normally used for temperature monitoring The temperature measured by each RTD can be compared to pickup values and set to energize Trip or Alarm outputs For proper temperature monitoring enter the RTD types in the S8 RTD TEMPERTURE gt RTD TYPES page Press the MESSAGE key after each settings is completed to move to the next message 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 35 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED STATOR RTD TYPE 100 Ohm Platinum BEARING RTD TYPE 100 Ohm Platinum AMBIENT RTD TYPE 100 Ohm Platinum OTHER RTD TYPE 100 Ohm Platinu
98. RTDs are programmed in 58 RTD TEMPERATURE the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages 6 4 4 Analog Input Min Max PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V LEARNED DATA V ANALOG IN MIN MAX Range 50000 to 50000 ANALOG I P 1 MIN O Units ANALOG I P 1 Range 50000 to 50000 MAX 0 Units ESSAGE ANALOG I P 2 Range 50000 to 50000 MIN O Units ESSAGE Range 50000 to 50000 ESSAGE ANALOG I P 2 Range 50000 to 50000 ESSAGE MIN O Units Range 50000 to 50000 ESSAGE ANALOG I P 3 ANALOG I P 4 Range 50000 to 50000 MIN O Units ESSAGE Range 50000 to 50000 ESSAGE ANALOG I P 4 0 0909090090900 o o o 5 5 gt H E ct ct ct u The 469 will learn the minimum and maximum values of the analog inputs since they were last cleared This information can be cleared with the 1 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA gt V CLEAR ANALOG MIN MAX settings When the data is cleared the present value of each analog input will be loaded as a starting point for both minimum and maximum The name of the input and the units will reflect those programmed for each input The values shown here reflect the programmed analog input names If no Analog Inputs are programmed 812 ANALOG I O the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message appears when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages 469 MOTOR MANAGEMEN
99. SETTINGS 5 11 S10 Power Elements 5 11 1 Power Measurement Conventions By convention an induction motor consumes Watts and vars This condition is displayed on the 469 as Watts and vars A synchronous motor can consume Watts and vars consume Watts and generate vars These conditions are displayed on the 469 as Watts vars and Watts vars respectively see the figure below ONE LINE DIAGRAM POWER PLANE DIAGRAMS i I lt gt POSITIVE DIRECTION SOURCE 7 RELAY PER IEEE DEFINITIONS PHASOR DIAGRAM POSITIVE ROTATION Bus Voltage E g Angle By Which Voltage Leads Current 818773AC CDR FIGURE 5 17 Power Measurement Conventions 5 80 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 11 2 Power Factor PATH SETTINGS gt gt V S10 POWER ELEMENTS gt POWER FACTOR Poes 4 00 MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE If the 469 i factor unti lt gt lt gt lt gt 0 69 09 69 69 09 69 9 09 BLOCK PF ELEMENT FROM START POWER FACTOR POWER FACTOR LEAD POWER FACTOR LAG POWER FACTOR POWER FACTOR POWER FACTOR TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP POWER FACTOR LEAD TRIP LEVEL Off POWER FACTOR LAG TRIP LEVEL Off a ull gt allo
100. SETUP gt V REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING 0 0 REDUCED VOLTAGE Range On Off REDUCED STARTING Off Range Auxilary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 c ASSIGN CONTROL g ary RELAYS Auxiliary TRANSITION ON Range Current Only Current or Timer ESSAGE lt gt Current only Current and Timer ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Aux2 Trip amp Aux2 amp ESSAGE RELAYS Aux3 Trip amp Aux3 Range 25 to 300 in steps of 1 me REDUCED VOLTAGE g 6 in step START LEVEL 1005 Range 1 to 600 s in steps of 1 ESSAGE gt REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER 200 The 469 can control the transition of a reduced voltage starter from reduced to full voltage That transition may be based on Current Only Current and Timer or Current or Timer whichever comes first When the 469 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current a Start is assumed to be occurring typically current will rise quickly to a value in excess of FLA e g 3 x FLA At this point the REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER is initialized with the programmed value in seconds e Only is selected when the motor current falls below the user s programmed Transition Level transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for 1 second If the timer expires before that transition is initiated an Incomplete Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip relay s e If Current or Timer is selected whe
101. TIME CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES Westinghouse Motor Company 5 540935 NI INIL un uta a ve ee 450 ame 300 oooor 150 00000 GVOTHSAO 1 69r 29 400 100 veros 1 27 thermal limit hot cold C2 time current 90 t V FIGURE 1 8 Overload Curve Matching Example Cl time current 100 V thermal limit 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Short Circuit Trip The short circuit trip should be set above the maximum locked rotor current but below the short circuit current of the fuses The data sheets indicate a maximum locked rotor current of 63096 FLC or 6 3 x FLC A setting of 7 x FLC with a instantaneous time delay will be ideal but nuisance tripping may result due to the asymmetrical starting currents and DC offset If asymmetrical starting currents limits the starting capability set the S C level higher to a maximum of 11 x FLC to override this condition 1 7 x 6 3 11 7 where 1 7 is the m
102. Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500 BC Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500 CA Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500 Avg Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500 Phase AN Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500 Phase BN Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500 Phase CN Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500 Avg Phase Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500 Hottest Stator RTD 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F 1 0 200 Hottest Bearing RTD 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F 1 0 200 Ambient RTD 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F 1 50 60 1 to 12 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 1 50 250 Power Factor 0 01 to 1 00 lead lag 0 01 0 8lag 0 8 lead Reactive Power 50000 to 50000 kvar 1 0 750 Real Power 50000 to 50000 kW 1 0 1000 Apparent Power 0 to 50000 kVA 1 0 1250 Thermal Capacity Used 0 to 100 1 0 100 Relay Lockout Time 0 to 500 min 1 0 150 Current Demand 0 to 100000 A 1 0 700 kvar Demand 0 to 50000 kvar 1 0 1000 kW Demand 0 to 50000 kw 1 0 1250 kVA Demand 0 to 50000 kVA 1 0 1500 Motor Load 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA 0 01 0 00 1 25 Analog Inputs 1 4 50000 to 50000 1 0 450000 Tachometer 100 to 7200 RPM 1 3500 3700 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Table 5 3 Analog Output Parameter Selection Table PARAMETER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP DEFAULT MIN MAX MWhrs 0 000 to 999999 999 MWhrs 0 001 50 000 100 000 Analog In Diff 1 2 50000 to 50000 1 0 100 Analog In Diff 3 4 50000
103. WIRING RTDs RELAY ASSIGNMENT PRACTICES tete eerie ho 5 7 RELAY RESET MODE eset nme eee eame REMOTE ALARM cete dee e Reden e ons REMOTE ALARM STATUS REMOTE RESET REMOTE SWITCH us REMOTE TRIP erede tee e e E ee eie eR Perd 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTERI RESET REMOTE Eid ebbe RR RESETTING THE 469 ci cra tereti e yb RESIDUAL RESIDUAL GROUND CONNECTION RESTART BLOCK emergency Festatt use ce seco cese ertt p E cos Rea e Adae 5 24 cR specifications RESTART EMERGENCY 5 84 REVERSE POWER TRIPS ee re ea evene ee nei e tc 6 31 ROLLING DEMAND tte ertet e e qe eterne re po Hte 5 89 RS232 4 3 65232 COMMUNICATIONS configuring with EnerVista 469 4 16 4 18 configuring with EnerVista 750 760 Setup 4 18 eeJaler Tee 4 11 p 5 10 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS see also COMMUNICATIONS and SERIAL PORTS configuring with EnerVista 469 4 16 4 18 configuring with EnerVista 750 760 Setup 4 18 connections description is Wiring M 3 25 earning e etie ete escription grounding maximums red ced
104. Ww c T co 1 Di 5 RESET ASSIGNABLE INPUT AUXILIARY 2 5 BLOCK START SELF TEST WARING LA F3 F2 E7 F7 8 F9 E9 FB X V TO TRIP TO CLOSE O RTU CIRCUIT CIRCUIT RELAY FAILURE ALARM FIGURE 1 5 Typical Relay Control Diagram e Power System Data a System 39 4 wire b Frequency 60 Hz C Line voltage 600 V Motor Data As per the following motor data sheet information 806555A2 CDR 400HP 3 60 575V 1800RPM TYPE hsa SCIM d509 TEFC 80 40C BY RES Ins lation Class f Service Factor 1 15 Full Load Speed 1788 RPM Design b LKVA code Full Load Torque 1179 LB FT Load 3 FL 100 75 50 Locked Rotor Torque 88 FLT Nom Eff CSA 95 7 95 4 94 5 Breakdown Torque 225 FLT Power Factor 90 2 90 1 87 7 181 0 Locked Rotor 5 631 FLA Current A 347 5 261 7 Safe Stall Time 16 18 SEC PF Correct 50 KVAR to 97 03 Load Torque Curve VIFL Load Inertia EEMAC LB FT2 1545 Application NOT SPEC D Rotor Inertia LB FT2 196 FOR WESTINGHOUSE Data sheet Number 26277 RANDOM WOUND STATOR FABRICATED COPPER BAR ROTOR 687 02 Note Eff y per CSA C390 M1985 Date Jan 8 1993 CAUTION ACCELERATION TIMES BASED ON ASSUMED LOAD CONDITIONS PROVIDE WMCC WITH LOAD TORQUE CURVE LOAD WK2 AT MOTOR SHAFT AND TERMINAL VOLTAGE FOR ANALYSIS FIGURE 1 6 Motor Data Sheet Information 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INS
105. alarm condition when the 469 is in start block condition or when the 469 is not in service IMPORTANT NOTE The forced relay will override any trip or alarm conditions i e when the relay is forced and trip occurs the relay will still be enabled when the trip condition is reset NOTE Control power loss in the 469 will reset all forced relays 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 35 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 6 55 Thermal Model 5 6 1 Motor Thermal Limits One of the principle enemies of motor life is heat When a motor is specified the purchaser communicates to the manufacturer what the loading conditions and duty cycle will be as well as environment and other pertinent information about the driven load such as starting torque etc The manufacturer then provides a stock motor or builds a motor that should have a reasonable life under those conditions Motor thermal limits are dictated by the design of both the stator and the rotor Motors have three modes of operation locked rotor or stall when the rotor is not turning acceleration when the rotor is coming up to speed and running when the rotor turns at near synchronous speed Heating occurs in the motor during each of these conditions in very distinct ways Typically during motor starting locked rotor and acceleration conditions the motor is rotor limited That is to say that the rotor will approach its thermal limit before the stator Under locked
106. alarm feature may be programmed to log as an event or not If an alarm is programmed to log as an event when it becomes active it is automatically logged as a date and time stamped event e BLOCK START A 469 Block Start prevents or inhibits the start of the motor based on some logic or algorithm The Block Start feature is always assigned to the Block Start relay In addition to the Trip relays a trip always operates the Block Start relay If the condition that has caused the trip is still present e g hot or there is a lockout time when the RESET key is pressed the Block Start relay will not reset until the condition is no longer present or the lockout time has expired Blocking features are always unlatched and reset immediately when conditions that caused the block cease In addition to becoming active in conjunction with trips a block may become active once the motor stops There are several features that operate as such Starts Hour Time Between Starts Start Inhibit Restart Block and 469 Not Programmed Block messages are updated to reflect the block when it becomes active complete with lockout time if required and the screen defaults to that message Blocks are normally not logged as events If however a motor start or start attempt is detected when a block is active it is automatically logged as a date and time stamped event This scenario might occur if someone shorts across the block terminals and overrides the 469 prote
107. amp Aux3 Auxiliary CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS GROUND FAULT TRIP Range 10 to 2000 ms in steps of 10 MESSAGE 9 gt BACKUP DELAY 200 The GROUND FAULT ALARM PICKUP and GROUND FAULT TRIP PICKUP settings are entered in vy units of x if the Ground CT is programmed as 1 A or 5 A Secondary or in units of A is the Ground CT is programmed as 50 0 025 The Ground Fault element functions as follows Once the ground current magnitude exceeds the Pickup Level x GROUND CT PRIMARY see 5 3 1 Current Sensing on page 17 for the time specified by the delay a trip and or alarm will occur There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled If the GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP is On and a Ground Fault trip has initiated a second trip will occur if the ground current persists longer than the GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP DELAY It is intended that this second trip be assigned to 2 Auxiliary or 3 Auxiliary which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay The GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP DELAY must be set to a time longer than the breaker clearing time Whenever the output relay assigned to the backup trip operates it will stay latched regardless of how the trip relay is configured for the Ground Fault element Care must be taken when turning On this feature If the interrupting device contactor or y circuit breaker is not rated to break ground fault current low resistance or solidly grounded systems the feature shoul
108. an accuracy of approximately 1 minute per month It must be periodically corrected manually through the front panel or via the RS485 serial link clock update command If the approximate time an event occurred without synchronization to other relays is sufficient then entry of time date from the front panel keys is adequate If the RS485 serial communication link is used then all the relays can keep synchronized time A new clock time is pre loaded into the 469 memory via the RS485 port by a remote computer to each relay connected on the communications channel After the computer broadcasts address 0 a set clock command all relays in the system begin timing at the same instant There can be up to 100 ms of delay in receiving serial commands so the clock time in each relay is 100 ms the absolute clock accuracy in the PLC PC Refer to GE publication GEK 106491 469 Communications Guide for information on programming the time preload and synchronizing commands 5 2 5 Default Messages PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V DEFAULT MESSAGES 6 DEFAULT MESSAGES DEFAULT I 6 OF 20 ASSIGNED ESSAGE MOTOR STATUS Range N A Stopped ESSAGE A 0 B g 0 ESSAGE MOTOR LOAD Range N A 0 00 x FLA ESSAGE CURRENT UNBAL g ANCE ESSAGE DATE 01 01 1995 Range TIME 12 00 00 Range N A After a period of inactivity the 469 displays defa
109. and the HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO settings The THERMAL CAPACITY USED Will either rise at a fixed rate of 596 per minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time constant TC x 1 Bet x100 EQ 5 7 used end cold 9 95 where THERMAL CAPACITY USED if uni remains steady state leg equivalent motor heating current hot cold HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO settings The HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO may be determined from the thermal limit curves if provided or the hot and cold safe stall times Simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time If hot and cold times are not provided there can be no differentiation and the HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO should be entered as 1 00 RTD Bias The 469 thermal replica operates as a complete and independent model However the thermal overload curves are based solely on measured current assuming normal 40 C ambient and normal motor cooling If the ambient temperature is unusually high or motor cooling is blocked the motor temperature will increase If the motor stator has embedded RTDs the RTD bias feature should be used to correct the thermal model The bias feature is a two part curve constructed using 3 points If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below RTD BIAS MINIMUM settings typically 40 C no biasing occurs If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the RTD BIAS MAXIMUM typically at the stator insulation rati
110. calibrated Minor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 Table 4 1 Self Test Warnings Message Severity Failure description Relay Not Configured Min r This warning occurs when the 469 CT Primary or Consult User Manual FLA is set to None 1 Caused by a failure of the real time clock circuit i Are et eo NR Minor The ability of the relay to maintain the current date and time is lost 4 1 9 Flash Messages Flash messages are warning error or general information messages displayed in response to certain key presses The length of time these messages remain displayed can be programmed in 81 RELAY SETUP gt V PREFERENCES gt V DEFAULT MESSAGE CYCLE TIME The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds For additional information and a complete list of flash messages refer to Flash Messages on page 6 38 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 9 4 2 4 2 1 Overview CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES i EnerVista 469 Setup Software Interface The front panel provides local operator interface with a liquid crystal display The EnerVista 469 Setup software provides a graphical user interface GUI as one of two human interfaces to a 469 device The alternate human interface is implemented via the device s faceplate keypad and display see the first section in this chapter The EnerVista 469 Setup software provides a single
111. complete lists of settings and actual values Use the following procedure to print a list of settings gt Select a previously saved Settings file in the File pane or establish communications with a 469 device gt From main window select the File gt Print Settings menu item The Print Export Options dialog box will appear Select Settings in the upper section and select either Include All Features for a complete list or Include Only Enabled Features for a list of only those features which are currently used in the filtering section 4 32 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 WARNING Click OK Print Export Options xi Select Information ta Print Export 1 Settings Actual Values Settings amp Actual Values Filtering Include Only Enabled Features C Include All Features The process for File gt Print Preview Settings is identical to the steps above Settings lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file in the file list or device in the device list and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure gt Establish communications with the desired 469 device gt From main window select the File gt Print Settings menu item The Print Exp
112. control to set digital inputs for breaker status remote operations remote status and alarm indication Assume that the communications between the station and the master control center will be done by the RTU Alarms status indication and breaker commands will be hard wired from the relay to the RTU Similar information could be exchanged between the RTU and the relay via an RS485 5422 Serial Link using the Modbus RTU protocol Refer to GE Publication GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide for additional information 1 4 48 Instrument Transformer Data Voltage Transformers 2 x Open Delta connected ratio 600 120 V Motor System Voltage 575 V Phase CTs The phase CTs should be chosen such that the FLC is 5096 to 10096 of CT primary Since the FLC is 347 5A a 350 5 or 400 5 CT may be chosen 400 5 is a standard available size and so would probably be selected Ground CT For high resistive grounded systems sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50 0 025 CT Usea 1 A or 5 A secondary CT on solidly grounded or low resistive grounded systems where the fault current is much higher If a residual connection is chosen pickup levels and timers must be set with respect to the acceleration time The chosen zero sequence CT must be able to handle all potential fault levels without saturating In this example 50 5A CT is selected Motor FLC Set the motor full load current to 348 A as specified by the data sheets Use t
113. current for an external supply voltage from 30 to 250 V DC through the breaker trip coil The supervision circuits respond to a loss of this trickle current as a failure condition Circuit breakers equipped with standard control circuits have a breaker auxiliary contact permitting the trip coil to be energized only when the breaker is closed When these contacts are open as detected by the Starter Status Digital Input monitoring breaker auxiliary contacts trip coil supervision circuit is automatically disabled This logic allows the trip circuit to be monitored only when the breaker is closed 2 AUXILIARY 3 AUXILIARY The auxiliary relays may be programmed for trip echo alarm echo trip backup alarm differentiation control circuitry and numerous other functions They should be wired as configuration warrants 4 ALARM The alarm relay should connect to the appropriate annunciator or monitoring device 5 BLOCK START This relay should be wired in series with the start pushbutton in either a breaker or contactor configuration to prevent motor starting When a trip has not been reset on a breaker the block start relay prevents a start attempt that would result in an immediate trip Any lockout functions are also directed to the block start relay 6 SERVICE The service relay operates if any of the 469 diagnostics detect an internal failure or on loss of control power This output may be monitored with an annunciator PLC or DCS If it is dee
114. curve intersect with the custom curve for 80 line voltage Also enter the per unit current and safe stall protection time for 8096 line voltage see the Acceleration Curves below 3 Enter the per unit current value for the acceleration overload curve intersect with the custom curve for 10096 line voltage Also enter the per unit current and safe stall protection time for 10096 line voltage see the Acceleration Curves below 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 49 TIME TO TRIP SECONDS 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 20 GE HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP 13 2 kV REACTOR COOLANT PUMP CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 469 Custom Curve 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS T 8 806822A4 CDR FIGURE 5 9 Voltage Dependent Overload Curve Custom Curve 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS e GE Multilin HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP 13 2 kV REACTOR COOLANT PUMP sect at 80 Acceleration inter V a Acceleration Intersect at 100 V TIME TO TRIP SECONDS 20 3 4 5 6 MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD
115. expenses sustained as a result of a device malfunction incorrect application or adjustment For complete text of Warranty including limitations and disclaimers refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Index Numerics AMA ANALOG INPUT eere dere e ple rs 0 to 20mA ANALOG INPUT 1 TRIP RELAY T 3 23 operating 5 35 tese mode ceo oH OHNE Ea ROSE Aes 5 34 2 AUXILIARY RELAY descrip 3 23 operati 5 34 3 AUXILIARY RELAY reset M 3 PHASE OPEN DELTA VTs D a S PHASE WYE 4 ALARM RELAY description operating reset mode 4 to 20mA ANALOG INPUT 5 START BLOCK RELAY describ TOME buda attitudes 3 23 eee 5 35 5 34 50 0 025 CT cnet ed e dee ere e E RR dg 3 13 5 17 6 SERVICE RELAY P 3 23 reset ee eredi me pi 5 34 A AT STATUS oett ete iate c e E Ber He PEOR A2 METERING DATA eire ee ee eei desit dee nts AS LEARNED DATA ni nire trinit
116. feature may be used to prevent operators from jogging the motor multiple starts and stops performed in rapid succession It consists of two distinct elements Starts Hour and Time Between Starts The Starts Hour feature does not guarantee that a certain number of starts or start attempts will be allowed within an hour rather it ensures that a certain number of start attempts will not be exceeded within an hour Similarly the Time Between Starts feature does not guarantee another start will be permitted if the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE elapses after the most recent start Rather it ensures a minimum time between starts If however the first start attempt from cold is unsuccessful due to a jam or it takes long because the process is overloaded the Thermal Model might reduce the number of starts that can be attempted within an hour It may also cause a lockout time that exceeds a Time Between Starts lockout that may have been active Such a thermal lockout will remain until the motor has cooled to an acceptable temperature for a start 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 57 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Max Starts Hour Permissible A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 469 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current At this point one of the Starts Hour timers is loaded with 60 minutes Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature Once the motor is stopped th
117. for a pump application program the following settings ANALOG INPUT 1 4 NAME Pressure ANALOG INPUT 1 4 UNITS PSI ANALOG INPUT 1 4 MINIMUM 0 ANALOG INPUT 1 4 MAXIMUM 500 there is no pressure until the pump is up and running for 5 minutes and pressure builds up program the ANALOG INPUT 1 BLOCK FROM START as 6 minutes 360 5 The alarm may be fed back to a PLC for when pressure is under 300 PSI Program a reasonable delay e g ANALOG INPUT ALARM 1 DELAY 3 s and ANALOG INPUT ALARM 1 PICKUP as Under If a vibration transducer is to be used for pump application program the following settings ANALOG INPUT 1 4 NAME Vibration ANALOG INPUT 1 4 UNITS mm s ANALOG INPUT 1 4 MINIMUM 0 ANALOG INPUT 1 4 MAXIMUM 25 Program BLOCK ANALOG INPUT 1 4 FROM START as 0 minutes Set the alarm for a reasonable level slightly higher than the normal vibration level Program a delay of 3 s and a pickup value of Over 5 94 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 13 3 Analog Input Diff 1 2 PATH SETTINGS S12 ANALOG gt V ANALOG INPUT DIFF 1 2 ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE NOTE This feature compares two ana 0 09 09 09 60 09 9 090909 09 60 09 N gt N g N N g BE N
118. gt gt See 38 SETTINGS 09 THERMAL MESSAGE See page 39 gt MESSAGE 5 2 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS lt gt C9 or e gt SETTINGS B gt SETTINGS 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE lt gt 9 69 IS 90909095 9 09 c lt gt p CCELERATION m Q Q Q H 2 a END OF PAGE TYPES P lt Fe H H H 12 n ee See See See See See See See See See See See See See See page page page page page page page page page page page page page page page 59 60 60 61 62 63 64 66 66 67 69 70 71 71 71 5 3 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS END OF PAGE lt gt gt 5 76 SETTINGS UNDERVOLTAGE i eee ESSAGE See page 78 gt OVERVOLTAGE ESSAGE gt 79 gt FREQUENCY END OF PAGE gt 5 81 SETTINGS Be paga ESSAGE
119. however the response time slows slightly 10 to 15 ms but times still remain within specifications 5 7 7 Phase Differential PATH SETTINGS gt V S6 CURRENT ELEM gt V PHASE DIFFERENTIAL PHASE DIFFEREN Range Off Latched Unlatched TIAL 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS v NOTE ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp ESSAGE RELAYS Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary STARTING DIFF Range 0 05 to 1 00 x CT in steps of ESSAGE amp TRIP PICKUP 0 10 0 01 STARTING DIFF Range 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 10 ESSAGE TRIP DELAY 0 ms RUNNING DIFF Range 0 05 to 1 00 x CT in steps of ESSAGE TRIP PICKUP 0 10 0 01 Range 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 ESSAGE RUNNING DIFF TRIP DELAY 0 ms These settings program the differential element when the differential feature is in use This feature consists of three instantaneous overcurrent elements for phase differential protection Differential protection may be considered first line protection for phase to phase or phase to ground faults In the event of such a fault differential protection may limit the damage that may occur Care must be taken when enabling this feature If the interrupting device contactor or ircuit breaker is not rated to break potential faults the feature should be disabled ternately the feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that
120. or at the motor Grounding should not be done in both places as it could cause a circulating current Only RTD Return leads may be grounded When grounding at the 469 only one Return lead need be grounded as they are hard wired together internally No error is introduced into the RTD reading by grounding in this manner If the RTD Return leads are tied together and grounded at the motor only one RTD Return lead can be run back to the 469 See the figure below for a wiring example Running more than one RTO Return lead to the 469 causes significant errors as two or more parallel paths for the return current have been created Use of this wiring scheme causes errors in readings equivalent to that in the Reduced RTD Lead Number application described earlier 469 Motor Control Motor Terminal Box L1 Hot Compensation 2 L2 Ji RTD1 RTD Return 3 14 Compensation 4 RTD2 Hot 5 J2 Hot 6 i L7 Compensation 7 RTD3 RTD Return 8 connection 808720 2 FIGURE 3 25 Alternate Grounding 3 2 10 Output Relays There are six 6 Form C output relays see Specifications on page 2 6 for details Five of the six relays are always non failsafe 6 SERVICE is always failsafe As failsafe the 6 SERVICE relay is normally energized and de energizes when called upon to operate I
121. out of the case This extra length will allow the network cable to be disconnected from the terminal block from the front of the switchgear panel Once disconnected the cable can be left hanging safely outside the case for re inserting the unit back into the case The unit may then be re inserted by first connecting the network cable to the units rear terminal block see step 3 of Unit Withdrawal and Insertion on page 3 5 Ensure that the network cable does not get caught inside the case while sliding in the unit This may interfere with proper insertion to the case terminal blocks and damage the cable The DeviceNet port has the following characteristics e Connector type 5 pin Phoenix connector Baud rate 125K 250K or 500K baud Protocol DeviceNet The following ports available simultaneously RS232 2 x RS485 422 with no DeviceNet option RS232 1x RS485 422 with DeviceNet option The DeviceNet configuration is shown in the following table Pin Signal Description 1 V Negative supply voltage 2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line 3 SHIELD Cable shield 4 CAN_H CAN_H bus line 5 V Positive supply voltage 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 1 7 Terminal Locations 22020022002022002000022000 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSISSSSSSISSSSSSS eerte 4298 20000002 592 Sog AEE pep 806779A8 DWG FIGURE 3 11 Terminal Layout 3 1 8 Ter
122. page VT CONNECTION TYPE Open Delta ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION Off VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO 5 1 for a 600 V system 600 120 V 5 where 5 is the VT ratio MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE 575 V The 469 Motor Management Relay was designed with the ability to display primary system values Current and voltage measurements are performed at secondary levels which the relay transforms to primary values using CT and VT ratios system voltage as well as the nominal secondary values In the case of the phase CTs configuring the relay for current measurements is simple and it only requires inputting the CT primary current Phase CT inputs can be 1 A or 5 A and they must be specified when the relay is purchased There is more flexibility with regards to Ground CT inputs as well as VT inputs where nominal values are not required ahead of time before the relay is ordered therefore more settings are needed to set the relay for measurements Make the following change in the 52 SYSTEM SETUP V POWER SYSTEM settings page to reflect the power system NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY 60 Hz SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE ABC The example calls for remote control via serial communications received from the master station through the RTU Motor starting and stopping is possible via any of the three 469 communication ports When a start command is issued the auxiliary relay assigned for starting control is activated for 1 second to complete the cl
123. prevent unauthorized removal of the drawout unit a wire lead seal can be installed in the slot provided on the handle With this seal in place the drawout unit cannot be removed A passcode or settings access jumper can be used to prevent entry of settings but allow monitoring of actual values If access to the front panel controls must be restricted a separate seal can be installed on the cover to prevent it from being opened Hazard may result if the product is not used for its intended purpose WARNING FIGURE 3 2 Seal on Drawout Unit 3 1 2 Product Identification Each 469 unit and case are equipped with a permanent label This label is installed on the left side when facing the front of the relay of both unit and case The case label details which units can be installed The case label details the following information model number manufacture date and special notes 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION The unit label details the following information model number type serial number manufacture date phase current inputs special notes overvoltage category insulation voltage pollution degree control power and output contact rating 89 8 GE Power Management GE Power Management SR469 RELAY MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY MODEL NO 469 5 MODEL NO SERIAL NO DATE FIRMWARE RE 0 MFG DATE PHASE SPECIAL NUMBER OF MANUALS TAG NONE MOD NONE
124. range of values the 469 displays this message substituting the proper values for that settings An appropriate value may then be entered PRESS ENTER TO ADD DEFAULT MESSAGE If the ENTER key is pressed anywhere in the 469 actual value messages this message prompts the user to press ENTER again to add a new default message To add a new default message ENTER must be pressed while this message is being displayed PRESS ENTER TO REMOVE MESSAGE If the decimal key is pressed in the 51 469 SETUP gt V DEFAULT MESSAGES settings group immediately followed by the ENTER key this message prompts the user to press enter to remove a default message To remove the default message ENTER must be pressed while this message is being displayed RESET PERFORMED SUCCESSFULLY If all trip and alarm features that are active can be cleared i e the conditions that caused these trips and or alarms are no longer present then this message will appear when a reset is performed indicating that all trips and alarms have been cleared ROUNDED settings HAS BEEN STORED A settings value entered with the numeric keypad may be between valid settings values The 469 detects this condition and stores a value that has been rounded to the nearest valid settings value To find the valid range and step for a given settings simply press HELP while the settings is being displayed settings ACCESS IS NOW PERMITTED This flash message notifies the user that settings may n
125. redundancy or simultaneous interrogation and or control from a second PLC DCS or PC software There are also four 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 1 mA as specified with order transducer outputs that may be assigned to any measured parameter The range of these outputs is scalable Additional features are outlined below METERING e Voltage e Current and amps demand Real power kW demand kW power consumption e Apparent power and kVA demand e Reactive power kvar demand kvar consumption generation Frequency Power factor RTD Speed in RPM with a key phasor input User programmable analog inputs ADDITIONAL FEATURES Drawout case for ease of maintenance testing e Reduced voltage starting control for single transition e Trip coil supervision e Flash memory for easy firmware updates 2 1 2 Ordering Information All 469 features are standard there are no options The phase CT secondaries control power and analog output range must be specified at the time of order The 469 differential CT inputs are field programmable for CTs with 1 A or 5 A secondaries There are two ground CT inputs one for the GE Multilin 50 0 025 core balance CT and one for a ground CT with a 1 A or 5 A secondary also field programmable The VT inputs will accommodate VTs in either a delta or wye configuration The output relays are always non failsafe with the exception of the service relay The EnerVista 469 Setup software is provided w
126. set for single phase or three phase conditions If undervoltage tripping is enabled and the UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP MODE is set for 3 a trip will occur only when the magnitude of all three phases falls below the pickup level while running or starting for a period of time specified by the time delay On the other hand if undervoltage trip is enabled and the UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP MODE is set for 1 Phase a trip will occur once the magnitude of either Vab Vbc or Vca falls below the pickup level while running or starting for a period of time specified by the time delay Note that pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage The running pickup level also applies when the motor is stopped and the U V ACTIVE ONLY IF BUS ENERGIZED settings is programmed to No undervoltage on running motor with a constant load results in increased current The relay thermal model typically picks up this condition and provides adequate protection However this settings may be used in conjunction with the time delay to provide additional protection that may be programmed for advance warning by tripping Attempting to start a large motor when the supply voltage is down may also be undesirable An undervoltage of significant proportion that persists while starting a motor may prevent the motor from reaching rated speed This may be especially critical for a synchronous motor As such this feature may be used in with a time delay to provide p
127. shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted 50 to 250 C No RTD shorted open open open open open open open open open open open open The current level of the 12 RTDs is displayed here If the RTD is not connected the value will be No RTD The values will reflect the RTD names as programmed The HOTTEST STATOR RTD value is shown only if at least one RTD is set as Stator If no RTDs are programmed in 88 RTD TEMPERATURE the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 3 3 Voltage Metering PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A2 METERING DATA gt V VOLTAGE METERING Range 0 to 20000 V Not seen if VT Vbc Connection is set as None 0 Volts METERING AVERAGE LINE Range 0 to 20000 V Not seen if VT ESSAGE voLTAGE 0 Volts Connection is set as None Van 0 Vbn Range 0 to 20000 V Seen only if VT ESSAGE 0 Connection is set as Wye 4 Range 0 to 20000 V Seen only if VT ESSAGE AVERAG
128. system conditions a significant amount of unbalance current will be present If the condition is not detected on time the unbalance function or the underpower element will trip the motor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 77 5 10 2 Overvoltage PATH SETTINGS gt V S9 VOLTAGE ELEM gt V OVERVOLTAGE 0 OVERVOLTAGE Range OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS VERVOLTAGE ALARM Range PICKUP OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Range DELAY 3 0 s RVOLTAGE ALARM Range EVENTS Off MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 9 69 09 69 69 9 09 TH OVERVOLTAGE TRIP PICKUP OVERVOLTAGE TRIP DELAY 3 0 5 1 05 x OVERVOLTAGE Range TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP Range RELAYS 1 10 x Range Range Range CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Set UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP MODE to 5 Phase when the settings S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt VOLTAGE SENSING gt V ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION is set to On The relay assumes a balanced three phase system when fed from a single VT Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 01 to 1 20 x RATED in steps of 0 01 0 5 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp 2 amp Aux3 Trip Auxiliary 1 01 to 1 20 x RATED in s
129. the ENTER key to store the settings 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED To set the ground CT ratings modify the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V CURRENT SENSING gt V GROUND and the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V CURRENT SENSING gt V GROUND CT PRIMARY settings as shown below gt Press the MENU key until the relay displays the Settings menu header SETTINGS Press MESSAGE ENTER SETTINGS Press MESSAGE V Press Press PHASE CT PRIMARY SETTINGS MESSAGE P CURRENT MESSAGE gt 600 A LU LB tor ENTER Press MOTOR FULL LOAD MESSAGE AMPS Press GROUND CT MESSAGE V Multilin CT 50 Press the VALUE keys GROUND 5 A Secondary is displayed 5 A Secondary Press the ENTER key to store the NEW SETTINGS settings HAs Press GROUND CT PRI MESSAGE Press the VALUE keys until 50 Ais GROUND CT PRI displayed or enter the value directly via MARY the numeric keypad Press the ENTER key to store the settings List 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 13 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED To set the VT connection type and ratings modify the 82 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt VT CONNECTION TYPE and the S2 SYSTEM SETUP D gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt V VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO and S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt V MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE settings as shown below gt Press the MENU key until the re
130. the manual LEARNED DATA D gt V AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD gt AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD LEARNED This path representation illustrates the location of an specific actual value or settings with regards to its previous menus and sub menus In the example above the AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD LEARNED actual value is shown to be an item in the AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD sub menu which itself is an item in the A3 LEARNED DATA menu which is an item of ACTUAL VALUES Sub menu levels are entered by pressing the MESSAGE or ENTER key When inside a submenu the 4 MESSAGE or ESCAPE key returns to the previous sub menu The MESSAGE and MESSAGE A keys are used to scroll through the settings in a sub menu The display indicates which keys can be used at any given point 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 1 2 Using the Relay 12 11 Menu Navigation The relay has three types of display messages actual value settings and target messages A summary of the menu structure for settings and actual values can be found at the beginning of chapters 5 and 6 respectively Settings are programmable settings entered by the user These types of messages are located within a menu structure that groups the information into categories Navigating the menu structure is described below Actual values include the following information 1 Motor and System Status a Motor status either stopped starting or running It includes valu
131. the same function to two different switches this message will appear 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 39 6 40 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES INVALID PASSCODE ENTERED If an invalid passcode is entered for passcode security feature this message will flash on the display INVALID SERVICE CODE ENTERED This message appears if an invalid code is entered S13 469 TESTING gt V GE MULTILIN USE ONLY KEY PRESSED HERE IS INVALID Under certain situations certain keys have no function e g any number key while viewing Actual Values If a key is pressed where it should have no function this message will appear NEW PASSCODE HAS BEEN ACCEPTED This message will appear as an acknowledge that the new passcode has been accepted when changing the passcode for the passcode security feature NEW settings HAS BEEN STORED This message appear each time a settings has been altered and stored as shown on the display NO ALARMS This message appears if an attempt is made to enter the A1 STATUS gt ALARM STATUS subgroup when there are no active alarms NO START BLOCKS ACTIVE This message appears if an attempt is made to enter the A1 STATUS gt START BLOCKS subgroup when there are no active Start Blocks NO TRIPS OR ALARMS TO RESET If RESET is pressed when there are no trips or alarms present this message will appear OUT OF RANGE ENTER by If an entered settings value that is outside of the acceptable
132. time the starter status input indicates that the breaker is closed or motor current is detected If that continuity is broken a Starter Failure alarm will indicate Trip Coil Supervision 52 Open Closed is selected the trip coil supervision circuitry monitors the trip coil circuit for continuity at all times regardless of breaker state This requires an alternate path around the 52a contacts in series with the trip coil when the breaker is open See the following figure for modifications to the wiring and proper resistor selection If that continuity is broken a Starter Failure alarm will indicate Trip Coil Supervision CONTACT TRIP COIL 52 OPEN CLOSED RIP SUPERVISION COIL 52 Open Closed WITH MULTIPLE BREAKER AUX TRIP COIL CLOSED SUPERVISION CONTACTS 52 Closed 52a e 808727A2 CDR FIGURE 5 18 Trip Coil Supervision 5 12 3 Demand PATH SETTINGS gt V S11 MONITORING gt V CURRENT DEMAND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION TRIP COIL OPEN CLOSED SUPERVISION 52 Open Closed VALUE OF RESISTOR R SUPPLY OHMS WATTS 10K 2 125 VDC 25K 5 250 VDC 50K 5 DEMAND Range 5 to 90 in steps of 1 CURRENT PERIOD 15 min MESSAGE CURRENT DEMAND Range Off Latched Unlatched ALARM Off Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 RELAYS
133. 0 t O 8410 t 20 130 40 50 160 170 80 90 100 MAGNITUDE 808717A1 CDR FIGURE 5 19 Rolling Demand 15 Minute Window 5 12 4 Pulse Output PATH SETTINGS gt V S11 MONITORING PULSE OUTPUT a POS kWh PULSE Range Off Alarm Auxiliary2 PULSE OUTPUT Auxiliary3 ae POS kWh PULSE Range 1 to 50000 kWh in steps of 1 OUTPUT POS kvarh PULSE Range Off Alarm Auxiliary2 ESSAGE 2 2 Auxiliary3 moe POS kvarh PULSE Range 1 to 50000 kvarh in steps of 1 OUT I NEG kvarh PULSE Range Off Alarm Auxiliary2 ESSAGE Auxiliary3 NEG kvarh PULSE Range 1 to 50000 kvarh in steps of 1 OUT RUNNING TIME Range Off Alarm Auxiliary2 ESSAGE gt PULSE Auxiliary3 RUNNING TIME Range 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1 ESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 89 5 90 v NOTE CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS This feature configures one or more of the output relays as a pulsed ou
134. 0 kvar APPARENT POWER Range 0 to 65535 kVA 0 kVA POSITIVE WAT Range 0 000 to 999999 999 MWh THOURS POSITIVE VAR Range 0 000 to 999999 999 Mvarh HOURS NEGATIVE VAR Range 0 000 to 999999 999 Mvarh HOURS TORQUE Range 0 00 to 999999 9 Nm Seen only 000 0 Nm if torque metering is enabled The values for power metering and 3 phase total power quantities are displayed here Watthours and varhours can also be seen here An induction motor by convention consumes Watts and vars Watts and vars synchronous motor can generate vars vars and feed them back to the power system If the 82 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt V VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO settings is not programmed the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message appears when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages Real Power hp is converted directly from Real Power kW This display only value is not used for protection functions This message will not display more than 65535 hp regardless of the actual kW that are being metered 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 3 6 Demand Metering PATH ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING DATA gt V DEMAND METERING METERING ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE gt lt gt REAL POWER DEMAND 0 kW REACTIVE POWER DEMAND 0 kvar 0 Amps APPARENT POWER DEMAND 0
135. 00 100 75 75 4 y E Cool Time Constant 15 min 3 Cool Time Constant 15 min TCused start 85 TCused start 85 S Hot Cold Ratio 80 8 Hot Cold Ratio 80 8 50 X leq Overload Pickup 80 8 50 leq Overload Pickup 100 5 5 N 25 25 0 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 30 60 90 120 150 180 Time in Minutes Time in Minutes 80 LOAD 100 LOAD 100 100 3 m Cool Time Constant 30 min 15 Cool Time Constant 30 min gt TCused_start 85 gt TCused start 100 Hot Cold Ratio 80 Hot Cold Ratio 80 8 Motor Stopped after running Rated Load 8 Motor Overload 8 50 X TCused end 096 8 50 N TCused end 096 N E 2 E F 55 E 2 N E ge Nu 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 30 60 90 120 150 180 Time in Minutes Time in Minutes MOTOR STOPPED MOTOR TRIPPED 808705A2 CDR FIGURE 5 15 Thermal Model Cooling Hot Cold Safe Stall Ratio The motor manufacturer may provide thermal limit information for a hot cold motor The 469 thermal model adapts for these conditions if the HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO settings is programmed This settings value dictates the level of thermal capacity used the relay will settle at for current levels below the OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL When the motor is running 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS at a level that is below the OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL the THERMAL CAPACITY USED register will rise or fall to a value based on the average phase current
136. 00 to 7200 RPM gt 10 Trip and Alarm assign to digital inputs 1 to 4 0 1 to 100 0 s in steps of 0 1 250 ms or 0 596 of total time Trip and Alarm 2 2 5 Monitoring CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION DEMAND mE maximum phase current three phase real power three phase apparent power three phase reactive power Measurement type rolling demand Demand interval 5 to 90 min in steps of 1 1 minute Alarm METERED REACTIVE ENERGY CONSUMPTION Description Continuous total reactive energy consumption 0 to 999999 999 Mvar hours Timing accuragy 0 5 Updgte mate 5 seconds METERED REACTIVE ENERGY GENERATION Descrplott Continuous total reactive energy generation RANGE E 0 to 2000000 000 Mvar hours TIMING ecce 0 5 Update Rate stent 5 seconds METERED REAL ENERGY CONSUMPTION DesSCcrpon cete Continuous total real energy consumption 0 to 999999 999 MW hours 0 596 Update 0 5 seconds OVERTORQUE 0 1 to 999999 9 Nm ft lb in steps of 0 1 torque unit is selectable under torque setup Time 0 2 to 30 0 in steps of 0 1
137. 0000 to 100000 Seen only if Analog In Diff 1 2 is Abs Diff 6 3 8 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES gt aNALOG 3 4 Range 5100 to 490096 Seen only if MESSAGE lt gt 0 Percent Analog In Diff 3 4 set to 6Diff ANALOG 3 4 Range 100000 to 100000 Seen only MESSAGE if Analog In Diff 3 4 is Abs Diff The values for analog inputs are shown here The name of the input and the units will reflect those programmed for each input If no analog inputs are programmed in s12 ANALOG gt ANALOG INPUT 1 4 the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A2 METERING DATA gt V PHASORS PHASORS 6 gt 0 0 AT O Lag ESSAGE Vb PHASOR 0 0 AT O Lag esce lt Ve PHASOR 0 0 O Lag lt PHASOR 0 0 AT O Lag 0 0 O Lag ESSAGE lt gt 0 0 0 Lag The 469 Motor Management Relay was designed to display lagging angles Therefore if a system condition would cause the current to lead the voltage by 45 the 469 relay will display such angle as 315 Lag instead of 45 Lead When the currents and voltages measured by the relay are zero the angles displayed by the relay and those shown by the EnerVista 469 Setup software are not fixed values The EnerVista 469 Setup software is a useful tool to view the vectors s
138. 00000 operations VOLTAGE BREAK MAX LOAD 30V 10 3000 DC RESISTIVE 25V 62 50 250V 750 30V 5A 1500 DC NDUCTIVEL 125V 0 25 3130 R 40ms 250V 0 15A 3750 AC 120V 10A 2770 VA RESISTIVE 250 V 10 2770 120 V 4A 480 VA NDUCTIVE PF 0 4 250V 3A 750 VA ACCELERATION TIMER tdem tette eed delays ee TIMING 2 CURRENT UNBALANCE eaaet emn stetit Pickup accuracy TIMING saei FREQUENCY Req d voltage s Overfrequency pickup Underfrequency pickup CY eite transition of no phase current to gt overload pickup when current falls below overload pickup 1 0 to 250 0 s in steps of 0 1 100 ms or 0 596 of total time Trip l2 14 if log gt FLA l2 15 X layg FLA if layg lt FLA 0 to 100 UB in steps of 1 4 to 4096 UB in steps of 1 1to 60s in steps of 1 2 0 5 s or 0 5 of total time Trip and Alarm 3096 of full scale in phase A 25 01 to 70 00 Hz in steps of 0 01 20 00 to 60 00 Hz in steps of 0 01 0 02 Hz 0 0 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION Timing aecuracy assert ttt 100 ms or 0 596 of total time Elements sees Trip and Alarm
139. 1 Calculated Voltage Vac Vab Vbc Displayed Voltages Va Vb 0 Vc Vbc Vac 806556A1 CDR FIGURE 6 6 Typical Phasor Diagram for Open Delta Connection For example assume a balanced three phase system with a VT Turn Ratio of 35 1 VT ratings 4200 120 V and motor running at full load with a power factor of 0 95 18 2 angle When the measured phase to phase voltage is 115 V the following quantities are displayed by the relay and EnerVista 469 Setup software In the A2 METERING DATA gt gt V VOLTAGE METERING menu VAB 4025 Volts VBC 4025 Volts VCA 4025 Volts AVERAGE LINE VOLTAGE 4025 Volts SYSTEM FREQUENCY 60 00 Hz In the A2 METERING DATA PHASORS menu VA PHASOR 95 896 at 0 Lag VB PHASOR 0 096 at 48 Lag VC PHASOR 95 896 at 300 Lag IA PHASOR 100 096 at 48 Lag IB PHASOR 100 096 at 168 Lag IC PHASOR 100 096 at 288 Lag 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES The EnerVista 469 Setup software displays the following screen for A2 METERING DATA gt V PHASORS values 77 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actu _ 22258 Relay 1 Actual Values MeteingData 5 Pressing the View button displays the following screen Phasors 77 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data x MAGNITUDE ANGLE COLOR ASSIGN TO MAP PHASOR SETS
140. 1 to 9999999999 Displays current value of digital counter Oto 3600 RPM Displays current Tachometer Digital Input value Active Latched 1 to 100 Thermal Capacity Used value is shown here 0 to 99999 s Shows overload level and estimated time to trip 1 to 5000 A 5 to 9996 FLA Lowest phase current shown O to 10096 Reflects the present unbalance level 0 1 to 5000 A Reflects the present ground current level 50 to 250 C RTD with the open sensor as programmed for RTDs 1 to 12 1 to 12 Shows RTD with the short low temperature alarm O to 20000 V 50 to 9996 of Rated O to 20000 V 101 to 15096 of Rated 0 00 20 00 to 120 00 Hz 0 00 to 0 99 Lead or Lag 0 00 1 00 7 6 8 ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG rm rm ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 9 69 09 69 01 69 69 69 69 00 69 09 69 09 69 09 wW H El CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES REACTIVE POWER Range Range TRIP COUNTER Range STARTER FAILURE Range H H 5 o E a 5 H N v ul H o amp H H 0 K a lt H CURRENT DEMAND Range ALARM 1053 A kW DEMAND Range ALARM 505 kW kvar DEMAND Range ALARM 2000 kvar kVA DEMAND Range ALARM 2062 kVA ANALOG I P 1 Range ALARM 201 Units EMERGENCY Range RESTART ALARM 469 NO
141. 1 x 12 x13 x 14 x15 1 01 4353 8707 1306 1741 2176 2612 3047 3482 3918 4353 4789 5224 5659 6095 6530 6 2 1 4 8 2 5 9 3 6 0 3 7 1 4 5 40 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Table 5 1 469 Standard Overload Curve Multipliers PICKUP STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS x FLA x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 10 11 12 13 14 15 105 8537 1707 2561 3414 4268 5122 5976 6829 7683 8537 9390 1024 1109 1195 1280 1 4 1 9 6 3 0 7 4 1 8 5 8 2 6 110 4166 8333 1250 1666 2083 2500 2916 3333 3750 4166 4583 5000 5416 5833 6250 8 6 0 7 4 1 8 5 1 8 5 2 9 6 2 120 1988 3977 596 5 7954 994 3 1193 1392 1590 1789 1988 2187 2386 2585 2784 2982 6 2 8 4 0 2 0 9 7 6 5 3 2 1 9 130 1268 2536 380 4 5072 634 0 760 8 887 6 1014 1141 1268 1394 1521 1648 1775 1902 lt 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 2 0 8 6 5 3 1 140 144 1822 273 4 364 5 455 6 5468 637 9 729 0 8202 911 3 1002 1093 1184 1275 1367 e rs 1 5 8 2 6 9 3 7 5 6 8 9 0 150 69 99 1399 2099 2799 3499 4199 4899 5599 6299 699 9 7698 8398 9098 9798 1049 99 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 9 127 2 169 6 212 0 254 4 296 9 3
142. 10 50 C 58 F 100 00 Q 0 C 32 F 119 39 Q 50 C 122 F 138 50 Q 100 C 212 F 157 32 Q 150 C 302 F 175 84 Q 200 C 392 F 194 08 Q 250 C 482 F Table 7 2 120 Q NICKEL TEST APPLIED EXPECTED RTD MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE C F 120 NICKEL READING Celsius Fahrenheit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 86 170 50 C 58 F 120 00 Q 0 C 32 F 157 74 Q 50 C 122 F 200 64 Q 100 C 212 F 248 95 Q 150 C 302 F 303 46 Q 200 C 392 F 366 53 Q 250 C 482 F Table 7 3 100 Q NICKEL TEST APPLIED EXPECTED RTD MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE F 100 READING NICKEL Celsius Fahrenheit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 71810 50 C 58 F 100 00 Q 0 C 32 F 131 45 Q 50 C 122 F 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 TESTING Table 7 3 100 NICKEL TEST APPLIED EXPECTED RTD MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE 1000 READING NICKEL Celsius Fahrenheit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 167 20 Q 100 C 212 F 207 45 Q 150 302 252 88 Q 200 392 305 44 Q 250 482 Table 7 4 10 COPPER TEST APPLIED EXPECTED RTD MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE CO F 10 COPPER READ
143. 22 A3 Updated THERMAL MODEL COOLING diagram to 5 47 5 47 Update 808705A2 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX Table A 8 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A2 PAG PAG CHANGE DESCRIPTION E E 1 2 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A2 Additional changes for revision A2 were cosmetic There was no change to content 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX A 6 GE Multilin Warranty A 14 A 6 1 Warranty Statement General Electric Multilin GE Multilin warrants each device it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory In the event of a failure covered by warranty GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the device providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge Warranty shall not apply to any device which has been subject to misuse negligence accident incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet GE Multilin is not liable for special indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for
144. 3 None 0 1 to 999999 9 Nm or ft lb in steps of 0 1 0 2 30 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Detection of a motor overtorque condition usually done to protect devices driven by the motor can be set up here The assigned relay activates when the torque measured exceeds the specified level for the specified time duration 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 85 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 12 S11 Monitoring 5 12 1 Trip Counter PATH SETTINGS gt V S11 MONITORING gt TRIP COUNTER TRIP COUNTER Range Off Latched Unlatched ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None TRIP COUNTER Range 1 to 50000 Trips in steps of 1 0 9 69 MESSAGE Range On Off MESSAGE TRIP COUNTER When the Trip Counter Limit is reached an alarm will occur The trip counter must be or the alarm level raised and the reset key must be pressed if the alarm was latched to reset the alarm For example it might be useful to set a Trip Counter alarm at 100 so that if 100 trips occur the resulting alarm prompts the operator or supervisor to investigate the type of trips that occurred A breakdown of trips by type may be found on MAINTENANCE TRIP COUNTERS If a trend is detected it would warrant further investigation 5 12 2 Starter Failure PATH SETTINGS gt V S11 MONITORING ELE
145. 3 4 Trip Analog P 1 Trip Analog 2 Trip Analog 3 Trip Analog 4 Trip Current U B Trip Differential Trip General Sw A Trip General Sw B Trip General Sw C Trip General Sw D Trip Ground Fault Backup Ground Fault Trip Incomplete Seq Trip Load Shed Trip Mechanical Jam Trip Overload Trip Overvoltage Trip Phase Reversal Trip Power Factor Trip Pressure Sw Trip Reactive Power Trip Remote Trip Reverse Power Trip RTD 1 Trip RTD 2 Trip RTD 3 Trip RTD 4 Trip RTD 5 Trip RTD 6 Trip RTD 7 Trip RTD 8 Trip RTD 9 Trip RTD 10 Trip RTD 11 Trip RTD 12 Trip Short Circuit Backup Short Circuit Trip Single Phasing Unbalanced Speed Switch Trip Tachometer Trip Undercurrent Trip 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Table 6 3 Cause of Events Sheet 2 of 2 Underpower Trip Undervoltage Trip Vibration Sw Trip Volt Frequency Trip ALARMS OPTIONAL EVENTS Analog Diff 1 2 Alarm Analog Diff 3 4 Alarm Analog 1 Alarm Analog 2 Alarm Analog 3 Alarm Analog 4 Alarm Breaker Failure Control Alarm Counter Alarm Current Demand Alarm Current U B Alarm General Sw A Alarm General Sw B Alarm General Sw C Alarm General Sw D Alarm Ground Fault Alarm kVA Demand Alarm kvar Demand Alarm kW Demand Alarm Open RTD Al
146. 39 3 381 7 424 1 466 5 5089 551 3 593 8 636 2 175 42 41 8483 4 5 d 2 5 5 E 6 116 6 145 7 174 9 2041 2332 2624 2915 3207 349 9 379 0 4082 4373 200 2916 5832 8747 l 5 5 5 3 1076 129 1 150 7 1722 1937 2153 236 8 2583 2799 3014 3229 225 21 53 43 06 64 59 86 12 1 5 A 116 6 133 2 149 9 166 6 1832 199 9 216 5 2332 249 250 1666 33 32 49 98 66 64 83 30 99 96 5 3 275 2665 5 1 6664 1088 1199 133 2 1466 159 9 173 2 186 5 199 9 2 5 7 0 3 5 8 1 3 00 10 93 21 86 3280 4373 5466 65 59 76 52 8746 98 39 1093 1202 1311 1421 1580 1639 325 915 1829 2744 3658 4573 5487 64 02 7316 8231 9146 1006 1097 18 8 1280 1371 3 50 777 1555 2332 31 09 38 87 46 64 54 41 62 19 69 96 77 73 8551 93 28 E a 375 669 13 39 20 08 2678 3347 4017 46 86 53 56 60 25 66 95 73 64 80 34 87 03 9373 1004 4 00 583 1166 1749 23 32 29 15 34 98 40 81 46 64 5247 58 30 64 13 69 96 75 79 81 62 87 45 425 512 1025 15 37 20 50 25 62 30 75 35 87 41 00 46 12 5125 56 37 61 50 66 62 71 75 76 87 450 454 908 13 68 18 17 2271 2725 31 80 36 34 40 88 4542 49 97 5451 59 05 63 59 68 14 47
147. 49 13 88 15 27 16 65 18 04 19 43 20 82 Above 8 0 x Pickup the trip time for 8 0 is used This prevents the overload curve from y acting as an instantaneous element NOTE The standard overload curves equation is Curve Multiplier x 2 2116623 Time to Trip Se 0 02530337 Pickup 1 0 05054758 Pickup 1 5 2 5 42 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Custom Overload Curve If the SELECT CURVE STYLE is set to Custom in the Thermal Model the following settings will appear PATH SETTINGS gt gt V S5 THERMAL MODEL gt V OVERLOAD CURVE SETUP Bl TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 OVERLOAD 02 1 01 x FLA Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 05 x FLA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 10 x FLA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 20 x FLA 795 4 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 30 x FLA 507 2 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 40 x FLA 364 6 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 E 1 50 x FLA 280 0 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 75 x FLA 169 7 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of O 1 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP R
148. 5 406 811 1217 1622 20 28 2433 28 39 32 44 36 50 40 55 44 61 48 66 52 72 56 77 60 83 5 00 364 729 10 93 14 57 18 22 21 86 25 50 29 15 32 79 36 43 40 08 43 72 47 36 51 01 54 65 5 50 299 598 897 11 96 14 95 17 94 20 93 23 91 26 90 29 89 32 88 35 87 38 86 41 85 44 84 6 00 250 500 749 999 1249 1499 17 49 19 99 2248 2498 2748 29 98 3248 34 97 37 47 650 212 424 636 848 10 60 12 72 1484 16 96 19 08 21 20 23 32 2544 27 55 29 67 31 79 700 182 364 546 729 941 10 98 1275 1457 16 39 1821 20 04 21 86 23 68 25 50 27 32 750 158 3 16 475 633 791 949 1108 12 66 1424 15 82 1741 18 99 20 57 22 15 23 74 8 00 139 278 416 555 694 833 971 1110 1249 13 88 1527 16 65 18 04 19 43 20 82 10 00 139 278 416 555 694 833 971 11 10 1249 13 88 15 27 16 65 18 04 19 43 20 82 1500 139 278 416 555 694 833 971 11 10 1249 13 88 15 27 16 65 18 04 19 43 20 82 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 41 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Table 5 1 469 Standard Overload Curve Multipliers PICKUP STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS x FLA x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 00 1 39 2 78 4 16 5 55 6 94 8 33 9 71 11 10 12
149. 8700A1 CDR In the two CT configuration the currents will sum vectorially at the common point of the two CTs The diagram illustrates the two possible configurations If one phase is reading high by a factor of 1 73 on a system that is known to be balanced simply reverse the polarity of the leads at one of the two phase CTs taking care that the CTs are still tied to ground at some point Polarity is important 808702A1 CDR To illustrate the point further the following diagram shows how the current in phases A and C sum up to create phase 1 73 2 PHASE CT CURRENTS 2 PHASE CT CURRENTS 180 OUT OF PRASE 808701A1 CDR A 2 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX Once again if the polarity of one of the phases is out by 180 the magnitude of the resulting vector on a balanced system will be out by a factor of 1 73 On a three wire supply this configuration will always work and unbalance will be detected properly In the event of a single phase there will always be a large unbalance present at the interposing CTs of the relay If for example Phase A was lost Phase A would read zero while Phase B and C would both read the magnitude of Phase C If on the other hand phase B was lost at the supply Phase A would be 180 out of phase with Phase C and the vector addition would equal zero at Phase B 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A 3 A APPENDIX A 2 Cool Time Constants
150. 9 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES forgotten contact the factory with the encrypted access code See Passcode on page 5 8 for passcode features e ACCESS DENIED SHORT ACCESS SWITCH In order to store any settings values the access switch must be shorted If this message appears and it is necessary to change a settings short access terminals C1 and C2 ALL POSSIBLE RESETS HAVE BEEN PERFORMED If only some of the trip and alarm features that are active can be cleared i e the conditions that caused some of these trips and or alarms are still present then this message will appear when a RESET is performed indicating that only trips and alarms that could be reset have been reset e ARE YOU SURE PRESS ENTER TO VERIFY If the RESET key is pressed and resetting of any trip or alarm feature is possible this message will appear to ask for verification of the operation If RESET is pressed again while the message is still on the display the reset will be performed e DATA CLEARED SUCCESSFULLY This message confirms that data has been cleared or reset in the 51 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA 51 469 SETUP gt V INSTALLATION settings groups e DATE ENTRY WAS NOT COMPLETE Since the DATE settings has a special format MM DD YYYY if ENTER is pressed before the complete value is entered this message appears and the new value is not stored Another attempt will have to be made with the complete inf
151. 9 RELAY BEARING RTDs pd 4 SOLATED ANALOG LOAD moron 3 Y OUTPUTS 4 M RS232 LA 4 RS485 SE RS485 mA 4 ANALOG INPUTS 806807A7 0WG FIGURE 2 1 Single Line Diagram Typical applications include pumps fans compressors mills shredders extruders debarkers refiners cranes conveyors chillers crushers and blowers Some of the protection highlights are detailed here a complete list is shown below Four assignable digital inputs may be configured for a number of different features including tachometer or generic trip and alarm with a programmable name The thermal model incorporates unbalance biasing RTD feedback and exponential cooling In addition to the 15 standard overload curves there is a custom curve feature and a curve specifically designed for the starting of high inertia loads when the acceleration time exceeds the safe stall time A second overload curve is provided for two speed motors Ground faults or earth leakage as low as 0 25 A may be detected using the GE Multilin 50 0 025 Ground CT CT inputs for phase differential protection are also provided The 12 RTD inputs provided may be individually field programmed for different RTD types Voltage transformer inputs allow for numerous protection features based on voltage and power quantities Four 4to 20 mA analog in
152. 9 Relay 1 Actual Values E Event Recor DEVICE ID The events shown here correspond to this device SAVE EVENTS Click the Save Events button to save the event record to the PC as a CSV file EVENT DATA System information as measured by the relay at the instant of the event occurrence FIGURE 4 9 Event Recorder Window To view detailed information for a given event and the system information at the moment of the event occurrence gt Change the event number on the Select Event box 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 45 4 5 4 6 6 Modbus User The EnerVista 469 Setup software provides means to program 469 User Modbus addresses 0180h to 01F7h Refer to the 469 Communications Guide for additional information on the User Map Select a connected device in EnerVista 469 Setup Select the Settings User Map menu item to open the following window User Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Settings Modbus User Map 2 Aet x User Map User Map Address 1 9 Save User Address 2 User Map Address 3 Restore User Map Address 4 User Map Address 5 Default User Map Address 6 User Map Address 7 User Map Address 8 User Map Address 9 User Map Address 10 User Map Address 11 User Map Address 12 User Map Address 13 User Map Address 14 User Map Address 15 User Map Address 16 User Map Add
153. AGE sone ie iir tpe RU er dert 6 11 PHASE DIFFERENTIAL E PHASE DIFFERENTIAL PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT PRIMARY PHASE DIFFERENTIAL OVERCURRENT PHASE REVERSAL specifications TEL UL 5 PHASE ROTATION SETTINGS tette 0000 5 20 5 1 x ose ede e eire DE pde 5 19 PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT Hm 2 10 PHASORS 3 open delta es oen oe C ette 6 22 3 phase wye VTs rete POLE NM Md POSITIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT 5 55 5 62 6 11 POWER GUD OI reactive underpower POWER DEMAND 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER I POWER FACTOR specifications 5s abre de S POWER MEASUREMENT CONVENTIONS sse 5 80 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST ett rece rete re tp eee 7 11 POWER ree te E ote eret t ers ae t n ice indes POWER t tti ei Ep lea etant PRE FAULT SETUP ater ens debeat ee aep eee dietus PRE FAULT SIMULATION PRE FAULT
154. AL 259 CHAPTER 7 TESTING 7 2 8 Output Relays To verify the functionality of the output relays perform the following steps Using the settings S13 TESTING TEST OUTPUT RELAYS gt FORCE OPERATION OF RELAYS 1 Trip Select and store values as per the table below verifying operation FORCE EXPECTED MEASUREMENT ACTUAL MEASUREMENT OPERATION 4 FOR SHORT 4 FOR SHORT SETTINGS 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 no nc nc no nc nc nc no nc nc nc no nc 1 TRIP 4 4 4 4 44 2 AUXILIARY 414 4 4 414 3 AUXILIARY 4 414 4 414 4 ALARM 4 4 414 414 5 BLOCK START 4 4 4 414 4 6 SERVICE 4 4 4 4 4 4 All Relays 4 4 4 4 4 4 No Relays 4 4 4 4 414 The 6 SERVICE relay is failsafe or energized normally Operating the 6 SERVICE relay causes n it to de energize NOTE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 TESTING 7 3 Additional Functional Testing 7 3 1 Overload Curve Test 469 specification for overload curve timing accuracy is 100 ms or 2 of time to trip Pickup accuracy is as per the current inputs 0 596 of 2 x CT when the injected current is less than 2 x CT and 1 of 20 x CT when the injected current is gt 2 x CT Perform the steps below to verify accuracy gt Alter the following settings
155. AMPS 806823A4 CDR FIGURE 5 10 Voltage Dependent Overload Curves Acceleration Curves 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS The 469 takes the information provided and create protection curves for any voltage between the minimum and 10096 For values above the voltage in question the 469 extrapolates the safe stall protection curve to 11096 voltage This current level is calculated by taking the locked rotor current at 10096 voltage and multiplying by 1 10 For trip times above the 11096 voltage level the trip time of 11096 will be used see figure below 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 TIME TO TRIP SECONDS d 20 Oo GE Multilin HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP 13 2 kV REACTOR COOLANT PUMP Custom Curve PANE Acceleration Intersect at 80 V Acceleration Intersect at 100 Safe St 8096 V Sta Safe Stall Time at 100 V 100 V St all Time at 80 V Current all Current dus Stall Points Extrapolated to 110 V 2 3 4 5 6 MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS 7 8 806824A4 CDR FIGURE 5 11 Voltage Dependent Overload Protection Curves B The safe stall curve is in reality a series of safe stall points for different voltages For a given v voltage there can only be
156. ANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Table 5 2 RTD Temperature vs Resistance Temperature 100 Q Pt 120 Ni 100 Q Ni 100 Cu SF DIN 43760 170 338 164 76 269 91 224 92 15 61 180 356 168 47 280 77 233 97 16 00 190 374 172 46 291 96 243 30 16 39 200 392 175 84 303 46 252 88 16 78 210 410 179 51 315 31 262 76 17 17 220 428 183 17 327 54 272 94 17 56 230 446 186 82 340 14 283 45 17 95 240 464 190 45 353 14 294 28 18 34 250 482 194 08 366 53 305 44 18 73 5 9 2 RTDs 1106 PATH SETTINGS V 58 RTD TEMPERATURE V RTD 1 6 RTD RTD 1 APPLICA Range 1 gt TION None messace gt gt messace gt gt MEssacc gt gt messace gt gt messace gt gt messace gt gt essace gt essace gt gt gt cssacc gt 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL n H H zt 3t 1 RTD 1 HIGH ALARM Range EVENTS Off alls Be Silas EE ER ES SS R 4 CE zig ad TEE RTD 1 TRIP off RTD 1 TRIP VOT 2 tg Stator Bearing Ambient Other Range 8 alphanumeric characters Range Off Latched Unlatched Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Au
157. ASK Range standard IP address format s 255 255 255 000 GATEWAY IP Range standard IP address format ESSAGE Eom ADDRESS The IP addresses are used with the Modbus protocol Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide Enter the dedicated IP subnet IP and gateway IP addresses provided by the network administrator To ensure optimal response from the relay the typical connection timeout should be set as indicated in the following table TCP IP sessions Timeout setting up to 2 2 seconds up to 4 3 seconds DeviceNet Communications Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 71 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS The following settings appear when the relay is ordered with the DeviceNet D option PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE ADDRESS Range 1 to 254 in steps of 1 COMMUNICATIONS 254 lt gt 25485 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 ESSAGE 19200 BAUD RATE 9600 Range None Odd Even 5485 PARITY None gt FRONT PORT 5232 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 ESSAGE 4 gt BAUD RATE 19200 19200 ID Range 0 to 63 gt 1 ED Range 125K 250 500 BAUD RATE 125K Enter the dedicated MAC ID and baud rate as per the DeviceNet design Refer to GEK
158. Active Screen Event Recorder Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Event T Setpoint Actual Communications View Help 5 x Time Last Reset Date 11 35 56 84 11 35 56 67 of Event Motor Started Simulation Started Simulation Stopped Motor Started Simulation Started Simulation Stopped Motor Started Simulation Started Simulation Stopped Motor Started Simulation Started Simul d Motor Started Simulation Started Simulation Stopped Value Low Speed ORPM 5704 570 570 50 179 2 Clear Events 0 H Save Events 01 38 1 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 10 47 01 1 01 28 2004 10 47 01 4 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 01 28 2004 Y Event Motor Speed during Event Event Tachometer RPM Event Phaje Current Event Phase B Current Event Phase C Current Event Motor Load Event Current Unbalance Event Ground Current 0004 Event Phase A Differential Current Event Phase B Differential Current Event Phase C Differential Current Event Hottest Stator RTD 1 Event Temperature of Hottest Stator 40 8 sh eeu Event Hottest Bearing RIO Event Temperature of Hottest Bearin 40 C 12 1 1994 Total Events 4 01 28 2004 10 44 05 54 15 01 28 2004 09 19 28 67 46
159. Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None CURRENT DEMAND Range 10 to 100000 A in steps of 1 LIMIT 100 A 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 97 5 88 MESSAGE DEMAND D MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE B kvar DEMAND gt MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE kVA gt MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE 09092 9 lt gt 9 D fa ba B H El 2 Ei 5 2 H n 02 909 2 909 6 lt gt lt gt D lt lt pa D H El Zils amp oe 9 Fh zu n Fh alk El JP 2 n rh Fh w H 15 kW DEMAND Range 100 kW Range kvar DEMAND Range PERIOD 15 min kvar DEMAND Range ASSIGN ALARM Range 100 kvar lt lt t m H K Ei g n Ei pi Ei Fh ojl z HO n Fh Fh PERIOD 15 min kVA DEMAND Range LIMIT 100 kVA Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS On Off 5 to 90 min in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliar
160. B H1 G1 VC H2 G1 Calculated Voltages Vab 3 VA V3 VB VC Displayed Voltages Vbn Van Ib Vbn VB Vcn VC As Calculated Vbc As Calculated 806563A1 CDR Vbc Vca As Calculated Vca FIGURE 6 10 Typical Phasor Diagram for Wye Connection The EnerVista 469 Setup software displays the following screen Phasor 77 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 xd 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data 2 6 24 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Pressing the View button displays the following screen Phasors 77 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data 0 x _ ASSIGN To MAP PHASOR SETS ____4330 18 4990 258 23230 463 Relay 1 Phasors New Site 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering 4 Table 6 2 Three phase VT Connection ABC 0 3 pf 72 5 0 7 pf 1 00 pf 0 7 pf 0 3 pf 72 5 rotation lag 45 lag 02 lag 45 lead lead Va 0 0 lag 0 lag 0 lag 0 Vb 120 120 120 120 120 Vc 240 240 240 240 240 la 75 45 0 315 285 Ib 195 165 120 75 45 Ic 315 285 240 195 165 kW kVAR 0 kW 0 3 72 5 0 7 1 00 pf 0 7 pf 0 3 pf 72 5 rota
161. C20 911 0015 300 5 3 00 C20 911 0016 400 5 5 00 20 911 0017 500 5 3 00 c50 911 0018 3 00 C50 911 0019 750 5 5 00 C50 911 0020 1000 5 3 75 c50 X91 1 0021 B 909068A1 DWG This test report is in accordance with 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL ANSI IEEE C57 13 1993 ABOVE THIS LINE THE VOLTAGE FOR A GIVEN EXCITING CURRENT FOR ANY UNIT WILL NOT BE LESS THAN 95 OF THE CURVE VALUE BELOW THIS LINE THE EXCITING CURRENT FOR A GIVEN VOLTAGE FOR ANY UNIT WILL NOT EXCEED THE CURVE VALUE BY MORE THAN 25Z 4 0 56 Dio HOLES 14 Dio 6 82 173 Es 0 44 x 1 00 SLOTS 11 x 25 4 0 56 Dia HOLES 14 Dio 3 00 5 82 75 148 11 x 25 CT DIMENSIONS B A 9 A APPENDIX A 4 EU Declaration of Conformity A 4 1 EU Declaration of Conformity EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Applicable Council Directive s 73 23 The Low Voltage Directive 89 336 EEC The EMC Directive Standards to Which Conformity is Declared IEC 1010 1 1990 A 1 1992 A 2 1995 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use EN 50263 EMC Product Standard for Measuring Relays and protective Equipment Manufacturer s Name General Electric Multilin Manufacturer s Address 215 Anderson Ave Markham Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Man
162. CHAPTER 7 TESTING 7 2 Hardware Functional Testing 7 2 1 Phase Current Accuracy Test The 469 specification for phase current accuracy is 0 596 of 2 x CT when the injected current is less than 2 x CT Perform the steps below to verify accuracy gt Alter the following settings S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt PHASE CT PRIMARY 1000 A Measured values should be 10 A gt Inject the values shown in the table below gt Verify accuracy of the measured values gt View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING INJECTED INJECTED EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1A UNIT 5 A UNIT READING PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C 5 100 0 2 200 0 5 2 5 500 5 0 1000 A 1 5 7 5 1500 2 0 10 2000 7 2 2 Voltage Input Accuracy Test The 469 specification for voltage input accuracy is 0 5 of full scale 273 V Perform the steps below to verify accuracy gt Alter the following settings S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt VT CONNECTION TYPE Wye S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt V VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO 10 00 1 Measured values should be 13 65 V gt Apply the voltage values shown in the table gt Verify accuracy of the measured values gt View the measured values in 2 METERING DATA V VOLTAGE METERING
163. CUSTOMER USE OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II INSULATION VOLTAGE 300 POLLUTION DEGREE 2 1 20 CONTROL POWER 90 300VDC 390mA Max 70 265VAC 500mA OUTPUT RELAY CONTACTS 48 62Hz SR469 CASE NOILNVD 5 lt 0 D v 4 83849 000 LISTED IND CONT FQ 52TL FIGURE 3 3 Case and Unit Identification Labels 3 1 3 Installation The 469 case alone or adjacent to another SR series unit can be installed in the panel of a standard 19 inch rack see below for panel cutout dimensions Provision must be made when mounting for the front door to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment Normally the 469 unit is mounted in its case when shipped from the factory and should be removed before mounting the case in the supporting panel Unit withdrawal is described in the next section 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 2 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION CUTOUT FIGURE 3 4 Single 469 Cutout Panel E 2 2 4 52 ee 1 N e N 427 CUTOUT CUTOUT Eo 5 N 2 x Y FIGURE 3 5 Double 469 Cutout Panel After the mounting hole in the panel has been prepared slide the 469 case into the panel from the front Applying firm pressure on the front to ensure the front bezel fits snugly against the front of the panel ben
164. D Range see below MESSAGE gt gt 100 Ohm Platinum MESSAGE OTHER RTD TYPE Range see below 100 Ohm Platinum Each of the twelve RTDs may be configured as None or any one of four application types Stator Bearing Ambient or Other Each of these types may in turn be any one of four different RTD types 100 Ohm Platinum 120 Ohm Nickel 100 Ohm Nickel or 10 Ohm Copper The table below lists RTD resistance versus temperature Table 5 2 RTD Temperature vs Resistance Temperature 100 Q Pt 120 Q Ni 100 Q Ni 10 Q Cu SF DIN 43760 50 58 80 51 86 17 7181 7 10 40 40 84 27 92 76 77 30 7 49 30 22 88 22 99 41 82 84 7 88 20 4 92 16 106 15 88 45 8 26 10 14 96 09 113 00 94 17 8 65 0 32 100 00 120 00 100 00 9 04 10 50 103 90 127 17 105 97 9 42 20 68 107 79 134 52 112 10 9 81 30 86 111 67 142 06 118 38 10 19 40 104 115 54 149 79 124 82 10 58 50 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160 320 161 04 259 30 216 08 15 22 5 70 469 MOTOR M
165. DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS 806757A9 DWG FIGURE 3 19 Summation Method without Phase CTs 3 2 5 Voltage Inputs 806846A2 DWG The 469 has three channels for AC voltage inputs each with an isolating transformer There are no internal fuses or ground connections on the voltage inputs The maximum VT ratio is 300 00 1 The two VT connections are open delta see FIGURE 3 12 Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3 11 or wye see below The voltage channels are connected in wye internally which means that the jumper shown on the delta source connection of the typical wiring diagram between the phase B input and the 469 neutral terminal must be installed for open delta VTs 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Polarity of the VTs is critical for correct power measurement and voltage phase reversal operation A 1 A fuse is typically used to protect the inputs VI s REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE DEPENDENT CUSTOM CURVE OR METERING BREAKER CONTACTOR A lt B gt C rs 95 r E i fe o GTI 5 4 e CONTROL POWER 125 250 VDC 3 PHASE 4 WIRE SYSTEM TO SWITCHGEAR 120 250 a WYE CONNECTED GROUND BUS CD A 12 11
166. E ESSAGE For RS485 communications each 469 must have a unique address from 1 to 254 Address 015 the broadcast address detected by all relays Addresses do not have to be sequential but no two units can have the same address or errors will occur Generally each unit added to the link uses the next higher address starting at 1 Baud rates can be selected as 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 The data frame is fixed at 1 start 8 data and 1 stop bits while parity is optional The computer RS485 port is a general purpose port for 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS connection to a DCS PLC or PC The auxiliary RS485 port may be used for redundancy or it may be used to talk to auxiliary GE Multilin devices The RS485 COM port is disabled if the Ethernet or DeviceNet option is ordered Ethernet Communications The following settings appear when the relay is ordered with the Ethernet T option PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE ADDRESS Range 1 to 254 in steps of 1 COMMUNICATIONS 254 essace 5 5485 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 BAUD RATE 9600 19200 5485 Range None Odd Even id PARITY None FRONT PORT 5232 Range 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 mM BAUD RATE 19200 19200 ESSAGE gt IP ADDRESS Range standard IP address format 7707 e 0 0 0 0 ESSAGE gt SUBNET IP M
167. E PHASE VOLTAGE 0 Volts Connection is set as Wye Range 0 00 20 00 to 120 00 Hz ESSAGE 2205 FREQUENCY 2 Measured voltage parameters will be displayed here If no VT connection type is programmed the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING DV VT CONNECTION TYPE settings the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages 6 3 4 Speed PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A2 METERING DATA gt V SPEED 09 TACHOMETER 0 RPM If the Tachometer function is assigned to one of the digital inputs the tachometer readout may be viewed here Range 0 to 7200 RPM If no digital input is configured as tachometer in S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT1 4 the THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED flash message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 13 6 14 6 3 5 Power Metering CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A2 METERING DATA gt gt V POWER METERING METERING NOTE NOTE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE lt gt 9 69 09 69 69 07 69 09 Range 0 01 to 0 99 Lead or Lag 0 00 POWER FACTOR 1 00 0 00 ERE HN paver P WEN per me REAL POWER Range 0 to x99999 kW 0 kW REAL POWER Range 0 to 65555 hp O hp REACTIVE POWER Range 0 to 99999 kvar
168. E REG 4 55 SAVING SETTINGS TO neta nitas 4 35 TOC II 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS LOADING NEW FIRMWARE ttttt ttt ttt ttt 4 35 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 469 SETUP FEATURES 4 38 TRIGGERED EVENTS ttt ttti WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRACE MEMORY TRENDING DATA LOGGER EVENT RECORDER MODBUS USER MAP VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 469 4 49 PLUG AND PLAY EXAMPLE ttt ttt ttt 4 49 5 SETTINGS pdt ENG MT ENT OU EE SETTINGS MESSAGE MAP TRIPS ALARMS AND BLOCKS ecessssssssessssessssseesssscssssssssssesssessssssssssenssecesseesssessssecesaseensseenses 5 6 RELAY ASSIGNMENT PRACTICES ceesssssssssssssesssssssssssssssscsssscessssessecsssscsssseessssessnesssscsssnessenses 5 7 SIS as pA 5 8 PASS PREF COMMUNICATION Sirosen n eet citt eii eG LEER RE REAL TIME CLOCK Streben ort eb RA DEFAULT MESSAGES MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD CLEAR DATA INSTALLATION m So Pol Mer UP ERO Ae CURRENT SENSING VOLTAGE SENSING POWER SYSTEM
169. ER BLOCK REVERSE Range 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1 REVERSE 6 POWER 17 gt REVERSE POWER Range Off Latched Unlatched ALARM Off gt ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE lt RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None gt REVERSE POWER Range 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 gt ALARM gt POWER Range 0 2 to 30 0 in steps of 0 1 ALARM REVERSE POWER Range On Off 4 gt ALARM gt REVERSE POWER Range Off Latched Unlatched ESSAGE gt TRIP _ gt ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp ESSAGE RELAYS Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary gt REVERSE POWER Range 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 ESSAGE gt TRIP REVERSE POWER Range 0 2 to 30 0 s in steps of 1 ESSAGE 4 gt If enabled once magnitude of 3 phase total power exceeds the Pickup Level in the reverse direction negative kW for a period of time specified by the Delay a trip or alarm will occur The minimum magnitude of power measurement is determined by the phase CT minimum of 596 rated CT primary If the level for reverse power is set below that level a trip or alarm will only occur once the phase current exceeds the 596 cutoff 5 11 6 Torque Setup PATH SETTINGS gt V S10 POWER ELEMENTS
170. ERR GE MULTILIN USE ONLY 514 TWO SPEED MOTOR DESCRIPTION SPEED2 UNDERCURRENT SPEEDZ ACCELERATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES OVERVIEW aes 6 1 ACTUALVALUES MAP 2 P 6 1 DESCRIPTION tte NETWORK STATUS x aceite ti trece 6 4 MOTOR STATUS cte et dpa E 6 5 TOC IV 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS LAST TRIP DATA ALARM STATUS START BLOCKS ei ttc ette E Lb ut DIGITAL INPUTS REALTIME CLOCK tede ee DRE AT METERING DATA coastal sper polen poe demise Hop rr sical CURRENT METERING TEMPERATURE VOLTAGE METERING POWER METERING ide ase cet reet en DEMAND MEME RIN Ge D tenete ANALOG PHASORS A3 LEARNED DAT MOTOR START AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD RTD MAXIMUMS ANALOG INPUT MIN MAX Ad MAINTENANCE m Finden TRIP COUNTERS GENERAL COUNTERS TIME RS i ttes AS EVENT RECORDER EVENT OL TO EVENT 256 AGPRODEUCTINPU encuentre se eS den sabia 469 MODEL INFORMATION
171. File item is selected the EnerVista 469 Setup software will begin collecting data at the selected sampling rate and will display it on the screen The data log will continue until the Stop button is pressed or until the selected number of samples is reached whichever occurs first During the process of data logging the trending screen appears as shown below SAVE DATA TO FILE Select to save the information to a CSV file on the PC Trending File Setup Log samples to file R Trending Pumping Station 1 463 Relay 1 Actual 0 oftotal 0 samples logged MODE SELECT Select to view Cursor 1 Cursor 2 or the Delta difference values for the graph Zoom In 7 Cursor Cursor2 C Delta 905 108 Cursor values are relative to the latest rightmost sample time Phase Current y 4264 Phase B Current Phase C Current 9999 V 9999 v 9999 BUTTONS Zoom In enlarges the graph Zoom Out shrinks the graph Reset clears the screen Run Stop starts and stops the data logger Sample Rate 4 v Print Trending Please close all other views if Graph select 1 second as interval GRAPH CHANNEL Select the desired channel to be captured from the pull down menu LEVEL Displays the value at the active cursor line CURSOR LINES Click and d
172. GE TORQUE SETUP TRACE MEMORY su TRIP COIL SUPERVISION 2 7 5 86 5 87 6 10 7 7 TRIP COUNTER actudl uiuat Hte e o e ce o decet 6 30 6 31 clearing setpoints TRIP RELAY see 1 TRIP RELAY TRIP TIME ON OVEREOMRD eror e ene e eite petet 6 5 Ihm 5 6 TWOSPHASE CONFIGURATIO Ree eese A 1 TWO SPEED MOTOR idtm emere ederet assignable input 4 description enabling undercurrent de WATLING GOGGIN sitviysscnsuasvesesussessnevevead TYPICAL APPLICATIONS TYPICAL WIRING 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL GSS CRIP PE 3 12 AN TEI GG CUM PN 3 11 U UNBALANCE actual values MO COL ei SPECICATION S tienne eei three phase example trip counter m UNBALANCE BIAS REG e EUM UNDERCURRENT DUE setpoints for 2 speed motor s P FID COUNTE D e tbe ER NDERFREQUENCY tet
173. GEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 19 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Enter the nominal system frequency here These settings allow the 469 to determine the internal sampling rate for maximum accuracy The 469 may be used on variable frequency drives when the NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to Variable of the elements function in the same manner with the following exceptions the ratio of negative to positive sequence current is calculated from 0 to 3096 not 4096 and the voltage and power elements work properly if the voltage waveform is approximately sinusoidal An unfiltered voltage waveform from a pulse width modulated drive cannot be measured accurately however the current waveform is approximately sinusoidal and can be measured accurately All current elements will function properly Note however that undervoltage and underfrequency elements will not work instantaneously using variable frequency If Variable is chosen the filtering algorithm increases the trip and alarm times by up to 270 ms when the level is close to the threshold If the level exceeds the threshold by a significant amount trip and alarm times will decrease until they match the programmed delay The exceptions to this increased time are the short circuit ground fault and differential elements which will trip as per specification If the sequence of phase rotation for a given plant is ACB rather than the standard ABC the SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE settings may be used to
174. GS S6 CURRENT ELEM gt V OVERLOAD ALARM OVERLOAD Range Off Latched Unlatched OVERLOAD ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Auxiliary2 Auxiliary3 MESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 Alarm amp Aux3 Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 None Range 0 1 to 60 s steps of 0 1 MESSAGE e OVERLOAD ALARM DELAY 0 1 s OVERLOAD ALARM Range On Off MESSAGE 9 EVENTS Off If enabled as Latched or Unlatched the Overload Alarm functions as follows After a motor start when the equivalent motor heating current exceeds the OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL an alarm will occur If programmed as Unlatched the overload alarm resets itself when the motor is no longer in overload If programmed as Latched the RESET key must be pressed to reset the alarm once the overload condition is gone Event recording for all alarm features is optional For example it may be desirable to have an unlatched alarm connected to a PLC that is controlling the load on a motor 5 7 3 Mechanical Jam PATH SETTINGS S6 CURRENT ELEM gt V MECHANICAL JAM MECHANICAL JAM Range Off Latched Unlatched MECHANICAL TRIP Off Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp MESSAGE ASSIGN TRIP g trip Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 Range 1 01 to 3 00 x FLA in steps of MECHANICAL JAM us PICKUP 1 50 x MECHANICAL JAM Range 1 to 30s in steps of 1 MESSAGE DELAY 1 5
175. HAPTER 5 SETTINGS Vibration Switch Alarm PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Vibration Sw Range Latched Unlatched VIBRATION SWITCH g gt ALARM Unlatched x ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE noe TN lt RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None Range 0 1 to 100 0 s steps of O 1 VIBRATION SW ALARM VIBRATION SW Range On Off MESSAGE These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Vibration Sw Alarm Once the Vibration Switch Alarm function is chosen for one of the digital inputs the settings messages shown follow the assignment message When the motor is stopped or running the digital input will be monitored If a closure occurs an alarm will occur after the specified delay Vibration Switch Trip PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 B INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Vibration Sw Trip B Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp MESSAGE 5 5 Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 Range 0 1 to 100 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE ER m SW These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Pressure Sw Trip Once Vibration Switch Trip is chosen for a digital input the settings shown follow the assignment message When the motor
176. HASE A PHASE PHASEC 0 5 A 100A 1 0A 200A 2 5A 500A 5 0A 1000A Input gt Alter the following settings S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V GROUND CT Secondary S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING GROUND CT PRIMARY 1000 A S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT Secondary S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT PRIMARY 1000 A Measured values should be 25 A gt Inject the values shown below into one phase only gt Verify accuracy of the measured values View the measured values in 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 TESTING A2 METERING DATA gt CURRENT METERING INJECTED EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CURRENT GROUND CURRENT 1A UNIT READING CURRENT PHASEA PHASEB PHASEC 0 1A 100A 0 2 200 0 5 500 1000 7 2 4 Multilin 50 0 025 Ground Accuracy Test The 469 specification for GE Multilin 50 0 025 ground current input accuracy is 40 596 of CT rated primary 25 Perform the steps below to verify accuracy gt Alter the following settings S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING GROUND CT 50 0 025 Measured values should be 0 125 A gt Inject the values shown in the table below either as primary values into a GE Multilin 50 0 025 Core Balance CT or as secondary values that simulate t
177. IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is applied all monitored inputs outputs and internal systems are OK the 469 has been programmed and the 469 is in protection mode not simulation mode This LED flashes when the 469 is in simulation or testing mode SEETPOINT ACCESS This LED indicates that the access jumper is installed and passcode protection has been satisfied settings may be altered and stored COMPUTER 5232 This LED flashes when there is any activity on the communication port The LED remains on solid if incoming data is valid COMPUTER RS485 Flashes when there is any activity on the communication port Remains on solid if incoming data is valid and intended for the slave address programmed in the relay AUXILIARY RS485 Flashes when there is any activity on the communication port Remains on solid if incoming data is valid and intended for the slave address programmed in the relay LOCKOUT Indicates start attempts will be blocked either by a programmed lockout time or a condition that is still present RESET POSSIBLE A trip or latched alarm may be reset Press the RESET key to Clear the trip or alarm MESSAGE Flashes when a trip alarm or start block occurs Pressing the MESSAGE keys scroll through diagnostic messages This LED remains solid when settings and actual value messages are being viewed Pressing the RESET key returns the display to the default messages Under normal conditions the default message
178. ING Celsius Fahrenheit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7100 50 C 58 F 9 04 Q 0 C 32 F 10 97 Q 50 C 122 F 12 90 Q 100 C 212 F 14 83 Q 150 C 302 F 16 78 Q 200 C 392 F 18 73 Q 250 C 482 F 7 2 6 Digital Inputs and Trip Coil Supervision The digital inputs and trip coil supervision can be verified easily with a simple switch or pushbutton Verify the SWITCH 24 V DC with a voltmeter Perform the steps below to verify functionality of the digital inputs gt Open switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V DIGITAL INPUTS gt Close switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision ircuit gt View the status of the digital inputs and trip supervision in 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 7 A1 STATUS gt V DIGITAL INPUTS CHAPTER 7 TESTING INPUT EXPECTED PASS EXPECTED PASS STATUS SWITCH FAIL STATUS SWITCH FAIL OPEN CLOSED ACCESS Open Shorted TEST Open Shorted STARTER STATUS Open Shorted EMERGENCY RESTART Open Shorted REMOTE RESET Open Shorted ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 Open Shorted ASSIGNABLE INPUT 2 Open Shorted ASSIGNABLE INPUT 5 Open Shorted ASSIGNABLE INPUT 4 Open Shorted TRIP COIL SUPERVISION No Coil Co
179. ING ANALOG INPUT READING FORCE AMMETE mA INPUT units VALUE 1 2 3 4 READING 2 3 4 096 4 mA 0 mA 2596 8 mA 250 mA 5096 12mA 500 mA 7596 16 mA 750mA 10096 20 mA 1000 mA Oto 1 mA Analog Input gt Alter the following settings S12 ANALOG gt V ANALOG INPUTI gt ANALOG INPUTI 0 1 mA S12 ANALOG gt V ANALOG INPUTI gt V ANALOG INPUT1 MINIMUM 0 S12 ANALOG gt V ANALOG INPUTI gt V ANALOG INPUT1 MAXIMUM 1000 repeat Analog Inputs 2 to 4 Analog output values should be 0 01 mA on the ammeter Measured analog input values should be 10 units Force the analog outputs using the following settings S13 TESTING gt V TEST ANALOG OUTPUT gt FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS FUNCTION Enabled S13 TESTING gt V TEST ANALOG OUTPUT gt V ANALOG OUTPUT 1 FORCED VALUE 096 enter desired percent repeats for analog output 2 4 gt Verify the ammeter readings as well as the measured analog input readings gt View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA V ANALOG INPUTS ANALOG EXPECT MEASURED EXPECTED MEASURED ANALOG OUTPUT ED AMMETER ANALOG INPUT READING FORCE AMMETE READING mA INPUT units VALUE R READING READIN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 G 096 0 mA 0 mA 2596 0 25 mA 250 mA 5096 0 50 mA 500 mA 7596 0 75 mA 750 mA 10096 1 00 mA 1000 mA 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANU
180. INHIBIT Range x gt STARTS HOUR BLOCK Range gt LOCKOUT TIME 20 TIME BETWEEN Range sTARTS gt BLOCK Range x LOCKOUT 1200 s WARNING Note A 469 NOT PROGRAMMED N A Message seen when start blocks are active Message seen only after an overload trip Oto 500 min Oto 60 min Oto 500 min O to 50000 sec Seen only if Phase CT Primary or Motor FLA not programmed Any active blocking functions may be viewed here The WARNING 469 NOT PROGRAMMED message is seen only if the Phase CT Primary or Motor FLA settings have not been programmed 6 2 6 Digital Inputs PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V DIGITAL INPUTS INPUTS ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Range gt TEST Range gt SWITCH STATE gt STARTER STATUS Range gt SWITCH STATE gt EMERGENCY RESTART Range 4 gt SWITCH STATE gt RESET gt SWITCH STATE ASSIGNABLE DIGI Range gt TAL gt ASSIGNABLE DIGI Range gt gt ASSIGNABLE DIGI Range gt TAL Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted 6 9 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES ASSIGNABLE DIGI Range
181. INPUT 1 FUNCTION and scrolling with the VALUE keys select General Sw The relay will display the following message INPUT 1 FUNCTION General Sw A Press the MESSAGE key to view the SWITCH NAME settings The name of this user defined input will be changed in this example from the generic General Sw A to something more descriptive If an application is to be using the relay as a station monitor it is more informative to rename this input Station Monitor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt Press the decimal to enter the text editing mode The first character will appear underlined as follows SWITCH NAME General Sw A Press the VALUE keys until the character S is displayed in the first position Press the decimal key to store the character and advance the cursor to the next position Change the second character to a t in the same manner Continue entering characters in this way until all characters of the text Stn Monitor are entered Note that a space is selected like a character If a character is entered incorrectly press the decimal key repeatedly until the cursor returns to the position of the error Re enter the character as required Once complete press the ENTER key to remove the solid cursor and view the result Once a character is entered by pressing the ENTER key it is automatically saved in Flash Memory as a new setting SWITCH NAME Stn Moni
182. IP DELAY 5 0 s ATP P These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is General Switch A Similar messages appear for General Switches B C and D There are four general switch functions assignable to the four digital inputs Once a general switch function is chosen for one of the digital inputs the settings messages shown here follow the assignment message An alarm and or trip may then be configured for that input The alarm and or trip may be assigned a common name and a common block time from motor start if required if the alarm is to be disabled until some period of time after he motor has been started A value of 0 for the BLOCK TIME settings indicates that the feature is always active when the motor is stopped or running The switch may also be defined as normally open or normally closed After the block delay has expired the digital input will be monitored If the switch is not in its normal state after the specified delay an alarm or trip will occur Capture Trace PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 01 INPUT 1 FUNCTION Range See above ASSIGNABLE Capture Trace 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Setting the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION to Capture Trace allows for trace capture upon command via a switch input The captured waveforms can be displayed with the relay software There are no additional settings associated with this value
183. ITING RMS AMPS 60 Hz le 808842A1 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A 7 A 3 2 Ground Fault CTs for 5 A Secondary CT A APPENDIX For low resistance or solidly grounded systems a 5 A secondary CT should be used Two sizes are available with 5 or 13 x 16 windows Various Primary amp CTs can be chosen 50 to 250 GCT5 1000 SECONDARY VOLTAGE V BO Hz 5 00 002 01 02 08 01 02 05 10 2 5 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT 60Hz DIMENSIONS Be L4 ep R 0 56 7 70 14 195 4 0 44 x 1 0 siors 11 18 x 25 4 9 88 251 494 125 110 32 SCREWS TT oS 5 50 T 28 S8 an YI i i o qe 7 50 190 4 0 56 Dio HOLES J Inches 14 22 mm APPROX WEIGHT 50 lbs A 3 3 Phase CTs MULTUN CURRENT TURNS SEC NO RATIO RES X021 0251 2505 50 1 0 097 X021 0201 200 5 40 1 0 078 X021 0151 150 5 30 1 0 058 X021 0101 100 5 20 1 0 039 021 0076 75 5 15 1 0 029 X021 0051 50 5 10 1 0 019 OHMS 75 C This test report is in accordance with ANSI IEEE C57 13 1995 ABOVE THIS LINE THE VOLTAGE TOR EXCITING CURRENT MORE THAN 25 GCT16 MODEL CORE BALANCE P N 0121623597 1000
184. LA 10 0 6 50 x FLA 8 5 s 8 00 x FLA 5 6 s 10 0 x FLA 5 6 s 15 0 x FLA 5 6 s N o gt o a a a gt SPEED2 ISTALL H 2 gt SPEED2 SAFE STALL Range gt 6 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 5 50 x FLA 12 0 SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 TRIP AT Range SPEED2 MIN ALLOW Range CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 70 to 9596 in steps o
185. LT TRIP PICKUP 0 20 x CT INTENTIONAL GF TRIP DELAY 0 ms GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP On ASSIGN BACKUP RELAYS Auxiliary3 same relay assigned for the Short Circuit Trip Backup GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP DELAY 200 ms same time delay assigned to the Short Circuit Trip Backup For the Current Unbalance element enter the following values in the 86 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt V CURRENT UNBALANCE page Press the MESSAGE key after each settings is entered to move to the next message 1 34 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM Unlatched ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS Alarm CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM PICKUP 1096 CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM DELAY 10 s CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM EVENTS On CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIP Latched the output relay will remind energized until the Reset command executed ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIP PICKUP 2096 CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY 5 s 14 8 57 Motor Starting The S7 Motor Starting settings page contains additional settings used to complement the Thermal Model In our example these characteristics are specified under Motor Protection heading For the Acceleration Timer element enter the following values in the 7 MOTOR STARTING gt ACCELERATION TIMER page Press the MESSAGE key after each settings is completed to move to the next message ACCELERATION TIMER TRIP Latched ASSIGN TRIP
186. MENTS gt V STARTER FAILURE STARTER FAILURE Range Off Latched Unlatched ALARM Off STARTER TYPE Range Breaker Contactor MESSAGE Breaker ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp 2 amp Aux3 RELAYS Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None STARTER FAILURE Range 10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 MESSAGE DELAY 100 ms Range Disabled 52 Closed 52 MESSAGE 2 9 phe Range On Off MESSAGE STARTER FAILURE g ALARM EVENTS Off If the STARTER FAILURE ALARM is set to Latched or Unlatched then the Starter Status input and motor current are monitored when the 469 initiates a trip If the starter status contacts do not change state or motor current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay an alarm occurs The time delay should be slightly longer than 5 86 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS the breaker or contactor operating time If an alarm occurs and Breaker was chosen as the starter type the alarm will be Breaker Failure If Contactor was chosen for starter type the alarm will be Welded Contactor Also if the starter type chosen is Breaker Trip Coil Supervision may be enabled The SUPERVISION OF TRIP COIL settings is seen only if the STARTER TYPE is Breaker e f 52 Closed is selected the trip coil supervision circuitry monitors the trip coil circuit for continuity any
187. MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 2 2 Preferences PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V PREFERENCES DEFAULT MESSAGE Range 0 5 to 10 0 s in steps of 1 PREFERENCES CYCLE TIME 2 0 s Range 10 to 900 s in steps of 1 DEFAULT MESSAGE g p TIMEOUT 300 s ESSAGE gt AVERAGE MOTOR Range 1 to 90 min in steps of 1 LOAD gt DIS Range Celsius Fahrenheit ESSAGE TRACE MEMORY Range 1 to 10096 in steps of 1 TRIGGER TRACE MEMORY BUF 1 64 2x42 3x32 4x35 5x21 FERS 6x18 7x16 8x14 9X12 10x11 11 10 12x9 13x9 14x8 15x8 16x7 cycles MESSAGE DISPLAY UPDATE Range 0 1 to 6 0 s steps of 0 1 INTERVAL 0 4 s MESSAGE MOTOR LOAD FILTER Range 0 to 32 cycles 0 OFF in steps INTERVAL O of 1 Some characteristics can be modified for different situations Normally this subgroup will not require changes DEFAULT MESSAGE CYCLE TIME If multiple default messages are chosen the display automatically cycles through those messages The display time can be changed to accommodate different user preferences DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT If no keys are pressed for a period of time the relay automatically scans a programmed set of default messages This time can be user defined to ensure messages remain on the screen for a suitable time while entering settings or actual values Once default scanning starts pressing a
188. Metering Data window Click on the Phasors tab 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES The EnerVista 469 Setup software will display the following window 7 27 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 xd PARAMETER VALUE PHASORS 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data gt Press the View button to display the following window VOLTAGE LEVEL CURRENT LEVEL Displays the value Displays the value and the angle of and angle of the the voltage phasors current phasor Phasors 71 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actua Metering Data Bal xi COMPONENT MAGNITUDE ANGLE ASSIGNTO GRAPH MAP PHASOR SETS Phase Current 1 4 990k418 Phasor Set 2 Select Phasor Sets 4 390 kA 137 2 4 990 k amp 258 2 2323kV 0 2323 119 2 323 kV 240 463 Relay 1 Phasors New Gite 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data Fi 2 VOLTAGE VECTORS CURRENT VECTORS Assigned to Phasor Assigned to Phasor Set 1 Graph 1 Set 2 Graph 2 The 469 Motor Management Relay was designed to display lagging angles Therefore if a system condition would cause the current to lead the voltage by 45 the 469 relay will display such angle as 315 Lag instead of 45 Lead When the currents and voltages measured by relay are zero the angles displayed by the relay and those shown by the EnerVista 469 Set
189. NS RU E tices 5 66 settings exalnple ct 1 35 S8 RTD TEMPERATURE 5 70 settings example S9 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS tte e eet tpi eder epe etes SAFE STA CURVWVES aterert tei SAFE STALE sri er teret rer emer ede p cna e ane d eie Re OR SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP T SERIAL COMMMUNICATIONS CONTROL sse 5 20 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS see COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL NUMDBER i er RR eet eee de ONE 6 36 SERIAL PORTS e betae Bate eed e e tti debut e don e 3 24 cies 5 20 Wiring ke eke ettet e entere m eer te ir enne E ERATES 3 24 SERVICE RELAY see 6 SERVICE RELAY 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ETPOINT ACCESS flashi messages rb SEDOM oett tni t uf EET ETPOINT ACCESS SWITCH ET POINT ENTRY zer pire arte i aede ae O ETPOINT GROUPS see individual groups S1 through S12 ETPOINT MESSAGE MAP tree oe te teer E editae 5 1 ETPOINTS esL entering with EnerVista 469 setup software loading from a file 55
190. NTER actual value To initialize the counter program the counter value here and then change the 1 469 SETUP V CLEAR DATA gt V PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER Settings to Yes For example a capacitive proximity probe may be used to sense non magnetic units that are passing by on a conveyor glass bottles for instance The probe could be powered from the 24 V from the input switch power supply The NPN transistor output could be taken to one of the assignable digital inputs configured as a counter Tachometer PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 6 INPUT 1 FUNCTION See above ASSIGNABLE Y Tachometer Range 100 to 7200 RPM in steps of 1 RATED SPEED g p 3600 RPM 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 9 09 9 69 09 69 69 09 69 TACHOMETER B ll alk TACHOMETER ALARM SPEED 10 Rated TACHOMETER ALARM DELAY 1 s TACHOMETER ALARM EVENTS Off TACHOMETER TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP SPEED 105 Rated TACHOMETER TRIP DELAY 1 s Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 5 to 100 in steps o
191. NTS Off RTD 12 TRIP RTD 12 TRIP VOT ING ASSIGN TRIP RTD 12 TRIP TEMPERATURE 809 Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Stator Bearing Ambient Other None 8 alphanumeric characters Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched RTD 1 to RTD 12 Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 RTDs 12 defaults to Ambient RTD type There are individual alarm high alarm and trip configurations for this RTD Trip voting has been added for extra reliability in the event of RTD malfunction If enabled a second RTD must also exceed the trip temperature of the RTD being checked before a trip will be issued If the RTD is chosen to vote with itself the voting feature is disabled The RTD name may be changed if desired 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 9 6 Open RTD Sensor PATH SETTINGS gt V S8 RTD TEMPERATURE gt V OPEN RTD SENSOR OPEN RTD SENSOR R
192. O 10MINOO 335 i _Nouvswaanoo zv md duoj z v asvua 301915 31802 03073188 Vas YOLYLS IHS dis dl Yd 1S L di Vd 1s 2 SINANI GLY SOLON s aea aswa v moo w vi woo w i vws v woo won F ra Wa Ga posse EE so zo 90 5 mm Alddns 69 Ji 021 009 2 8 00 229 SZS 10989 lt iagram 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Typical Relay Connection D FIGURE 1 2 1 20 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED E 125V DC SOURCE 2 Lz t lt lt 2 a9 ss SPARE a 54 53 RELAY 5 4 DIAGRAM E S 5 56 55 S lt lt 29 gt gt
193. OMPENSATION M COMMON 500 Ohms RTD 2 5 HOT 500 Ohms 46 HOT RTD 3 7 COMPENSATION e serum 1 TRIP A9 COMPENSATION 500 Ohms amp A10 HOT RTD n 500 Ohms fJ HoT RTD 5 2 AUXILIARY C A12 COMPENSATION 7 13 RETURN SIMULATION 500 Ohms i COMPENSATION 6 3 AUXILIARY RESISTORS 15 HOT OR RESISTANCE 500 FT leaner RD 7 aM 03 RTD RETURN 04 COMPENSATION 500 Ohms 1 Fos 8 5 BLOCK START 500 9 RETURN 6 SERVICE m 500 COMPENSATION 10 500 HOT COMPENSATION RTD 11 RETURN COMPENSATION 41 12 Multilin 016 STARTER STATUS 46 9 o D17 EMERGENCY RESTART vis RESET MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY 019 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 L 020 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 2 8 021 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 3 gt P 022 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 4 023 COMMON 5 024 5 24 COMPUTER ANALOG 1 0 r eve c COMMUNICATION ond ACCESS RS485 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG INPUTS cou cou 1 2 3 4 Vac 1 2 3 4 o o TEST 025 D26 D27 82 BS B4 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 21 22 23 A24 25 A26 A27 L ED 9 806830AA DWG FIGURE 7 1 Secondary Injection Test Setup 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL
194. ONNECTION TO 5 469 cH gt 17 TO STARTER TWISTED PAIR GROUND BUS POWER CABLE TO MOTOR icr eee BOTTOM OF 3068134 DWC MOTOR STARTER COMPARTMENT FIGURE 3 16 Core Balance Ground CT Installation Shielded Cable 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 15 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Differential Current Inputs The 469 has three channels for differential current inputs each with an isolating transformer There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs Each differential CT circuit is shorted by automatic mechanisms on the 469 case if the unit is withdrawn The maximum differential CT primary current is 5000 A The 469 measures up to 5 A secondary current for the differential CT inputs Since the conversion range is relatively small the 1 A or 5 A option is field programmable Proper selection of this settings ensures proper reading of primary phase differential current The 1 5 differential CT chosen must be capable of driving the 469 differential CT burden see Specifications on page 2 6 for ratings The differential CTs may be core balance as shown in the first figure below Alternatively the summation of two CTs per phase into the differential input will provide a larger zone of protection If the summation of two CTs is used observation of CT polarity is important The summation method may also be implemented using the phase CTs as shown below They will have to have
195. OOL TIME CONSTANTS erre ERE EOD DRE EET SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS CURRENT TRANSPORMERS Un ei us GROUND FAULT CTS FOR 50 0 025 A 6 GROUND FAULT CTS FOR 5 A SECONDARY A 8 PHASECITS EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CHANGE NOTES REVISION HISTORY scsssssessssssssesecssessssecsssscsssseessesessssssssecssssessssesssesessessssectsasesssnsersceessecsssess CHANGES TO THE 469 MANUAL MULTILIN WARRANTY WARRANTY STATEMENT ie b 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Chapter 1 Getting Started 11 Important Procedures 111 Cautions and Warnings Please read this chapter to guide you through the initial setup of your new relay Before attempting to install or use the relay it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help WARNING CAUTION Prevent personal injury equipment damage and or downtime 1 1 2 Inspection Checklist e Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage e View t
196. OTE After successfully updating the 469 firmware the relay will not be in service and will require settings programming To communicate with the relay the following settings will have to me manually programmed MODBUS COMMUNICATION ADDRESS BAUD RATE PARITY if applicable When communications is established the saved settings must be reloaded back into the relay See Loading Settings from a File on page 4 33 for details Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules features settings and corresponding data items i e default values min max values data type and item size may change slightly from version to version of firmware Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading downgrading the firmware is a resettable self test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 37 CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES 4 6 Advanced EnerVista 469 Setup Features 4 6 1 Triggered Events While the interface is in either on line or off line mode data generated by triggered specified parameters can be viewed and analyzed via one of the following Event Recorder The event recorder captures contextual data associ
197. Port 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 11 CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES Computer F485 Connections GE Multilin F485 Converter RS232 Connector to Computer COM Port Typically COM1 or COM2 Rear RS485 Connections FIGURE 4 3 Communications using Rear RS485 Port 808839A1 CDR FIGURE 4 4 Communications using Rear Ethernet Port 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 4 2 5 Installing the EnerVista 469 Setup Software The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista 469 Setup software to operate on your computer e Pentium class or higher processor Pentium 400 MHz or better recommended e Microsoft Windows 95 98 98SE NT 4 0 SP4 or higher 2000 XP e 128 MB of RAM 256 MB recommended e Minimum of 200 MB hard disk space After ensuring these minimum requirements use the following procedure to install the EnerVista 469 Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD gt Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD ROM drive gt Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no charge EnerVista software on the local PC gt When installation is complete start the EnerVista Launchpad application gt Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window LAUNCH PAD gt In the EnerVista Launch Pad window click the Add Product button and select the 469 Motor Management Rela
198. RUCTION MANUAL 1 57 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 15 Installation 1 5 1 Testing Extensive commissioning tests are available in Chapter 7 Tables for recording required settings are available in Microsoft Excel format from the GE Multilin website at http www GEmultilin com The website also contains additional technical papers and FAQs relevant to the 469 Motor Management Relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Chapter 2 Introduction 2 1 Overview 2 1 1 Description The 469 Motor Management Relay is a microprocessor based relay designed for the protection and management of medium and large horsepower motors and driven equipment The 469 is equipped with six 6 output relays for trips alarms and start blocks Motor protection fault diagnostics power metering and RTU functions are integrated into one economical drawout package The single line diagram below illustrates the 469 functionality using ANSI American National Standards Institute device numbers 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 1 2 0 CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION S E NE N BUS Vaan LEH 47 81 R2 L idi AUXILIARY 2 METERING R3 zs VAM Var AUXILIARY T J ALARM 1 R5 i BLOCK START 86 R6 L SERVICE AMBIENT AIR STATOR RTDs M 46
199. RUCTION MANUAL 4 27 Motor Settings Auto Configurator Continue filling in the fields as indicated Once you have completed all 6 Steps the final window will show as follows Motor Settings Auto Config ngs 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTIO CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES 7 gt Click Finish to complete the Auto Config procedure The Motor Settings Auto Config window will disappear A new Settings File containing the parameters you have just input will appear in the Files pane as shown Files Untitled 469 C Program Files GE Power Management 469PC Device Definition 469 Setup System Setup Digital Inputs Output Relays Protection Monitoring Analog 1 0 469 Testing Two Speed Motor Modbus User Map est 469 C Program Files GE Power Management 469PC Device Definition 463 Setup System Setup Digital Inputs Output Relays Protection Monitoring Analog 1 0 463 Testing Two Speed Motor Modbus User Creating a New Settings File without using Motor Settings Auto Config The EnerVista 469 Setup software allows the user to create new Settings files independent of a connected device These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date The following procedure as distinct from the Motor Settings Auto Config option described above illustrate
200. Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 5 50 x FLA 12 0 gt SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE gt 6 00 x FLA 10 0 lt gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 6 50 x FLA 8 5 s gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 gt 7 00 x FLA 7 3 s ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG rm 5 104 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 7 50 x FLA 6 3 gt SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 8 00 x FLA 5 6 s gt SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 10 0 x FLA 5 6 s ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE gt 15 0 x FLA 5 6 s SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE N o gt Refer to Custom Overload Curve on page 5 43 for details on the custom overload curves available for Speed2 e Voltage Dependent Overload Curves the SELECT CURVE STYLE is set to Voltage Dependent in the Thermal Model the following settings will appear PATH SETTINGS S14 2 SPEED MOTOR gt SPEED2 OVERLOAD SETUP SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 T T Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1
201. SECONDARY VOLTAGE 50 Hz 00 002 005 41 42 05 01 02 05 10 SECONDARY EXCITING RMS AMPS 50 Hz le DIMENSIONS FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 22 20 564 INCHES 564 20 70 9 60 52 4 mm 18 20 526 244 462 13 20 2 50 535 63 5 1 20 38 18 20 462 16 20 411 0 42 Dio HOLES Current transformers in most common ratios from 50 5 to 1000 5 are available for use as phase current inputs with motor protection relays These come with mounting hardware and are also available with 1 A secondaries Voltage class 600 V BIL 10 kV 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX SECONDARY VOLTAGE 60 Hz CURVE 01 02 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 0 2 10 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT 60Hz 5 20 505 gt 8 10 5 E 4 amp 5 2 o 8 1 01 02 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 0 2 10 SECONDARY EXCITING 808712A1 CDR CURRENT BOHz CURRENT TRANSFORMER SPECIFICATIONS CURRENT RATIO WINDOW SIZE CT CLASS MULTILIN No Dims 50 5 245 10 911 0010 75 5 2 25 C10 911 0011 100 5 5 00 911 0012 150 5 3 00 X911 0013 B 200 5 3 00 C20 911 0014 250 5 3 00
202. SPARE gt S N e 8 8 lt lt 58 57 gt gt SPARE gt e a 4 3 a 4 lt lt 52 y 8 gt gt SPARE Y cH g 3A gt S S ATA i 612 1 SPARE x g 29 eus SPARE 2 91 515 E 7 ibus SPARE 98 9 5 E SPARE 610 Gi SPARE YN 2 gt 10000 9 6112 6111 su ins SPARE 14 13 DOR 10000 Q SPARE en 5117 S115 seam us SPARE 5118 EL 9 fa ji 9 A9 5 5 7 ATA THIS SCH T m 86 ag a SPARE Mo N99 H3 gg hay SPARE 4 4 P ion SPARE qup SPARE pig aay SPARE eter n pin H14 H13 SPARE od SPARE 58469 say SPARE ag HIE 45 25 8 Y 2 52b od 2 CONTACT ae MEN 1 cw 25 go a gt REMOTE ti i d Em 83 5 Sc ERN a Pe ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 tf 82 29 Le T8 52 4 53 a p COMMON 3 a S 75 ET lt E x 242 e E 15 AFG2 o ASG2 o S x 24 3 5 S 806552A2 CDR FIGURE 1 3 Typical Control Diagram 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1521 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED SPARE 469 RELAY CONTROL DIAGRAM
203. STALLATION 3 2 Electrical Installation 3 2 1 Typical Wiring GE 469 Motor Management Relay OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER 14 29 t 2 3 4 ee 806751AT 0WG FIGURE 3 12 Typical Wiring Diagram 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 11 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 2 2 Description A broad range of 469 applications are available Although it is not possible to present typical connections for all possible schemes this section will cover the interconnections of instrument transformer inputs other inputs outputs communications and grounding See FIGURE 3 11 Terminal Layout on page 3 9 and Table 3 1 469 Terminal List on page 3 9 for terminal arrangement 3 2 5 Control Power CAUTION WARNING The order code from the terminal label on the side of the drawout unit specifies the nominal control voltage as follows LO 20 to 60 V DC 20 to 48 V AC or HI 90 to 300 V DC 70 to 265 V AC Ensure applied control voltage and rated voltage on drawout case terminal label match For example the HI power supply will work with any DC voltage from 90 to 300 V or AC voltage from 70 to 265 V The internal fuse may blow if the applied voltage exceeds this range The 469 control power must match the installed switching power supply If the applied voltage does not match damag
204. T RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 29 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 5 A4 Maintenance 6 5 1 Trip Counters PATH ACTUAL VALUES V A4 MAINTENANCE gt TRIP COUNTERS Range 0 to 50000 TRIP TOTAL NUMBER OF 21 TRIPS 0 COUNTERS gt INCOMPLETE Range 0 to 50000 Caused by the gt SEQUENCE Reduced Voltage Start feature gt INPUT SWITCH Range 0 to 50000 Caused by Remote gt gt 5 0 Speed Load Shed Pressure Vibration or General Purpose Switch Trip features gt Range 0 to 50000 Caused by Digital Input set as Tachometer gt TRIPS 0 ESSAGE gt OVERLOAD Range 0 to 50000 0 essage lt SHORT CIRCUIT Range 0 to 50000 gt TRIPS 0 ESSAGE MECHANICAL JAM Range 0 to 50000 TRIPS 0 ESSAGE UNDERCURRENT Range 0 to 50000 TRIPS 0 lt CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 0 to 50000 77 TRIPS 0 ESSAGE gt GROUND FAULT Range 0 to 50000 7777 TRIPS 0 ESSAGE gt DIFFEREN Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE gt Range 0 to 50000 TIMER RTD Range 0 to 50000 TRIPS 0 BEARING RTD Range 0 to 50000 TRIPS 0 OTHER Range 0 to 50000 5 0 ESSAGE lt gt Range 0 to 50000 lt gt 0
205. T Range INSERTED PROPERLY 469 NOT IN SER Range VICE H HI ANALOG 1 2 Range ALARM 50 ANALOG 3 4 Range ALARM 50 Any active alarms may be viewed here Range 50000 to 50000 kvar 50000 to 50000 kw 1 to 10000 Trips Trip Coil Super Welded Contactor Breaker Failure 1to 10000A 50000 to 50000 kW 50000 to 50000 kvar 0 to 50000 kVA 50000 to 50000 Trip Still Present Block Still Present No Trips amp No Blocks N A Not Programmed Output Relays Forced Analog Output Forced Test Switch Shorted 1 to 250 C 0 to 999 Diff or 0 to 99999 Abs Diff 0 to 999 Diff or 0 to 99999 Abs Diff 0 00 to 999999 9 Nm The various alarm and alarm status actual values reflect the Alarm Name as programmed in the first line of the message The status is Active if the condition that caused the alarm is still present If the 469 chassis is only partially engaged with the case the ALARM 469 NOT INSERTED PROPERLY service alarm appears after 1 second Secure the chassis handle to ensure that all contacts mate properly 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 2 5 Start Blocks PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V START BLOCKS ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE Range NO START BLOCKS ACTIVE gt OVERLOAD LOCKOUT Note BLOCK 25 min gt START
206. TED in steps of 0 01 Enter 1 00 to turn this function off 0 0 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched 1 Phase 3 Phase Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 0 60 to 0 99 x RATED in steps of 0 01 0 60 to 1 00 x RATED in steps of 0 01 Enter 1 00 to turn this function off 0 0 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 The U V ACTIVE ONLY IF BUS ENERGIZED settings may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when the bus is not energized If this settings is programmed to Yes at least one voltage must be greater than 20 of the nominal nameplate voltage rating for any alarm trip If the load is high inertia it may be desirable to trip the motor off line or prevent it from starting in the event of a total loss of line voltage Programming No for this settings ensures that the motor is tripped and may be restarted only after the bus is re energized 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS If the undervoltage alarm feature is enabled an alarm will occur once the magnitude of either Vab Vbc or Vca falls below the pickup level while running or starting for a period of time specified by the delay note that pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage The running pickup level also applies when the motor is stopped and the u v ACTIVE ONLY IF BUS ENERGIZED Settings is programmed to No Undervoltage trips can be
207. TRUCTION MANUAL Motor Operating Curves Motor operating curves as shown below TIME CURRENT AND THERMAL L 090 waa a _ CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Westinghouse Motor Company Canada Ltd IMIT CURVES 0 150 300 450 600 750 900 CURRENT thermal limit cold Cl time current 100 V B thermal limit hot C2 time current 90 V FIGURE 1 7 Motor Operating Curves for Application Example Control System Requirements All protection elements trip the breaker Breaker position monitoring via 52b contact only Only current metering is required Serial communication remote start from RTU Alarm after 100 s delay from station monitor This is normally used to signal the remote center when someone has gained access to the substation Contact Outputs Trip and close to breaker control circuit Trip and Auxiliary2 relays Relay failure alarm to RTU self test warning relay no programming required Alarm contact setup in General Sw A for Station Monitor No data communications to other equipment 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED RTDs The motor is fitted with the following RTDs RTD type 100 Q Platinum 6 Stator RTDs 2 per phase 2 Bearing RTDs 1 Ambient RTD Use the above data to set the output relays to achieve breaker
208. UD Cen UA AD UE MEM ML TESTING CERTIFICATION a tiim asco d m ec tess rug ied e aA PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENTAL LONG TERM STORAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC I TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3 1 DESCRIPTION niter PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION UNIT WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION 3 5 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5 ecdesiae debe rit rt DEVICENET CONNECTION arrie ci ceteri ots ct erede ge e TERMINAL EOCATIONS cri reete e t b cei TERMINAL LIST ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TYPICAL WIRING DESCRIPTION cases t erattu e teet P ae CONTROL POWER CORRENT INPUTS stas iain MOL TAGES BUMS em etra DIGITAL INPUTS ANALOG INPUTS ANALOG OUTPUTS RTD SENSOR CONNECTIONS OUTPUT RELAYS ose n i f tt tit etd ite eee diete DRAWOUT INDICATOR seeeeeetettnttnnttn ttn ttti ttes ttt ts 65485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS t
209. V DEFAULT MESSAGES subgroup Use the following procedure to remove default messages 1 Enter the correct passcode for the 1 469 SETUP gt PASSCODE gt ENTER PASSCODE FOR ACCESS settings unless the passcode has already been entered or unless the passcode 15 0 defeating the passcode security feature Select the message to remove under the 51 469 SETUP gt V DEFAULT MESSAGES sub group When the default message to be removed is shown press ENTER The relay dis plays the PRESS ENTER TO REMOVE DEFAULT MESSAGE message Press ENTER to remove the current message from the default message list If the procedure was followed correctly the following flash message will be dis played DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN REMOVED 5 2 6 Message Scratchpad PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V MESSAGE SCRACTHPAD TEXT 1 Range 40 alphanumeric characters Range 40 alphanumeric characters ESSAGE TEXT 2 Range 40 alphanumeric characters ESSAGE lt A Range 40 alphanumeric characters ESSAGE 4 n MULTILIN Range 40 alphanumeric characters ESSAGE gt 469 MOTOR RELAY 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Up to five 5 message screens can be programmed under the message scratchpad area These messages may be notes that pertain to the installation or the motor or any other information deemed pertinent by the user In addition these messages may be selected for sca
210. V VOLTAGE METERING page the 469 displays only phase to phase voltages The relationship between the displayed and measured quantities is as follows Vab VA Vc V4 as calculated In the ACTUAL VALUES gt V PHASORS the relay displays the relationship between measured quantities Refer to the figure below for wiring connections e The measured voltage phasor between terminals G2 and G1 is displayed by the relay as Va Phasor and Vab by the EnerVista 469 Setup software In this case Va Phasor is equal to the system quantity Vab e The voltage measured between terminals H1 and G1 Vcom is displayed by the relay as Vc Phasor and Vcb by the EnerVista 469 Setup software In this case Vc Phasor is equal to the system quantity Vcb or Vbc e The voltage between H2 Vg and G1 Vcom is zero Hence the relay displays vector with no magnitude 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 19 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Ve sosseo icon FIGURE 6 5 Open Delta VT Connection The following phasor diagram presents in graphic form the relationship between system quantities and how they are measured calculated and displayed Note that all angles shown are negative or lagging angles Phase Rotation 7 Voltages Vbc Measured Voltages Vab VA G2 61 Vbc VC H2 G
211. VIGATION PANEL KEYING EXAMPLE m CHANGING i INTRODUCTION m THEITEBPISE NUMERICAL SEIN GS ENUMERATION SETTINGS OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS i cd crt NEANG 1 15 itin entente ertet i er ane 1 15 APPLE CATION EX NIPI B 1 17 DESCRIPTION R E INSTRUMENT MOTOR PROTECT S2 SYSTEM SETTI S5 DIGITAL INPUTS SETTINGS i ierit ici rere hi bre rte es 1 32 55 THERMAL MODEL seriei eR er a RE Ec ENS 1 33 56 CURRENT ELEMENTS 1 33 S7 MOTOR STARTING 1 35 58 RTD TEMPERATURE t scii ee t bett maid et NR UE 1 35 OTHER SETTINGS m INSTALLA EION quz neum DM 2 INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION ORDERING INFORMATION ORDER CODES EXAMPLE ORDER CODES ACCESSORIES p er ERR rc Doc SPECIFICATIONS INPUTS citt OUTPUTS PROTECTION tete E e o EE ERE ERE E URP DIGITAL INPUTS MONITORI POUWERISUPPI onere tua e
212. accommodate this This settings allows the 469 to properly calculate phase reversal negative sequence and power quantities The SPEED2 PHASE SEQUENCE can be programmed to accommodate the reversed motor rotation at Speed and is seen only if two speed motor protection is enabled 5 3 4 Communications Control PATH SETTINGS gt V S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V SERIAL COMM CONTROL SERIAL SERIAL COMMUNICA Range On Off COMM gt 9 TION ASSIGN START Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 MESSAGE TROL Auxiliary3 If enabled motor starting and stopping is possible via any of the three 469 communication ports Refer to GE publication GEK 106491 469 Communications Guide for command formats When a stop command is issued the 1 TRIP relay is activated for 1 second to complete the trip coil circuit for a breaker application or break the contact coil circuit for a contactor application When a start command is issued the auxiliary relay assigned for starting control is activated for 1 second to complete the close coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the start control circuit for a contactor application A contactor sealing contact would be used to maintain the circuit For details on issuing a start or stop command via communications refer to GE publication GEK 106491 469 Communications Guide 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 3 5 Reduced Voltage PATH SETTINGS S2 SYSTEM
213. age to the 469 during these tests Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used between control power trip coil supervision and the filter ground terminal G11 This is intended to filter out high voltage ransients radio frequency interference RFI and electromagnetic interference The filter capacitors and transient suppressors may be damaged by continuous high voltage Disconnect the filter ground terminal G11 during testing of control power and trip coil supervision The CT inputs VT inputs and output relays do not require any special precautions Low voltage inputs less than 30 V RTDs analog inputs analog outputs digital inputs and RS485 communication ports are not to be tested for dielectric strength under any circumstance see below 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 25 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 61 66 c7 7 co na 65 HS 5 1 5 1 5 1 1 1 5 5 PHASE Phase Phase crouno prase PHASE PHASE VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS DRAWOUT E12 INDICATOR S 2
214. ange 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of O 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of O 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA A rs Ww Ww Ww Ww H amp ls amp las 2z8 s8 amp lss8 a8 8 5 5 x x x x x x x x x 8 j 5 w w ds w 9 E e w 59 o Oo Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s steps of 0 1 4 50 x FLA 18 2 ESSAGE 9 09 9 09 00 09 09 69 09 69 09 00 69 09 09 07 69 09 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 43 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 4 75 x FLA 16 2 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 5 00 x FLA 14 6 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 5 50 x FLA 12 0 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 6 00 x FLA 10 0 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 6 50 x FLA 8 5 s ESSAGE Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s
215. ange Off Latched Unlatched Es x i Ped ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None OPEN SENSOR Range On Off ALARM EVENTS Off The 469 has an Open RTD Sensor alarm This alarm will look at all RTDs that have either an alarm or trip programmed and determine if an RTD connection has been broken Any RTDs that do not have a trip or alarm associated with them will be ignored for this feature When a broken sensor is detected the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that is broken It is recommended that if this feature is used the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken 5 9 7 RTD Short Low Temp PATH SETTINGS gt V S8 RTD TEMPERATURE gt V RTD SHORT LOW TEMP RTD SHORT Range Off Latched Unlatched i d i TEMP ES Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE ASSIGN ALARM 9 y gt RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None Range On Off MESSAGE The 469 has Short Low Temperature alarm This alarm will look at all RTDs that have either an alarm or trip programmed and determine if an has either a short or a very low temperature less than 50 C Any RTDs th
216. ange Off Latched Unlatched FREQUENCY 6 ALARM Off gt ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE lt RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None gt FREQUENCY Range 25 01 to 70 00 Hz steps of 4 gt ALARM LEVEL 0 01 UNDER FREQUENCY Range 20 00 to 60 00 Hz in steps of ALARM LEVEL 0 01 FREQUENCY Range 0 0 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 ALARM DELAY 1 0 Range On Off FREQUENCY g ALARM EVENTS Off gt FREQUENCY Range Off Latched Unlatched A gt TRIP Off gt ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 gt RELAYS gt OVER FREQUENCY Range 25 01 to 70 00 Hz steps of 4 gt TRIP LEVEL 60 50 0 01 gt UNDER FREQUENCY Range 20 00 to 60 00 Hz in steps of TRIP LEVEL 59 50 0 01 FREQUENCY Range 0 0 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE TRIP DELAY 1 0 s Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage depending on wye or delta connection is out of range of the overfrequency and underfrequency settings a trip or alarm will occur This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors It could also be used to load shed an entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 79 CHAPTER 5
217. ansition level 25 to 30096 FLA in steps of 1 Transition 1 to 600 steps of 1 Transition control Current Timer Current and Timer RESTART BLOCK Time 1 to 50000 in steps of 1 asset 0 5 s 0 5 of total time te een Block RTD Pickup dese is 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 Pickup hysteresis 2 Timme deldy tete 45 Elenie nts Trip and Alarm UNDERCURRENT PICKUP uc ois 0 10 to 0 95 x CT primary in steps of 0 01 of any one phase Time dely ares depot 1 to 60 5 steps of 1 Block from start 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1 Pickup accuracy as per phase current inputs Tirnirig declif acy assa tees 0 5 s or 0 596 of total time Elerients eae Trip and Alarm UNDERVOLTAGE Pickup Level Motor starting 0 60 to 0 99 x Rated in steps of 0 01 Motor running 0 60 to 0 99 x Rated in steps of 0 01 of any one phase Tite delay atat etae 0 1 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 Pickup accuracy as per voltage inputs TIMING deeufacys 100 ms or 0 596 of total time eerte treats Trip and Alarm 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL ConfiguEQtlon ABC or ACB phase rotation Timing Accuracy ses 500 to 700 ms Elements
218. antaneous trip is required SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP BACKUP On if the main disconnect device does not respond to the trip command a second signal will be initiated via an auxiliary relay to generate a bus shot down in most cases the second trip command energizes a lock out relay 86 which is used to trip the upstream breakers ASSIGN BACKUP RELAYS Auxiliary SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP BACKUP DELAY 200 ms this time must be greater than the total time required to trip the main breaker plus a margin Since the specifications do not indicate values for the following features they must be left Off OVERLOAD ALARM Off MECHANICAL JAM Off UNDERCURRENT Off PHASE DIFFERENTIAL Off For the Ground Fault element enter the following values in the 86 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt V GROUND FAULT page Press the MESSAGE key after each settings is entered to move to the next message GROUND FAULT OVERREACH FILETER Off no filtering of DC component is required refer to Ground Fault on page 5 63 for additional information GROUND FAULT ALARM Off default setting no Alarm is required ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS Alarm default setting GROUND FAULT ALARM PICKUP 0 10 x CT default setting INTENTIONAL GF ALARM DELAY 0 ms default setting GROUND FAULT ALARM EVENTS Off default setting GROUND FAULT TRIP Latched the output relay will remind energized until the Reset command executed ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip GROUND FAU
219. ar in sequence as follows SETTINGS gt ACTUAL VALUES gt MESSAGES gt Pressing the MESSAGE gt key or the ENTER key from these main menu pages will display the corresponding menu page Use the MESSAGE and MESSAGE A keys to scroll through the page headers When the display shows SETTINGS pressing the MESSAGE key or the ENTER key will display the page headers of programmable parameters referred to as settings in the manual When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES pressing the MESSAGE gt key or the ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters referred to as actual values in the manual When the display shows TARGET MESSAGES pressing the MESSAGE P key or the ENTER key displays the page headers of event messages or alarm conditions Each page is broken down further into logical sub pages The MESSAGE W and MESSAGE A keys are used to navigate through the sub pages A summary of the settings and actual values can be found in the chapters 5 and 6 respectively The ENTER key is dual purpose It is used to enter the sub pages and to store altered settings values into memory to complete the change The MESSAGE key can also be used to enter sub pages but not to store altered settings The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose It is used to exit the sub pages and to cancel a settings change The MESSAGE key can also be used to exit sub pages and to cancel settings changes The VALUE keys a
220. are available Using the data sheets the safe stall time H C or hot cold curve ratio is given as 16 18 0 89 e Enable Biasing This will enable the temperature from the Stator RTD sensors to be included in the calculations of thermal capacity This model determines the thermal capacity used based on the temperature of the Stator and is separate from the overload model for calculating thermal capacity used 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 29 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED RTD biasing is a back up protection element which accounts for such things as loss of cooling or unusually high ambient temperature This measured temperature is used to bias or modify the thermal capacity value stored in the relay RTD BIAS MINIMUM Set to 40 C which is the ambient temperature obtained from the data sheets RTD BIAS MID POINT The center point temperature is set to the motor s hot running temperature and is calculated as follows Temperature Rise of Stator Ambient Temperature The temperature rise of the stator is 80 class F rise by resistance 1096 hot spot allowance obtained from the data sheets Therefore the RTD Center point temperature is set to 90 40 or 130 RTD BIAS MAXIMUM This settings is set to the rating of the insulation or slightly less A class F insulation is used in this motor which is rated at 155 C so the setting should be 155 THERMAL CPACITY USED 100 794
221. arm Overload Alarm Overtorque Alarm Overvoltage Alarm Power Factor Alarm Pressure Sw Alarm Reactive Power Alarm Remote Alarm Reverse Power Alarm RTD 1 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm 9 Alarm RTO 10 Alarm RTO 11 Alarm RTD 12 Alarm RTD 1 High Alarm RTD 2 High Alarm RTD 3 High Alarm RTD 4 High Alarm RTD 5 High Alarm RTD 6 High Alarm RTD 7 High Alarm RTD 8 High Alarm RTD 9 High Alarm RTD 10 High Alarm RTD 11 High Alarm RTD 12 High Alarm Service Alarm Short Low RTD Alarm Starter Failed Alarm Tachometer Alarm Thermal Model Alarm Trip Coil Super Trip Counter Alarm Undercurrent Alarm Underpower Alarm Undervoltage Alarm Vibration Sw Alarm Volt Frequency Alarm Welded Contactor OTHER 1 TRIP Relay Forced 2 AUX Relay Forced 3 AUX Relay Forced 4 ALARM Relay Forced 469 Not Inserted 5 BLOCK Relay Forced Control Power Applied Control Power Lost Digital Trace Trigger Emergency Rst Close Emergency Rst Open Force 1 TRIP Disabled Force 2 AUX Disabled Force 3 AUX Disabled Force 4 ALARM Disabled Force 5 BLOCK Disabled Forced Relay Motor Started No Event Trip to Date Relay Not Inserted Serial Trace Trigger Service Alarm Simulation Started Simulation Stopped Start Whi
222. as pit E A4 MAINTENANCE eiie reete eret rte dett eerte eee ries A5 EVENT RECORDER us PRODUCT INFO siint tei hnc e detecte ete tire stade ACCELERATION TIMER SCLDOINNS ac setpoints for 2 speed motor specifications trip COUnLer acsi intern ACCESS SWITGCHFIL cites P ACCESSORIES eeu a eeu ACTUAL VALUES 6 5 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTERI A METEREDSDATA cete UD TE 6 11 LEARNED DATA xor rere ertet anie ta FE ee Hiro o RS 6 27 A4 MAINTENANCE Ab EVENTARECORDER reor er tbe tree et nd e Pd eg 6 33 PRODUCTINFO itii dovere pecia eec rere E Mun e 6 36 LARM RELAY see 4 ALARM RELAY CARM STATUS aede bee ae ae eee ite d ic RR En e gt MBIEN TR inseriert te teet tres MBIENT RTD NALOG TESTING NALOG IN DIFF T 2i iste i tree m mhi eet n dert ae n NALOG IN DUFF 3 4 NALOG IN 6 29 NALOG INPUTS analog in diff 1 4 analog in diff 3 4 analog in min max analog input minimums maximums sse 5 24 clearing analog input data CES CHIP TON cxi rco difference setpoints sese entes MAXIMUS minimums 5
223. at do not have a trip or alarm associated with them will be ignored for this feature When a short low temperature is detected the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that caused the alarm It is recommended that if this feature is used the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 75 5 10 59 Voltage Elements 5 10 1 Undervoltage PATH SETTINGS S9 VOLTAGE ELEM gt UNDERVOLTAGE 6 U V ACTIVE ONLY Range UNDERVOLTAGE IF Range MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 89 6 9 69 09 69 09 69 69 69 09 02 UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM Off UNDERVOLTAGE STARTING U V UNDERVOLTAGE Range UNDERVOLTAGE Range UNDERVOLTAGE Range F UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP Range 1 Phase ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS b El UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP PICKUP 0 80 x STARTING U V TRIP PICKUP 0 80 x UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP Range DELAY 3 0 s Range Range Range Range Range Range CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS No Yes Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 0 60 to 0 99 x RATED in steps of 0 01 0 60 to 1 00 x RA
224. ate a wide range of motor management applications This chapter is provided to guide you the first time user through a real world application The following is typical example of how to determine the relay settings for a specific motor that has been applied conservatively This is only an example and may not address all issues relating to your specific application It is recommended that your local protection engineer determine the settings for your motor protective relaying application Refer to following figures for schematic diagrams related to this example Important points to keep in mind before developing settings for any multifunction numerical device like the 469 Motor Management Relay e Gather system data including but not limited to CT primary and secondary ratings for all the CTs used to feed the relay motor name plate data motor operating curves typical set shown below 1000 000 100 000 Time sec 10 000 1 000 0 500 1 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 Current Amps 806553A1 CDR FIGURE 1 1 Typical Motor Curves 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 27 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED VT primary and secondary ratings System frequency System phase sequence Define the protection elements that will be enabled Prepare a list of protection functions including the following information By default all the protection functions must be assumed Disabled Pickup parameter Operating curve
225. ated with the last 256 events listed in chronological order from most recent to the oldest Oscillography The oscillography waveform traces provide a visual display of power system data captured during specific triggered events 4 6 2 Waveform Capture Trace Memory The EnerVista 469 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms or view trace memory from the 469 relay at the instance of a trip maximum of 128 cycles can be captured and the trigger point can be adjusted to anywhere within the set cycles A maximum of 16 traces can be buffered stored with the buffer cycle trade off The following waveforms can be captured Phase A B and C currents la Ip and I Differential A B and C currents and Ground currents 0 Phase A N B N and C N voltages Vpn and Ven wye connections Phase and B C and for open delta connections Relay output status With EnerVista 469 Setup running and communications established Select the Actual gt Waveform Capture menu item to open the waveform capture setup window 8 Waveform Capture Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Actual lue Launch Viewer Total Triggers Trigger waveform to Select Trigger 1 z Select which trigger you would like to read values then click the Launch Viewer button view the waveform 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Numb
226. ating that the 469 is not in protection mode 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 101 5 14 6 Comm Port Monitor CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS PATH SETTINGS gt V S13 469 TESTING gt V COMMUNICATION PORT MONITOR 6 MONITOR COMM COMMUNICATION PORT MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 0 6 9 69 69 00 CLEAR COMM BUFFERS No LAST Rx BUFFER Received OK 02 03 00 67 00 Tx1 02 03 06 00 64 Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Computer 65485 Auxiliary RS485 Front Panel RS232 No Yes Buffer Cleared Received OK Wrong Slave Adar Illegal Function Illegal Count Illegal Reg Addr CRC Error Illegal Data received data in HEX received data in HEX transmitted data in HEX transmitted data in HEX During the course of troubleshooting communications problems it can be very useful to see the data that is first being transmitted to the 469 from some master device and then see the data that the 469 transmits back to that master device The messages shown here should make it possible to view that data Any of the three communications ports may be monitored After the communication buffers have been cleared any data received from the communications port being monitored will be stored in the Rx1 and Rx2 buffers with acting as a character break between messages If the 469 transmits a message it will appear in the 1 and Tx2 b
227. atures Fault diagnostics are provided through pretrip data event record trace memory and statistics Prior to issuing a trip the 469 takes a snapshot of the measured parameters and stores them with the cause of the trip This pre trip data may be viewed using the MENU key viewing the TARGET MESSAGES before the trip is reset or by accessing the 1 STATUS LAST TRIP DATA actual values The 469 event recorder stores up to 256 time and date stamped events including the pre trip data Each time a trip occurs the 469 stores a trace of 8 cycles pre trip and 8 cycles post trip for all measured AC quantities Trip counters record the number of occurrences of each type of trip Minimum and maximum values for analog inputs along with maximum values for RTDs are also recorded These features enable the operator to pinpoint a problem quickly and with certainty Power metering included with the 469 as a standard feature The table below outlines the metered parameters available either through the front panel or communications ports 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 3 CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION The 469 is equipped with 3 fully functional and independent communications ports The front panel RS232 port may be used for 469 settings programming local interrogation or control and upgrading of 469 firmware The Computer RS485 port may be connected to a PLC DCS or PC based user interface program The Auxiliary 85485 port may be used for
228. ause of last trip message is updated with the current trip and the 469 display defaults to that message All trip features are automatically logged and date and time stamped as they occur In addition all trips are counted and logged as statistics such that any long term trends may be identified ALARMS A 469 alarm feature may be assigned to operate any combination of three output relays 4 ALARM 3 AUXILIARY and 2 AUXILIARY Also an alarm may be assigned to NONE When set to NONE an alarm may record an event without operating one of the alarm or auxiliary relays When an Alarm becomes active the appropriate LED indicator on the 469 faceplate will illuminate when an output relay s has operated Each alarm feature may be programmed as latched or unlatched Once a latched alarm feature becomes active the reset key must be pressed to reset that alarm If the 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS condition that has caused the alarm 15 still present e g hot RTD the Alarm 5 will not reset until the condition is no longer present If on the other hand an unlatched alarm feature becomes active that alarm will reset itself and associated output relay s as soon as the condition that caused the alarm ceases As soon as an alarm occurs the alarms messages are updated to reflect the alarm and the 469 display defaults to that message Since it may not be desirable to log all alarms as events each
229. aximum 8 ring lug 10 AWG wire std 40 C to 60 40 C to 80 up to 9096 non condensing up to 2000 m jdn 2 At temperatures less than 20 C the LCD contrast may be impaired zu In addition to the above environmental considerations the relay should be stored in an environment that is dry corrosive free and not in direct sunlight Prevents premature component failures caused by environmental factors such as moisture or corrosive gases Exposure to high humidity or corrosive environments will prematurely degrade the electronic components in any electronic device regardless of its use or manufacturer unless specific precautions such as those mentioned in the Environment section above are taken It is recommended that all relays be powered up once per year for one hour continuously to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors and subsequent relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Chapter 3 Installation 3 1 Mechanical Installation 3 1 1 Description The 469 is packaged in the standard GE Multilin SR series arrangement which consists of a drawout unit and a companion fixed case The case provides mechanical protection to the unit and is used to make permanent connections to all external equipment The only electrical components mounted in the case are those required to connect the unit to the external wiring Connections in the
230. aximum DC offset for an asymmetrical current Ground Fault Unfortunately there is not enough information to determine a ground fault setting These settings depend on the following information 1 The ground fault current available 2 System grounding for example high resistive grounding or solidly grounded 3 Ground fault CT used 4 Ground fault connection for example zero sequence or residual connection For the purpose of this example assume a fault current of 10 Amps or 10 50 0 2 x CT no intentional time delay Unbalance Alarm and Trip The unbalance settings are determined by examining the motor application and motor design The heating effect of unbalance will be protected by enabling unbalance input to thermal memory described in details in Chapter 5 Thermal Model A setting of 1096 for the unbalance alarm with a delay of 10 seconds would be appropriate and the trip can be set to 2596 with a delay of 5 seconds Stopped and Running Cool Times The motor manufacturer usually supplies this information as either cooling times or cooling time constants not provided in the data sheet issued with this motor Since RTDs are present and wired to the relay biasing of the thermal model will be used so it is not critical to have these cooling times from the manufacturer The default values of motor cooling time constants are 15 and 30 minutes and can be used for the running and stopped cool times respectively If the manufactur
231. ay be used to sense the key on the motor The probe could be powered from the 24 V from the input switch power supply The NPN transistor output could be taken to one of the assignable switch inputs configured as a tachometer 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS General Switch A to D PATH SETTINGS V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 INPUT 1 FUNCTION See above ASSIGNABLE General Sw A gt SWITCH NAME Range 12 alphanumeric characters amp General Sw A esgage gt GENERAL SWITCH Range Normally Open Normally Open Normally Closed gt BLOCK INPUT Range 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 4 gt FROM START 0 s ESSAGE ESSAGE GENERAL SWITCH A Range Off Latched Unlatched ESSAGE ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 ESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None gt GENERAL SWITCH Range 0 1 to 5000 0 s in steps of 0 1 gt ALARM DELAY 5 0 GENERAL SWITCH Range On Off EVENTS Off gt GENERAL SWITCH Range Off Latched Unlatched 7 gt TRIP Off 55 TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp x RELAYS Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary ESSAGE ESSAGE GENERAL SWITCH A Range 0 1 to 5000 0 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE gt TR
232. b 5 21209 3329 Ic 1 A 22409 Ic 5 A 22409 3424 to 0 31 la 120 V 72889 120 V 72889 3519 9 Vb 120 V 2489 120 V 7489 7 3 3 Unbalance Test The 469 measures the ratio of negative sequence current I gt to positive sequence current 3 This value as a percent is used as the unbalance level when motor load exceeds FLA When the average phase current is below FLA the unbalance value is de rated to prevent nuisance tripping as positive sequence current is much smaller and negative sequence current remains relatively constant The derating formula is 2 x 29 100 EQ 7 1 FLA 9 POWER SYSTEM MATHEMATICAL VECTOR VECTOR CONVENTION CONVENTION la 780A aus 0 la 780A 0 1000 15 1000 247 Q 113 FIGURE 7 2 Three Phase Example for Unbalance Calculation 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 TESTING Symmetrical component analysis of vectors using the mathematical vector convention yields a ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current as shown 1 2 z la alycal Eq where 17120 0 5 j0 886 7 2 1 3 la 16 Given values in the figure above we have h _ 780 Z0 11207 1000 2 1139 1120 10004113 l 780 20 171209 1000 7 113 1120 2 10004113 _ 780 09 10007127 1000725535 EQ 7 3 780Z0 1000Z7 10002353
233. case are fitted with mechanisms required to allow the safe removal of the relay unit from an energized panel for example automatic CT shorting The unit is mechanically held in the case by pins on the locking handle that cannot be fully lowered to the locked position until the electrical connections are completely mated Any 469 can be installed in any 469 case except for custom manufactured units that are clearly identified as such on both case and unit and are equipped with an index pin keying mechanism to prevent incorrect pairings No special ventilation requirements need to be observed during the installation of the unit The 469 can be cleaned with a damp cloth 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 8 80 Max 224 n 52 7 25 191 184 Panel 990000000 4 000000000 7 9 00 22 P 2 22929292 EP 229 CUTOUT 000000000 b 224225552 900000000 55455295544222952 5525600 S Sesso 29858658 99090900000000000 y 5 000000000 a 808750E6 DWG INCHES SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW PANEL CUTOUT mm FIGURE 3 1 Dimensions To
234. ced by a poor connection For RTD types other than 10 Q Copper the error introduced by the jumpers is negligible Although this RTD wiring technique reduces the cost of wiring the following disadvantages must be noted 1 There will be an error in temperature readings due to lead and connection resistances This technique is NOT recommended for 10 Copper RTDs 2 Ifthe RTD Return lead to the 469 or any of the jumpers break all RTDs from the point of the break will read open 3 Ifthe Compensation lead or any of the jumpers break all RTDs from the point of the break will function without any lead compensation Two Wire RTD Lead Compensation An example of how to add lead compensation to a two wire RTD may is shown in the figure below 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 01 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 469 Motor Control Motor Terminal Box L1 Hot 1 bo Compensation Az _w 2 RTD1 m RL2 RTD Return 808719A1 CDR FIGURE 3 24 2 Wire RTD Lead Compensation The compensation lead L2 is added to compensate for Hot L1 and Return L3 assuming they are all of equal length and gauge To compensate for leads RL1 and RL2 a resistor equal to the resistance of RL1 or RL2 could be added to the compensation lead though in many cases this is unnecessary RTD Grounding Grounding of one lead of the RTDs is done at either the 469
235. changes or creating new Settings files The EnerVista 469 Setup window Settings files are accessed in the Settings List control bar window or the Files Window Use the following procedure to download and save Settings files to a local PC gt Ensure that the site and corresponding devicels have been properly defined and configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista 469 Setup to the Relay on page 4 16 Select the desired device from the site list gt Select the File gt Read Settings from Device menu item to obtain settings information from the device After a few seconds of data retrieval the software will request the name and destination path of the Settings file The corresponding file extension will be automatically assigned gt Press Save to complete the process A new entry will be added to the tree in the File pane showing path and file name for the Settings file Adding Settings Files to the Environment The EnerVista 469 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large group of Settings files Use the following procedure to add a new or existing file to the list gt In the files pane right click on Files gt Select the Add Existing Settings File item as shown 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 7 System Setup 750 260 System Setup FlexCurve
236. charges the thermal capacity used to zero sets any Starts Hour Block lockout to zero sets any Time Between Starts Block lockout to zero and reset all Trips and Alarms so that a hot motor may be restarted However a Restart Block lockout will remain active it may be used as a backspin timer and any trip condition that remains such as a hot will still cause a trip Therefore while the terminals are shorted the Trip and Block output relays will remain in their normal non operated state In the event of a real emergency the Emergency Restart terminals should remain shorted until the emergency is over Also while the Emergency Restart terminals are shorted a Service Alarm message indicates any trips or blocks that are active As the name implies this feature should only be used in an emergency using it otherwise defeats the purpose of the relay namely protecting the motor Any Emergency Restart input transition from open to closed or closed to open is logged as an event 5 24 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Remote Reset Shorting terminals 018 and 023 resets any trips or latched alarms provided that the condition that caused the alarm or trip is no longer present If there is a lockout time the Block Start relay will not reset until the lockout time has expired 5 4 2 Starter Status STARTER STATUS Range Starter Auxiliary A SW Starter Auxiliary B PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS
237. cribe the motor status at any given point in time If the motor has been tripped and the 469 has not yet been reset the MOTOR STATUS value will be Tripped The MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED reflects an integrated value of both the Stator and Rotor Thermal Capacity Used The values for ESTIMATED TRIP TIME ON OVERLOAD appear whenever the 469 picks up on the overload curve 6 2 5 Last Trip Data PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V LAST TRIP DATA LAST CAUSE OF LAST Range see below TRIP gt No Trip to Date gt OF LAST Range hour min sec TRIP OF LAST Range Month Day Year TRIP gt MOTOR SPEED DUR Range High Speed Low Speed Seen if ESSAGE gt two speed motor is enabled gt Range 0 3600 RPM Seen if a Digital ESSAGE lt gt 3600 RPM Input set as Tachometer 0 B Range 0 to 100000 A ESSAGE gt o gt MOTOR LOAD Range 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA ESSAGE amp 0 00 x FLA Pre CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 0 to 100 gt PreTrip 0 _ gt GROUND CURRENT Range 0 0 to 5000 0 A Not seen if ESSAGE lt gt 0 00 Ground CT is set to None _ lt gt a 0 0 Range 0 to 5000 Not seen if ESSAGE gt a Differential is set as None gt STATOR Range 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F ESSAGE RTD Seen
238. ction to start the motor 5 13 Relay Assignment Practices There are six output relays Five of the relays are always non failsafe the other Service is failsafe and dedicated to enunciate internal 469 faults these faults include settings Corruption failed hardware components loss of control power etc One of the output relays is dedicated as the Block Start relay it is dedicated to features that are intended to block motor starting The four remaining relays may be programmed for different types of features depending on what is required One of the relays 1 TRIP is intended to be used as the main trip relay Another relay 4 ALARM is intended to be used as the main alarm relay The two relays that are left 2 AUXILIARY and 3 AUXILIARY are intended for special requirements When assigning features to Auxiliary Relays 2 and 3 it is a good idea to decide early on what is required since features that may be assigned may conflict For example if 2 AUXILIARY is to be used for upstream trips it cannot also be used for the control of a Reduced Voltage Start Similarly if 3 AUXILIARY is to be dedicated as a relay to echo all alarm conditions to a PLC it cannot also be used strictly to enunciate a specific alarm such as Undercurrent In order to ensure that conflicts in relay assignment do not occur several precautions have been taken All trips with the exception ofthe Short Circuit Backup Trip default to the 1 TRIP output relay All alar
239. d Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched RTD 1 to RTD 12 Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 RTD 11 defaults to Other RTD type The Other selection allows the RTD to be used to monitor any temperature that might be required either for a process or additional bearings or other There are individual alarm high alarm and trip configurations for this 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 74 5 9 9 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS RTD Trip voting has been added for extra reliability in the event of RTD malfunction If enabled a second RTD must also exceed the trip temperature of the RTD being checked before a trip will be issued If the RTD is chosen to vote with itself the voting feature is disabled The RTD name may be changed if desired RTD 12 PATH SETTINGS gt V S8 RTD TEMPERATURE gt V RTD 12 RTD RTD 12 APPLICA Range 12 gt TION MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 00090009 000000 69090 lt gt 0 i 12 RTD 12 ALARM ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS RTD 12 ALARM TEMPERATURE 60 C RTD 12 HIGH RTD 412 HIGH EVE
240. d be disabled Alternately the feature may assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current Various situations e g contactor bounce may cause transient ground currents during motor starting that may exceed the Ground Fault pickup levels for a very short period of time The Ground Fault time delays are adjustable in 10 ms increments The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still responds very fast but rides through normal operational disturbances Normally the Ground Fault time delays are set as quick as possible that is 0 ms Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual connection When a motor starts the starting current typically 6 x FLA for an induction motor has an asymmetrical component This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1 6 times the normal RMS starting current This momentary DC component will cause each of the phase CTs to react differently and the net current into the ground input of the 469 will not be negligible A 20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motor starts enables the 469 to ride through this momentary ground current signal The overreach filter removed the DC component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs This results in no overreach whatsoever
241. d out the pair of retaining tabs to a horizontal position from each side of the case as shown below The case is now securely mounted ready for panel wiring If additional support is desired the SR optional mounting kit may be ordered 3 4 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 808704A1 CDR FIGURE 3 6 Bend Up Mounting Tabs 3 1 4 Unit Withdrawal and Insertion TURN OFF CONTROL POWER BEFORE DRAWING OUT OR RE INSERTING THE RELAY TO PREVENT MALOPERATION CAUTION If an attempt is made to install a unit into a non matching case the mechanical key will prevent full insertion of the unit Do not apply strong force in the following step or damage may result CAUTION To remove the unit from the case gt Open cover by grasping the center of the right side and then pulling the cover which will rotate about the hinges on the left gt Release the locking latch located below the locking handle by pressing upward on the latch with the tip of a screwdriver FIGURE 3 7 Press Latch to Disengage Handle 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 3 5 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION gt While holding the latch raised grasp the locking handle in the center and pull firmly rotating the handle up from the bottom of the unit until movement ceases FIGURE 3 8 Rotate Handle to Stop Position Once the handle is released from the locking mechanism the unit can freely slide
242. ditional Digital Input settings associated with this value 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 33 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 5 54 Output Relays 5 5 1 Description Five of the six output relays are always non failsafe the 6 SERVICE relay is always failsafe As failsafe the 6 SERVICE relay will be energized normally and de energize when called upon to operate It will also de energize when control power to the 469 is lost and therefore be in its operated state All other relays being non failsafe will be de energized normally and energize when called upon to operate Obviously when control power is lost to the 469 the output relays must be de energized and therefore they will be in their non operated state Shorting bars in the drawout case ensure that when the 469 is drawn out no trip or alarm occurs The the 6 SERVICE relay will however indicate that the 469 has been drawn out 5 5 2 Relay Reset Mode PATH SETTINGS S4 OUTPUT RELAYS gt RELAY RESET MODE H 1 TRIP Range All Resets Remote Reset Only All Resets Keypad Reset Only 2 AUXILIARY Range All Resets Remote Reset Only ESSAGE lt gt 11 Resets Keypad Reset Only 3 AUXILIARY Range All Resets Remote Reset Only ESSAGE lt gt 11 Resets Keypad Reset Only 4 ALARM Range All Resets Remote Reset Only ESSAGE amp All Resets Keypad Reset Only S 5 BLOCK START Range N A Auto Reset 6 Range All Resets Rem
243. e 1 27 aj 187 025 026 027 82 B4 A16 A17 A18 19 A0 A21 A22 23 A24 25 26 a27 806816AB DWG XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX FIGURE 3 28 Testing for Dielectric Strength 3 26 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 2 14 2 Speed Motor Wiring 469 ADDITIONAL SETPOINTS NOTES ASSIGNABLE INPUT 4 DEDICATED AS 2 SPEED MONITOR SPEED 1 amp SPEED 2 H SPEED 1 PROGRAMMED AS NORMAL SPEED 2 ADDITIONAL SETPOINTS ENABLE 2 SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION PROGRAM SPEED 2 PHASE CT PRIMARY amp FLA SELECT SPEED 2 O L CURVE PROGRAM SPEED 2 UNDERCURRENT AND OR ACCELERATION CT RATIOS SHOWN ARE JUST EXAMPLES cou w pue PHASE A Tins CURRENT INPUTS La Ea LETT MOTOR HOT ag 225 E CESON RID 2 MOTOR HOT pns MOTOR e E UT Lr so rum RTD 6 3 AUXILIARY de
244. e number of starts within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable If the two numbers are the same a block will occur If a block occurs the lockout time will be equal to the longest time elapsed since a start within the past hour subtracted from one hour For example if MAX STARTS HOUR PERMISSIBLE is programmed at 2 one start occurs at T 0 minutes start occurs at T 17 minutes the motor is stopped at T 33 minutes a block occurs the lockout time would be 1 hour 33 minutes 27 minutes Time Between Starts Permissible A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 469 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current At this point the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with the entered time Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature Once the motor is stopped if the time elapsed since the most recent start is less than the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE settings a block will occur If a block occurs the lockout time will be equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start subtracted from the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE value of 0 effectively disables this element For example if TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE is programmed 25 min astart occurs at T 0 minutes the motor is stopped at T 12 minutes a block occurs the lockout time would be 25 minutes 12 minutes 13 minute
245. e 2 AUXILIARY relay e Program 2 AUXILIARY to Remote Reset Only 5 5 3 Force Output Relay PATH SETTINGS gt V S4 OUTPUT RELAYS gt V FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS 1 Range Disabled Enabled FORCE RELAY Disabled ESSAGE gt roRCE TRIP RELAY Range Static 1 to 300 s in steps of 1 4 gt DURATION Static Range Disabled Enabled ae FORCE 2 AUXILIARY 9 RELAY Disabled gt FORCE 2 AUX RELAY Range Static 1 to 300 s in steps of 1 ESSAGE DURATION Static FORCE 3 AUXILIARY Range Disabled Enabled RELAY Disabled FORCE 3 AUX RELAY Range Static 1 to 300 s in steps of 1 ESSAGE DURATION Static Range Disabled Enabled pecie FORCE 4 ALARM g RELAY Disabled gt FORCE ALARM RELAY Range Static 1 to 300 s in steps of 1 ESSAGE DURATION Static ET 5 BLOCK Range Disabled Enabled ESSAGE FORCE BLOCK RELAY Range Static 1 to 300 s in steps of 1 DURATION Static n H i i H The output relays can be independently forced in static or dynamic mode In static mode the selected relay will operate as long as it is in the Enabled state Only when the user enters Disabled will the selected relay reset dynamic mode the user specifies the operate time 1 to 300 seconds and the selected relay will operate for the specified duration The FORCE OUTPUT RELAY option is NOT allowed when the selected relay output is already active due to trip or
246. e RO SPC CINCOM OMS NDERPOWER TRIPS UNDERVOLTAGE Em RIO COUNTE N to ies UNPACKING THE RELAY UPGRADING FIRMWARE recte oce tete RR en 4 35 V VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES oett 5 20 VIBRATIQN ts e tete e ere ren em 3 19 VIBRATION SWITCH scite tei trt rrt 2 11 VIBRATION SWITG EUALAR M eie retten 5 29 VIBRATION SWITCH TRIP 5 29 VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD acceleration curves ER custom curves n protection CUrV6S safe stall curve VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST stitit 7 3 VOLTAGE INPUTS d scrip t epe e bel specifications wye VT connection VOLTAGE METERING VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL see PHASE REVERSAL VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL T EST etienne tite retten 7 13 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTERI VOLTAGE SENSING cp 5 19 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER see VTs VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RAT IQ aceti ie tti redes 5 19 VECONNECTION TYPE tton tnter ORE 5 19 MET PUNO eas ET 5 19 VTs Ssphase open delta hawaii 6 22 C 6 25 e
247. e also diagnostic messages and flash messages that appear when certain conditions occur Diagnostic messages are described on page 37 Flash messages are described on page 38 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 3 6 2 Ai Status 6 2 1 Network Status Ethernet Connection CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V NETWORK STATUS NETWORK STATUS 5 Ethernet Lnk Con Range see description below E This actual value appears when the relay is ordered with the Ethernet T option The ETHERNET STATUS actual value message indicates the status of the Ethernet link connection and diagnostic via three indicators The symbol indicates on and the NETWORK STATUS symbol indicates off There is also a blinking indication The box under LNK column indicates the Ethernet link status If it is on the Ethernet port is connected to the network if it is off the port is disconnected This indicator is normally on The box under the coN column indicates the connection status If on the Ethernet port is configured and ready to transmit and receive data If blinking the Ethernet port is either active transmitting or receiving data or indicating an error if the diagnostic status is also on or blinking The box under the DIA column indicates the diagnostic status If it is on then either a fatal Ethernet port error has occurred or there is a duplicate IP address on the network If blinking then
248. e current unbalance seen by a typical motor is 2 x 6 12 In this case set the CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM PICKUP tO 15 and the CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIP PICKUP to 20 to prevent nuisance tripping 5 10 seconds is a reasonable delay 5 7 6 Ground Fault PATH SETTINGS S6 CURRENT ELEM gt V GROUND FAULT MESSAGE lt gt MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL GROUND FAULT OVERREACH FIL GROUND FAULT ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS GROUND FAULT INTENTIONAL GF ALARM GROUND FAULT ALARM GROUND FAULT TRIP Off JT ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS GROUND FAULT TRIP PICKUP 0 20 x CT INTENTIONAL GF TRIP GROUND FAULT TRIP BACKUP Off ASSIGN BACKUP iT LU Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range On Off Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 0 1 to 1 00 x CT in steps of 0 01 or 0 25 to 25 A in steps of 0 01 O to 1000 ms in steps of 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp 2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 0 1 to 1 00 x CT in steps of 0 01 or 0 25 to 25 A in steps of 0 01 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 1 On Off Auxiliary2 Aux2
249. e has been received The new device will be added to the Site List window or Online window located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista 469 Setup window The 469 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications Proceed to the following section to begin communications Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured the user can easily connect to the relay gt Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL the box to list the available devices for the given site for example in the Pumping Station 1 site shown below 4 5 gt Click the box to expand the desired device trees The following list of headers is shown for each device Device Definitions Settings e Actual Values Commands e Communications V Expand the Settings Relay Setup list item Double click on Front Panel to open the Front Panel Settings window as shown below Abus Gomeurications Hep 2408222 a Expand the Site List by double clicking or by selecting the box Communications Status Indicator Green OK Red No Comms B Shon FIGURE 4 5 Main Window after Connection The Front Panel Settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista 469 Setup window If t
250. e message and the Message LED flashes Pressing the NEXT key cycles through the time and date stamp information as well as all of the pre trip data When the bottom of this queue is reached pressing NEXT again normally returns to the top of the queue However because an alarm is active the display skips to the alarm message at the top of the A1 STATUS gt V ALARM STATUS queue Similarly pressing NEXT again skips to the A1 STATUS gt V START BLOCK gt RESTART BLOCK LOCKOUT message Pressing NEXT once final time returns to the original CAUSE OF LAST TRIP message and the cycle could be repeated LAST TRIP DATA CAUSE OF LAST TRIP Overload TIME OF LAST TRIP DATE OF LAST TRIP Jan 01 1992 l ANALOG INPUT 4 PreTrip 0 Units ACTIVE ALARMS STATOR RTD 1 ALARM 135 C 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 37 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES SINON OVERLOAD LOCKOUT 25 When the RESET has been pressed the hot condition is no longer present and the lockout time has expired the display will revert back to the normal Default Messages 6 8 2 Flash Messages Flash messages are warning error or general information messages that are temporarily displayed in response to certain key presses These messages are intended to assist with navigation of the 469 messages by explaining what has happened or by prompting the user to perform certain actions KEY IS USED ALL POSSIBLE
251. e of an absolute difference in units or a percentage difference The second analog input 4 for 3 4 is used as the reference value for percentage calculations The comparison logic can also be selected as one input greater than the other 3 gt 4 or vice versa 4 3 or as absolute difference 3 lt gt 4 Note that the compared analog inputs must be programmed with the same unit type prior to using this feature 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 97 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 14 S13 469 Testing 5 14 1 Simulation Mode PATH SETTINGS S13 469 TESTING gt SIMULATION MODE Find d MODE Range Off Simulate Pre Fault Simulate Fault Pre Fault to Fault _ PRE FAULT TO Range 0 to 300 s in steps of 1 FAULT The 469 may be placed in several simulation modes This simulation may be useful for several purposes MESSAGE e First it may be used to understand the operation of the 469 for learning or training purposes e Second simulation may be used during startup to verify that control circuitry operates as it should in the event of a trip alarm or block start e In addition simulation may be used to verify that settings had been set properly in the event of fault conditions Simulation mode may be entered only if the motor is stopped and there are no trips alarms or block starts active The values entered as Pre Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in
252. e or the main window menu bar Select the PHASE CT PRIMARY settings by clicking anywhere in the parameter box This will display three arrows two to increment decrement the value and another to launch the numerical calculator 7 Current Sensing Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Settings Phase CT Primary E Motor Full Load Amps Ground CT Type 5 Secondary Ground CT Primary 100 57 Default Phase Differential CT Type None Enable Two Speed Motor Option OffiNo 469 Relay 1 Settings System Setup gt Click on the arrow at the end of the box to display a numerical keypad interface that allows you to enter a value within the settings range displayed near the top of the keypad Current Sensing Pumping Station 1 469 5 Serial Comm Control Reduced Voltage Current Sensing Voltage Sensing Power System Phase CT Primary Range 1 to 5001 OFF Motor Full Load Amps Restore Ground Type Increment Ground CT Primary Phase Differential CT Type Enable Two Speed Motor Option 201 5 469 Relay 1 Settings System Setup 2 gt Click Accept to exit from keypad and keep new value 4 22 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 gt Click on Cancel to exit from the keypad and retain the old value gt For settings requiring no
253. e to the unit may occur CONTROL lt 7 POWER HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR OR BRAIDED WIRE SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS L L GROUND N FILTER GROUND I N SAFETY FIGURE 3 13 Control Power Connection Extensive filtering and transient protection are built into the 469 to ensure proper operation in harsh industrial environments Transient energy must be conducted back to the source through the filter ground terminal A separate safety ground terminal is provided for hi pot testing All grounds MUST be hooked up for normal operation regardless of control power supply type 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 2 4 Current Inputs CAUTION Phase Current Inputs The 469 has three channels for phase current inputs each with an isolating transformer There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs If the unit is withdrawn each phase CT circuit is shorted by automatic mechanisms on the 469 case The phase CTs should be chosen so the FLA is no less than 5096 of the rated phase CT primary Ideally the phase CT primary should be chosen such that the FLA is 10096 of the phase CT primary or slightly less never more This will ensure maximum accuracy for the current measurements The maximum phase CT primary current is 5000 A The 469 correctly measures up to 20 times the phase current nominal rating Since the conv
254. e will follow the assignment message The Pressure Switch alarm feature may be blocked for a specified period of time from a motor start A value of zero for the block time indicates that the feature is always active when the motor is stopped or running After the block delay has expired the digital input will be monitored If a closure occurs after the specified delay an alarm will occur Pressure Switch Trip PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 6 INPUT 1 FUNCTION See above ASSIGNABLE Pressure Switch BLOCK PRES SW Range 0 to 5000 step 1 ESSAGE TRIP gt Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp ESSAGE Ines Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary Range 0 1 to 100 0 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE PRESSURE SW TRIP DELAY 5 0 s These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Pressure Switch Trip Once the Pressure Switch Trip function is chosen for one of the digital inputs the settings messages shown here will follow the assignment message The Pressure Switch Trip feature may be blocked for a specified period of time from a motor start A value of zero for the Block time indicates that the feature is always active when the motor is stopped or running After the block delay has expired the digital input will be monitored If a closure occurs after the specified delay a trip will occur 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL C
255. ec rime iret etu teet a a dedica 3 24 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH 2 SPEED MOTOR WIRING 4 INTERFACES FACEPLATE INTERFACE Gen E pA Rp 4 1 DESCRIPTION LED INDICATORS i cedet ped ei ete RR 4 2 sodio hv pe En A O 4 3 Nai p 4 4 SENTING S ENTRY RP M 4 6 DIAGNOSTIG MESSAGES ucc 4 7 SELF TEST WARNINGS WAS A MESSAGES inci ro ENERVISTA 469 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 10 OVERVIEW i et ted iita tt Det HRS 4 10 FIAROWAR E Mu DU eU 4 11 INSTALLING THE ENERVISTA 469 SETUP SOFTWARE 4 13 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 469 SETUP TO THE RELAY 4 16 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE cssscsssssssssssssssssssssssnesssessnesssessnesssessnecssecsneesseesse CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 4 18 CONNECTING TO THE RELAY scere nnn i i tt 4 19 WORKING WITH SETTINGS AND SETTINGS FILES 4 22 ENGAGING AIDEWIGE eee eec 4 22 ENTERING SETTINGS 4 22 FILE SUPPORT m USING SETTINGS FILES tee tee e cdi e Gs 4 23 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE 22 0 4 35 DESCRIPTION ter n bt
256. ects the 469 Setup software to a 469 front port with the following settings 9600 baud no parity 8 bits 1stop bit Select the PC communications port connected to the relay and press the Connect button The EnerVista 469 Setup software will display a window indicating the status of communications with the relay When connected a new Site called Quick Connect will appear in the Site List window The properties of this new site cannot be changed gt ener ista 469Setup Active Screen File Setpoint Actual Communications View Help ix Device Setup CA GE Multilin El Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Device Definition Settings Actual Values Commands Communications 469 Quick Connect Device Definition Settings Actual Values Commands Communications ee The 469 Site Device has now been configured the Quick Connect feature for serial communications Proceed to Connecting to the Relay on page 4 19 to begin communications 4 3 3 Configuring Ethernet Communications Before starting verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ 45 Ethernet port gt Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 469 Setup software available from the GE enerVista CD See the previous section for the installation procedure gt Click
257. ed 2 Select Yes and follow the directions to enter a new passcode 1 to 8 digits in length 3 Once a passcode other than 0 is programmed it must be entered each time settings access is restricted If a non zero passcode has been programmed and settings access is restricted then the ENTER PASSCODE FOR ACCESS message appears when entering the S1 469 SETUP gt PASSCODE subgroup 4 Enter the correct passcode A flash message will advise if the code is incorrect and allows a retry If the passcode is correct and the settings access jumper is installed the settings ACCESS Permitted message appears 5 settings can now be entered Press ESCAPE to exit the S1 469 SETUP gt PASSCODE group and program the appropriate settings If no keys are pressed for 5 min utes programming access will no longer be allowed and the passcode must be re entered Removing the settings access jumper or setting the SETTINGS ACCESS settings to Restricted will also immediately disable settings access If a new passcode is required gain settings access by entering the valid passcode as described above then press MESSAGE to display the CHANGE PASSCODE message and follow directions If an invalid passcode is entered an encrypted passcode may be viewed by pressing the HELP key Consult the factory service department with this number if the currently programmed passcode is unknown Using a deciphering program the passcode can be determined 5 8 469
258. ed to provide protection against unauthorized settings changes Since we will be programming new settings using the front panel keys a hardware jumper must be installed across the settings access terminals C1 and C2 on the back of the relay case Attempts to enter a new settings without this electrical connection will result in an error message The jumper does not restrict settings access via serial communications The relay has a programmable passcode settings which may be used to disallow settings changes from both the front panel and the serial communications ports This passcode consists of up to eight 8 characters The factory default passcode is 0 When this specific value is programmed into the relay it has the effect of removing all settings modification restrictions Therefore only the settings access jumper can be used to restrict settings access via the front panel and there are no restrictions via the communications ports When the passcode is programmed to any other value settings access is restricted for the front panel and all communications ports Access is not permitted until the passcode is entered via the keypad or is programmed into a specific register via communications 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 9 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Note that enabling settings access on one interface does not automatically enable access for any of the other interfaces i e the passcode mu
259. ee page 31 gt MESSAGE 32 gt MESSAGE lt gt gt ACTUAL EVENT 8 ee page 33 VALUES 01 gt zin i 6 2 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES E EVENT MESSAGE S 33 lt gt 256 gt MESSAGE 8 __ 36 MESSAGE See page 36 gt CALIBRATION MESSAGE END OF PAGE 6 1 2 Description 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY Measured values maintenance and fault analysis information are accessed in Actual Value mode Actual values may be accessed via one of the following methods 1 Thefront panel using the keys and display 2 Thefront program port and a portable computer running the EnerVista 469 Setup software supplied with the relay 3 rear 5485 port and a PLC SCADA system running user written software Any of these methods can be used to view the same information A computer makes viewing much more convenient since many variables may be viewed at the same time Actual value messages are organized into logical groups or pages for easy reference All actual value messages are illustrated and described in blocks throughout this chapter All values shown in these message illustrations assume that no inputs besides control power are connected to the 469 In addition to the actual value messages there ar
260. een by the relay in graphical format The same information described above is displayed by the EnerVista 469 Setup software as follows 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Phasors 77 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values F3 COLOR assicHTo COMPONENT MAGNITUDE ANGLE COLOR 469 Relay 1 Phasors New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data 2 FIGURE 6 1 Vector display in EnerVista 469 Setup IEEE conventions define vectors in terms of relative angles as shown below PER IEEE CONVENTIONS PARAMETERS AS SEEN Phase Rotation G BY THE 469 RELAY pcc Vca Vab Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Positive PF Lag Current Vbc 806558A1 CDR FIGURE 6 2 Flow Direction of Signed Values for Watts and Vars phasors calculated by 469 relays are rotating phasors that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times For display purposes all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to phase Van or Vab depending on the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt VT CONNECTION TYPE settings If set to Wye the reference quantity is Van if set to Open Delta the reference quantity is Vab If neither voltage is available the relay uses the current in Phase A as reference The phase angles are assigned and displayed as positive angles However by design the relay will alwa
261. efore the thermal limit is reached Standard Overload Curves If the SELECT CURVE STYLE is set to Standard in the Thermal Model only the following settings will appear PATH SETTINGS gt V S5 THERMAL MODEL gt V OVERLOAD CURVE SETUP STANDARD OVERLOAD Range 1 to 15 steps of 1 Seen only if OVERLOAD CURVE NUMBER 4 Standard curve is selected 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 39 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times it is recommended that the 469 Standard Overload Curve be used The standard overload curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shape based on typical motor thermal limit curves see the figure and table below 469 Motor Management Relay STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES 100000 SSS 10000 1 1 TIME IN SECONDS A o 1 00 0 10 1 00 10 100 1000 MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD AMPS 806804A5 CDR FIGURE 5 6 469 Standard Overload Curves Table 5 1 469 Standard Overload Curve Multipliers PICKUP STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS x FLA x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 x 1
262. el combination of Auxiliary a contacts or a series combination of Auxiliary b contacts from the reduced voltage contactor and the full voltage contactor Once transition is initiated the 469 assumes the motor is still running for at least 2 seconds This prevents the 469 from recognizing an additional start if motor current goes to zero during an open transition 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL REDUCED VOLTAGE FULL VOLTAGE AUXILIARY a AUXILIARY a 016 S LN STARTER STATUS SWITCH INPUT Setpoint Starter Auxiliary SN D23 lt REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY A STATUS INPUT f EN pie REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER STATUS AUXILIARY 2 SWITCH INPUT Setpoint Starter Auxiliary FULL VOLTAGE A AUXILIARY b D23 gt M REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY STATUS INPUT 808723A1 CDR FIGURE 5 3 Reduced Voltage Starter Inputs CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 4 S3 Digital Inputs 5 4 1 Description Overview The 469 relay has nine 9 digital inputs Five of the digital inputs have been pre assigned as switches having a specific function Four of the five pre assigned digital inputs are always functional and do not have any settings messages associated with them The fifth Starter Status may be configured for either an a or b auxiliary contact The
263. eps of 10 TRIP SHORT CIRCUIT Range On Off TRIP ASSIGN BACKUP Range Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 RELAYS Auxiliary ESSAGE ESSAGE SHORT CIRCUIT Range 10 to 2000 ms in steps of 10 TRIP Care must be taken when turning On this feature If the interrupting device contactor or circuit breaker is not rated to break the fault current this feature should be disabled Alternatively this feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current If turned on the Short Circuit element functions as follows A trip occurs once the magnitude of either la Ib or Ic exceeds the Pickup Level x Phase CT Primary for the time specified by INTENTIONAL S C TRIP DELAY A backup trip feature may also be enabled The SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP BACKUP DELAY should be greater than the INTENTIONAL S C TRIP DELAY plus the breaker clearing time If the SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP BACKUP is On and a Short Circuit trip has initiated a second trip occurs if the motor phase current persists for a time exceeding the SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP BACKUP DELAY It is intended that this second trip be assigned to 2 Auxiliary or 3 Auxiliary which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay Whenever the output relay assigned to backup trip operates it will remain latched regardless of how the trip relay is configured for the Short Circuit Trip element Various si
264. er a given Settings page gt Press the MESSAGE ENTER key gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys to scroll through sub page headers until the required message is reached The end of a page is indicated by the message END OF PAGE The beginning of a page is indicated by the message TOP OF PAGE To access actual values gt Press the MENU key until the display shows the header of the actual values menu gt Press the MESSAGE P or ENTER key to display the header for the first actual values page The actual values pages are numbered have an A prefix for easy identification and have a name which gives a general idea of the information available in that page Pressing the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys will scroll through all the available actual values page headers Actual values page headers look as follows 5 1 STATUS To enter a given actual values page gt Press the MESSAGE ENTER key gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys to scroll through sub page headers until the required message is reached The end of a page is indicated by the message END OF PAGE The beginning of a page is indicated by the message TOP OF PAGE Similarly to access additional sub pages gt Pressthe MESSAGE ENTER key to enter the first sub page gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys to scroll through the available sub pages until the desired message is reached The process is identical for both sett
265. er of available files Files to be saved or viewed Save waveform to a file gt Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY The waveform file numbering starts with the number zero in the 469 therefore the maximum trigger number will always be one less then the total number triggers available gt Clickonthe Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC A new window will appear requesting for file name and path The file is saved as a CSV comma delimited values file which can be viewed and manipulated with compatible third party software gt To view a previously saved file click the Open button and select the corresponding CSV file gt view the captured waveforms click the Launch Viewer button A detailed Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below TRIGGER TIME amp DATE CURSOR LINE POSITION Display the time amp date of the VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT Indicate the cursor line position Trigger Click here to open a new graph in time with respect to the to display vectors trigger time DELTA Indicates time difference between the two cursor lines A A Hf Y oa n n M M i AANA NET Fie
266. er provides cooling times instead the approximate values of the cooling time constants is 1 5th the cooling times provided by the manufacturer Acceleration Trip This settings should be set higher than the maximum starting time to avoid nuisance tripping when the voltage is lower or for varying loads during acceleration If reduced voltage starting is used according to the acceleration curves a setting of 18 seconds would be appropriate or if across the line starting is used a setting of 15 seconds would be appropriate Enable Start Inhibit This function will limit starts when the motor is already hot The relay learns the amount of thermal capacity used at start If the motor is hot thus having some thermal capacity used the relay will not allow a start if the available thermal capacity is less than the required thermal capacity for a start 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Starts Hour When available set starts Hour to the number of cold starts as per the data sheet Time Between Starts In some cases the motor manufacturer will specify the time between motor starts This information is not given so this feature can be left disabled If the information is available the time provided on the motor data sheets should be programmed e Stator RTDs Set the RTD trip level at or below the maximum temperature rating of the insulation The data available shows class F insulation tem
267. ersion range is large 1 A or 5 A CT secondaries must be specified at the time of order to ensure the appropriate interposing CT is installed in the unit The chosen CTs must be capable of driving the 469 phase CT burden see Specifications on page 2 6 for ratings Verify that the 469 nominal phase current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating and connections of the connected CTs Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection Polarity of the phase CTs is critical for Negative Sequence Unbalance calculation power measurement and residual ground current detection if used See Two Phase CT Configuration on page A 1 for 2 phase CT information Ground Current Input The 469 has a dual primary isolating transformer for ground CT connection There are no internal ground connections on the ground current inputs The ground CT circuits are shorted by automatic mechanisms on the 469 case if the unit is withdrawn The 1 5 tap is used either for zero sequence core balance applications or residual ground connections where the summation of the three phase current CTs is passed through the ground current input see the figure below The maximum ground CT primary current is 5000 for the 1 5 Alternatively the 50 0 025 ground CT input has been designed for sensitive ground current detection on high resistance grounded systems where the GE Multilin 50 0 025 core balance CT is to be used For example in minin
268. erted Function that the digital input will initiate within the 469 If the 469 will be used to perform monitoring functions and act upon certain conditions record information such as minimum and maximum values alarm and trip values time delays It is important to familiarize yourself with the relay protection and control functions before setting up the relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED To begin simply power on the unit and follow the instructions in this tutorial Assume the following system characteristics and that the 469 settings are unaltered from their factory default values Refer to the following figures for schematics related to this application example 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED
269. es such as motor load thermal capacity used motor speed and instantaneous values of power system quantities The status of digital inputs Last trip information including values such as cause of last trip time and date of trip motor speed and load at the time of trip pre trip temperature measure ments pre trip analog inputs values and pre trip instantaneous values of power system quantities Active alarms Relay date and time Present blocking conditions General system status indication including the status of output relays active pickup alarm and trip conditions 2 Metering Data Instantaneous current measurements including phase differential unbalance ground average and motor load RTD Temperatures including hottest RTDs Instantaneous phase to phase and phase to ground voltages depending on the VT connections average voltage and system frequency Motor Speed Power Quantities including apparent real and reactive power Current and power demand including peak values Analog inputs Vector information 3 Motor Learned Data a b Learned and last acceleration time Learned and last starting current 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 3 8 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED C Learned and last starting capacity d Average motor load Maintenance data This is useful statistical information that may be used for preventive maintenance It includes Trip c
270. es three leads to be brought back from each RTD Hot Return and Compensation This can be quite expensive It is however possible to reduce the number of leads required to 3 for the first RTD and 1 for each successive RTD Refer to the figure below for wiring configuration for this application 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 469 Motor Control Motor Terminal Box L1 uo RTD1 13 M RTD Return n J3 14 Compensation a4 RTD2 5 Compensation Hot T J2 16 H L7 Compensation j RTD3 RTD Return 8 No connection 808722A2 CDR FIGURE 3 23 Reduced Wiring RTDs The Hot line would have to be run as usual for each RTD The Compensation and Return leads however need only be run for the first RTD At the motor RTD terminal box the RTD Return leads must be jumpered together with as short as possible jumpers The Compensation leads must be jumpered together at the 469 Note that an error is produced on each equal to the voltage drop across the jumper on the RTD return This error increases with each successive RTD added 1 etc This error is directly dependent on the length and gauge of the wire used for the jumpers and any error introdu
271. essing the RESET key and verify timing accuracy gt Pre trip values may be viewed by pressing NEXT after each trip INJECTED CURRENT EXPECTED TIME MEASURED TIME 5 A UNIT UNIT TO TRIP TO TRIP lt 50 ms 40A lt 50 ms 50A 10A lt 50 ms 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Appendix A 1 Two Phase CT Configuration A 1 1 Description This appendix illustrates how two CTs may be used to sense three phase currents The proper configuration for the use of two CTs rather than three to detect phase current is shown Each of the two CTs acts as a current source The current that comes out of the CT on phase A flows into the interposing CT on the relay marked A From there the current sums with the current that is flowing from the CT on phase C which has just passed through the interposing CT on the relay marked C This summed current flows through the interposing CT marked B and from there the current splits up to return to its respective source CT Polarity is very important since the value of phase B must be the negative equivalent of A C in order for the sum of all the vectors to equate to zero Note that there is only one ground connection as shown If two ground connections are made a parallel path for current has been created 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A 1 A APPENDIX 80
272. etc may cause false readings in the residually connected GF circuit Only one ground input should be wired the other input should be unconnected The exact placement of a zero sequence CT to detect only ground fault current is shown below If the core balance CT is placed over shielded cable capacitive coupling of phase current into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as ground current unless the shield wire is also passed through the CT window Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION CABLE LUGS TO SOURCE TERMINATION 50 0 025 CORE BALANCE CT CORE BALANCE CT FOR GROUND SENSING SECONDARY CONNECTION TO 5 469 02 7 lt g TWISTED PAIR GROUND CONDUCTOR DOES 4 NOT PASS THROUGH AS CT IS NOT MOUNTED OVER GROUND WITHIN THE CABLE JACKET os TO STARTER GROUND BUS POWER CABLE TO MOTOR BOTTOM OF MOTOR_STARTER COMPARTMENT FIGURE 3 15 Core Balance Ground CT Installation Unshielded Cable CABLE LUGS TO SOURCE TERMINATION y STRESS CONE SHIELD GROUND CONNECTION 7 SPLIT BOLT CONNECTOR IMPORTANT FOR SHIELDED CABLE THE GROUND WIRE MUST PASS THROUGH THE CT WINDOW 90 0 025 CORE BALANCE COR Mar RN ORE BALANCE CT GROUND SENSING SECONDARY C
273. f 1 1 to 250 in steps of 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 5 to 95 in steps of 1 1 to 250 s in steps of 1 These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Tachometer Once the tachometer is chosen for a digital input the settings shown here follow the assignment message The period of time between each switch closure is measured and converted to an RPM value based on one closure per revolution Atrip and alarm may be configured such that the motor or load must be at a certain speed within a set period of time from the motor starting The tachometer trip and alarm features are configured such that the specified speed TACHOMETER TRIP SPEED Of TACHOMETER ALARM SPEED must be reached in the specified time TACHOMETER TRIP DELAY or TACHOMETER ALARM DELAY otherwise the element operates Initially the time delay begins when the motor is started and resets when the desired speed is reached Once the motor is running and the speed drops below the set threshold the time delay restarts and the designated output contact will operate if the motor fails to reach the set speed in the allotted time This element is active when motor is running and ignored while the motor is stopped The RPM value may be viewed with the A2 METERING SPEED gt TACHOMETER actual value For example an inductive proximity probe or hall effect gear tooth sensor m
274. f 1 2 00 to 15 00 x FLA in steps of 0 01 0 5 to 999 9 s in steps of 0 1 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS gt SPEED2 ACL INTER Range 2 00 to SPEED2 ISTALL MIN ESSAGE VLINE 0 01 in steps of 0 01 SECT SPEED2 ISTALL Range 2 00 to 15 00 x FLA in steps of ESSAGE 0 01 100 lt gt SPEED2 SAFE STALL Range 0 5 to 999 9 s in steps of 0 1 gt e SPEED2 ACL INTER Range 2 00 to SPEED2 ISTALL 100 ESSAGE SECT VLINE 0 01 in steps of 0 01 Refer to Voltage Dependent Overload Curves on page 5 46 for additional details on the custom overload curves available for Speed2 5 15 2 Speed2 Undercurrent PATH SETTINGS S14 2 SPEED MOTOR SPEED2 UNDERCURRENT BLOCK SPEED2 U C Range 0 to 15000 in steps of 1 5 0 5 gt SPEED2 U C ALARM Range Off Latched Unlatched gt Range 0 10 to 0 95 x FLA steps of gt SPEED2 U C ALARM g 0 70 i 4 Range 1 to 60 steps of 1 SPEED2 U C ALARM g p DELAY 1 s Range On Off ESSAGE 9 SPEED2 U C ALARM g EVENTS Off Range Off Latched Unlatched lt SPEED2 U C g gt TRIP Off Range 0 10 to 0 99 x FLA in steps of SPEED2 U C TRIP PICKUP 0 70 x Range 1 to 60 steps of 1 ESSAGE SPEED2 U C TRIP g p DELAY 1 s The addition of a second Undercurrent trip or alarm level may be useful as it will indicate if the wron
275. facility to configure monitor maintain and trouble shoot the operation of relay functions connected over serial communication networks It can be used while disconnected i e off line or connected i e on line to a 469 device In off line mode Settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device In on line mode you can communicate with the device in real time This no charge software provided with every 469 relay can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95 or higher This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista 469 Setup software interface features The EnerVista 469 Setup help file provides details for getting started and using the software interface With the EnerVista 469 Setup running on your PC it is possible to Program and modify settings Load save Settings files from to disk e Read actual values and monitor status Perform waveform capture and log data Plot print and view trending graphs of selected actual values e Download and playback waveforms e Get help on any topic 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES 4 2 2 Hardware Communications from the EnerVista 469 Setup to the 469 can be accomplished three ways RS232 RS485 and Ethernet communications The following figures illustrate typical connections for 5232 5485 communications For Ethernet connection details FIGURE 4 2 Communications using The Front RS232
276. g applications where earth leakage current must be measured for personnel safety primary ground current as low as 0 25 A may be detected with the GE Multilin 50 0 025 CT Only one ground CT input tap should be used on a given unit 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 13 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION PHASE A CT a a PHASE 2 a e e G6 H6 67 H7 GB H8 G9 H9 e y 1 5 5 COM 1A 5A COM 1A 5A GROUND CURRENT INPUTS 806761A5 DWG FIGURE 3 14 Residual Ground CT Connection The 469 measures up to 5 A secondary current if the 1 5 A tap is used Since the conversion range is relatively small the 1 A or 5 A option is field programmable Proper selection of this settings ensures proper reading of primary ground current The 1 5 ground CT chosen must be capable of driving the 469 ground CT burden see Specifications on page 2 6 The 469 measures up to 25 A of primary ground current if this tap is used in conjunction with the GE Multilin core balance CT The zero sequence connection is recommended Unequal saturation of CTs size and location of motor resistance of power system and motor core saturation density
277. g settings are being used for the wrong speed i e normal running current for Speed 2 may be undercurrent for Speed 1 5 15 3 Speed Acceleration PATH SETTINGS gt V S14 2 SPEED MOTOR SPEED2 ACCELERATION SPEED2 ACCEL Range 1 0 to 250 0 s in steps of 0 1 Range 1 0 250 0 s steps of 0 1 T ACCEL TIMER FROM g gt SPEED1 2 10 0 s 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 107 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Range 1 0 to 250 0 s steps of 0 1 SPEED SWITCH TRIP g l ps of 0 SPEED2 DELAY 5 0 Seen only if one of the digital inputs is assigned as Speed Switch SPEED2 RATED Range 100 to 7200 RPM in steps of 1 MESSAGE SPEED Seen only if one of the digital inputs is assigned as Tachometer Two additional acceleration timers are provided for the two speed motor feature One timer is for a start in Speed 2 from a stopped condition The other is an acceleration timer for the transition from Speed 1 to Speed 2 Also while the motor is running the 469 will ignore Mechanical Jam protection during the acceleration from Speed 1 to Speed 2 until the motor current has dropped below Speed 2 FLA x Overload Pickup value or the Speed 1 2 acceleration time has expired At that point in time the Mechanical Jam feature will be enabled with the Speed 2 FLA 5 108 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Chapter 6 Actual Values 6
278. ge Trip Trip amp Aux2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Aux3 RELAYS _ UNBALANCE BIAS Range 0 to 19 in steps of 1 0 defeats ESSAGE 4 gt K FACTOR 0 this feature gt COOL TIME CON Range 1 to 1000 min in steps of 1 7 5 R gt COOL TIME CON Range 1 to 1000 min in steps of 1 7 gt HOT COLD SAFE Range 0 01 to 1 00 in steps of 0 01 lt gt STALL RATIO 1 00 gt ENABLE RTD Range Ves No BIASING No gt RTD BIAS Range 0 C to RTD BIAS CENTER value ESSAGE 40 C in steps of 1 gt RTD BIAS CENTER Range RTD BIAS MINIMUM value to gt POINT 130 C RTD BIAS MAXMIMUM value in steps of 1 gt RTD BIAS Range RTD BIAS CENTER value to ESSAGE e MAXIMUM 155 C 250 C in steps of 1 THERMAL CAPACITY Range Off Latched Unlatched gt ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 ESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None gt THERMAL Range 10 to 10096 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ALARM THERMAL CAPACITY Range On Off MESSAGE gt ALARM EVENTS Off The primary protective function of the 469 is the thermal model It consists of five key elements the overload curve and overload pickup level the unbalance biasing of the motor current while the motor is running the motor cooling time constants and the bias
279. gic GENERAL SWITCH A Normally Open To define the functionality BLOCK INPUT FROM START 0 s GENERAL SWITCH A ALARM Latched ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS Alarm 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED GENERAL SWITCH A ALARM DELAY 5 0 s GENERAL SWITCH A EVENTS On so this event is registered GENERAL SWITCH A TRIP Off If the relay will not be used to trip the motor when someone gains unauthorized access to the station the next settings should be left at their default values GENERAL SWITCH A TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip GENERAL SWITCH A TRIM DELAY 5 0 s 1 4 6 S5 Thermal Model The S5 Thermal Model settings page contains settings for entering settings related to protection of the motor during the starting process as well as during normal operation As per the information provided above the settings for the Thermal Model are entered as follows in the SELECT CURVE STYLE Standard OVERLOAD PICKUP 1 25 x FLA ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR 6 COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING 15 min COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED 30 min HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO 0 89 ENABLE RTD BIASING Yes RTD BIAS MINIMUM 40 C ambient temperature RTD BIAS CENTER POINT 130 C center value RTD BIAS MAXIMUM 155 C maximum value THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM Unlatched recommended for early warning to take corrective actions and prevent the i
280. gt V TORQUE SETUP TORQUE METERING Range Disabled Enabled TORQUE 6 Disabled 5 84 Newton meter Range 0 001 to 50 000 mQ in steps of STATOR RESIS 9 i p gt Range 2 to 128 in steps of 1 PAIRS 9 gt 2 Range Newton meter Foot pound MESSAGE TORQUE UNIT 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Before torque can be determined the motor stator resistance and number of pole pairs must be entered here The base stator resistance can be determined from the motor s rated voltage and current Torque metering is intended for induction motors only and only positive torque is calculated Please consult the motor specifications for the stator resistance and the pole pairs The default unit for torque is the SI unit of Newton meter Nm The torque unit is selectable to either Newton meter or foot pound 1 Nm 0 738 ft lb Y NOTE 5 11 7 Overtorque PATH SETTINGS gt V S10 POWER ELEMENTS gt V OVERTORQUE 09 OVERTORQUE Range OVERTORQUE ALARM Off MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS TORQUE ALARM LEVEL 4000 0 Nm TORQUE ALARM DELAY 1 0 s TORQUE ALARM EVENTS Off iil Range Range Range Range Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary
281. he 469 provides 4 analog output channels which may be ordered to provide a full scale range of either 0 to 1 mA into a maximum 10 impedance or 4 to 20 mA into a maximum 1200 impedance Each channel can be configured to provide full scale output sensitivity for any range of any measured parameter As shown in FIGURE 3 12 Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3 11 these outputs share one common return Polarity of these outputs must be observed for proper operation Shielded cable should be used with only one end of the shield grounded to minimize noise effects The analog output circuitry is isolated as a group with the Analog Input circuitry and the RTD circuitry Only one ground reference should be used for the three circuits Transorbs limit this isolation to 36 V with respect to the 469 safety ground 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 19 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION If a voltage output is required a burden resistor must be connected at the input of the SCADA measuring device Ignoring the input impedance of the input scale For 0 to 1 mA for example if 5 V full scale is required to correspond to 1 mA 5 V 0 001 A 5000 Q For 4 to 20 mA this resistor would be Rjoag 5 V 0 020 A 250 Q 3 2 9 RTD Sensor Connections Description The 469 monitors up to 12 RTD inputs for Stator Bearing Ambient or Other temperature monitoring The type of each RTD is field programmable a
282. he above data to set the relay system parameters such as CT and VT connections VT secondary voltage and CT and VT primary to secondary ratios 1 4 5 Motor Protection Overload Pickup The overload pickup is set to the maximum allowed by the service factor of the motor Since this motor has RTDs and the relay will be using the bias feature for enhanced protection set the overload pickup to the highest setting of 1 25 x FLC for the motor service factor of 1 15 If service factor is unknown assume 1 0 Overload Curve 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 25 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Select the standard overload curve to be just below the cold thermal limit to give maximum process uptime without compromising protection The best fitting curve is curve 7 see figure below 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL ba 2800 220 ao S3auno KARR Sao CURRENT CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED EE I SV ATIVOS JHVHO 901 se paso pan pr o TON aao svrosooe TINA AO oor or oo oro 900 750 or Canada Ltd
283. he core balance CT gt Verify accuracy of the measured values gt View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA gt CURRENT METERING PRIMARY SECONDARY EXPECTED MEASURED INJECTED INJECTED CURRENT GROUND CURRENT CURRENT READING CURRENT 0 25 0 125 mA 0 25 0 5 mA 100 10 5 10 00 25 12 5 25 00 7 2 5 Accuracy Test The 469 specification for input accuracy 15 2 Perform the steps below gt Alter the following settings 88 RTD TEMPERATURE gt RTD TYPES gt STATOR RTD TYPE 100 Ohm Platinum select desired type 88 RTD TEMPERATURE V RTD 1 gt RTD 1 APPLICATION Stator repeat for RTDs 2 to 12 Measured values should be 2 or 4 F gt Alter the resistances applied to the RTD inputs as per the table below to simulate RTDs gt Verify accuracy of the measured values gt View measured values in 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 8 2 5 CHAPTER 7 TESTING 2 METERING TEMPERATURE Table 7 1 100 PLATINUM TEST APPLIED EXPECTED RTD MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE RESISTANC TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE F E 100 Q READING PLATINUM Celsius Fahrenheit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 80 3
284. he physical communications parameters baud rate and parity set tings in their respective fields Note that when communicating to the relay from the front port the default communications settings are a baud rate of 9600 with slave address of 1 no parity 8 bits and 1 stop bit These val ues cannot be changed 2 Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 469 device and upload the order code If an communications error occurs ensure that the 469 serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values 3 Click OK when the relay order code has been received The new device will be added to the Site List window or Online window located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista 469 Setup window The 469 Site Device has now been configured for serial communications Proceed to Connecting to the Relay on page 4 19 to begin communications 4 3 2 Using the Quick Connect Feature The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel RS232 port of a 469 relay The following window will appear when the Quick Connect button is pressed Quick Connect Quickly connect 469 Setup to a 469 Device ig through the 4695 front port at 9600 8 1 Select your Computer s COM Port com2 tees 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17 4 5 As indicated by the window the Quick Connect feature quickly conn
285. he rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered e Ensure that the following items are included Instruction Manual GE EnerVista CD includes software and relay documentation mounting screws e For product information instruction manual updates and the latest software updates please visit the GE Multilin website at http www GEmultilin com y If there is any noticeable physical damage or any of the contents listed are missing please contact GE Multilin immediately NOTE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 1 1 2 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Manual Organization Reading a lengthy instruction manual on a new product is not a task most people enjoy To speed things up this introductory chapter provides a step by step tutorial for a simple motor application Important wiring considerations and precautions discussed in Electrical Installation on page 3 11 should be observed for reliable operation Detailed information regarding accuracy output relay contact ratings and so forth are detailed in Specifications on page 2 6 The remainder of this manual should be read and kept for reference to ensure maximum benefit from the 469 Motor Management Relay For further information please consult your local sales representative or the factory Comments about new features or modifications for your specific requirements are welcome and encouraged settings and actual values are indicated as follows in
286. he status indicator is red verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the relay and that the relay has been properly configured for communications steps described earlier 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 The front panel settings can now be edited printed or changed according to user specifications Other settings and commands windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner Actual values windows are also available for display These windows can be locked arranged and resized at will y Refer to the EnerVista 469 Setup Help File for additional information about the using the software NOTE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 4 4 Working with Settings and Settings Files 4 4 1 Engaging a Device The EnerVista 469 Setup software may be used in on line mode relay connected to directly communicate with a 469 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the SR or UR product series 4 4 2 Entering Settings The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of settings In this example we will be changing the current sensing settings Establish communications with the relay Select the Settings System Setup menu item This can be selected from the device settings tre
287. he thermal model for unforeseen situations Since RTDs are relatively slow to respond RTD biasing is good for correction and slow motor heating The rest of the thermal model is required during starting and heavy overload conditions when motor heating is relatively fast Note that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip If the RTD bias forces thermal capacity used to 10096 the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an overload trip occurs Presumably the motor would trip on stator RTD temperature at that time RTD Bias Maximum 100 Hot Cold 0 85 80 Rated Temperature 130 C Insulation Rating 155 C 60 40 20 Thermal Capacity Used RTD Bias Center Point RTD Bias Minimum 50 0 50 100 150 200 250 Maximum Stator Temperature FIGURE 5 16 RTD Bias Curve 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 7 56 Current Elements 5 7 1 Short Circuit Trip PATH SETTINGS gt V S6 CURRENT ELEM gt SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP Range Off Latched Unlatched TRIP Off WARNING ESSAGE SHORT CIRCUIT Range On Off TRIP ASSIGN TRIP Range Tri Trip amp Aux 2 Trip amp Aux2 amp ESSAGE Aux3 Trip amp 3 Aux2 Aux2 amp lt RELAYS Aux3 Aux SHORT CIRCUIT Range 2 0 to 20 0 x CT in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE TRIP INTENTIONAL S C Range 0 to 1000 ms in st
288. hed TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp ESSAGE RELAYS 2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary UNDERCURRENT TRIP Range 0 10 to 0 99 x FLA in steps of PICKUP 0 70 x 0 01 UNDERCURRENT TRIP 1 to 60 5 in steps of 1 ESSAGE gt DELAY 1 s Atrip or alarm will occurs once the magnitude la Ib or Ic falls below the pickup level x FLA for the time specified by the UNDERCURRENT ALARM DELAY The Undercurrent element is active only when the motor is running It is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for the time defined by the U C BLOCK FROM START settings e g this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips A value of 0 means the feature is not blocked from start If a value other than 0 is entered the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires The UNDERCURRENT ALARM PICKUP level should be set lower than motor loading during normal operations 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 61 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS For example if a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps loss of load may mean that the pump overheats In this case enable the undercurrent feature If the motor loading should never fall below 0 75 x FLA even for short durations the UNDERCURRENT TRIP PICKUP could be set to 0 70 and the UNDERCURRENT ALARM PICKUP to 0 75 If the pump is always
289. hermal Model on page 5 38 and 5 6 3 Overload Curve Setup on page 5 39 for details When setting the Speed2 Overload Curve characteristics only the relevant settings corresponding to the overload curve style will be shown as described below Standard Overload Curves If the SELECT CURVE STYLE is set to Standard in the Thermal Model the following settings will appear PATH SETTINGS S14 2 SPEED MOTOR gt SPEED2 OVERLOAD SETUP SPEED2 STANDARD Range 1 to 15 in steps of 1 CURVE NUMBER 4 Refer to Standard Overload Curves on page 5 39 for additional details on the standard overload curves available for Speed2 e Custom Overload Curves If the SELECT CURVE STYLE is set to Custom in the Thermal Model the following settings will appear PATH SETTINGS S14 2 SPEED MOTOR gt SPEED2 OVERLOAD SETUP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 steps of 0 1 1 x FLA 104 SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 1 05 x FLA SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE 7 1 10 x FLA SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE 1 20 x FLA 795 4 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 103 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 amp 1 30 x FLA 507 2 ED SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAG 4 gt 1 40 x FLA 364 6 SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5
290. iating between loss of control power as indicated by the 6 SERVICE relay and withdrawal of the unit 3 2 12 RS485 Communications Ports NOTE Two independent two wire RS485 ports are provided Up to 32 469s can be daisy chained together on a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability For larger systems additional serial channels must be added Commercially available repeaters can also be used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel Suitable cable should have a characteristic impedance of 120 Q e g Belden 9841 and total wire length should not exceed 4000 ft Commercially available repeaters will allow for transmission distances greater than 4000 ft Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon For this reason surge protection devices are internally installed across all 5485 terminals Internally an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling To ensure that all devices in a daisy chain are at the same potential it is imperative that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only once at the master Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed communications 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION The source computer PLC SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed either internally or externally to ensure maximum reliabi
291. il 7 2 7 Analog Inputs and Outputs The 469 specification for analog input and analog output accuracy is 190 of full scale Perform the steps below to verify accuracy Verify the Analog Input 24 V DC with a voltmeter 4 to 20 mA Analog Input gt Alter the following settings 512 ANALOG I O gt V ANALOG INPUTI gt ANALOG INPUTI 4 20 mA S12 ANALOG gt V ANALOG INPUTI gt ANALOG INPUT1 MINIMUM 0 S12 ANALOG D gt V ANALOG INPUTI gt V ANALOG INPUT1 MAXIMUM 1000 repeat this value for Anal og Inputs 2 to 4 Analog output values should be 0 2 mA on the ammeter Measured analog input values should be 10 units S13 TESTING TEST ANALOG OUTPUT gt FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS FUNCTION Enabled Force the analog outputs using the following settings S13 TESTING gt V TEST ANALOG OUTPUT gt V ANALOG OUTPUT 1 FORCED VALUE 096 enter desired value in percent repeat for Analog Outputs 2 through 4 Verify the ammeter readings as well as the measured analog input readings For the purposes of testing the analog input is fed in from the analog output see FIGURE 7 1 Secondary Injection Test Setup on page 7 2 gt View the measured values in 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 TESTING A2 METERING DATA gt V ANALOG INPUTS ANALOG EXPECTE MEASURED EXPECTED MEASURED ANALOG OUTPUT D AMMETER READ
292. ile names 4 4 4 Using Settings Files Overview The EnerVista 469 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings Inoff line mode relay disconnected to create or edit relay Settings files for later download to communicating relays Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay then saving the settings when complete e Creating editing Settings files while connected to a communicating relay then saving them to the relay when complete 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 23 4 5 Settings files are organized on the basis of names assigned by the user Settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings Device Definition Product Setup e System Setup Digital Inputs e Output Relays e Protection Elements Monitoring Functions e Analog Inputs and Outputs Relay Testing Settings for Two Speed Motors e User Memory Map Setting Tool Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes The EnerVista 469 Setup display relay settings with the same hierarchy as the front panel display For specific details on settings refer to Chapter 5 Downloading and Saving Settings Files Settings must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades Saving settings is also highly recommended before making any settings
293. ime This time is specified by the S1 469 SETUP gt V PREFERENCES gt V AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD CALC PERIOD settings default 15 minutes The calculation is a sliding window and is ignored during motor starting 6 43 Maximums PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V LEARNED DATA gt V MAXIMUMS RTD Range 50 to 250 MAXIMUMS gt 409 gt TEMP 40 C gt RTD 11 Range 50 to 250 C ESSAGE 4 gt MAx TEMP 40 ESSAGE RTD 2 Range 50 to 250 C MAX TEMP 40 C ESSAGE gt RTD 3 Range 50 to 250 C TEMP 40 C escage RID 4 Range 50 to 250 C TEMP 40 C ESSAGE RTD 5 Range 50 to 250 C MAx TEMP 40 C RTD 6 Range 50 to 250 C gt TEMP 40 C ESSAISE lt gt 7 50 250 MAX TEMP 40 C gt 8 Range 50 to 250 ESSAGE MAX TEMP 40 C ESSAGE RTD 9 50 to 250 TEMP 40 C ESSAGE BD RTD 10 Range 50 to 250 C RTD 12 Range 50 to 250 C ESSAGE 40 The 469 will learn the maximum temperature for each This information can be cleared using the 1 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA gt V CLEAR RTD MAXIMUMS settings 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES The values in this menu reflect the RTD names as programmed If no
294. imited during starting Thus RTDs in the stator do not provide the best method of determining cool times Determination of reasonable settings for the running and stopped cool time constants can be accomplished in one of the following manners listed in order of preference 1 The motor running and stopped cool times or constants may be provided on the motor data sheets or requested from the manufacturer Remember that the cooling is exponential and the time constants are one fifth of the total time interval from 10096 to 096 thermal capacity used 2 Attempt to determine a conservative value from the available motor data See the following example for details 3 motor data is available an educated guess must be made Perhaps the motor data could be estimated from other motors of a similar size or use Note that conservative protection is the best first choice until a better understanding of the motor requirements is developed Remember that the goal is to protect the motor without impeding the operating duty that is desired Example Motor data sheets state that the starting sequence allowed is two 2 cold or one 1 hot after which you must wait five 5 hours before attempting another start Thisimplies that under a normal start condition the motor is using between 34 and 5096 thermal capacity Hence two consecutive starts are allowed but not three Ifthe hot and cold curves or a hot cold safe stall ratio are not available
295. in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 8 00 x FLA 5 6 s ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 10 0 x FLA 5 6 s ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 15 0 x FLA 5 6 s ESSAGE 9 09 9 09 09 09 09 69 09 69 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 m co Co gt N o gt o a a a If the motor starting current begins to infringe on the thermal damage curves it may become necessary to use a custom curve to tailor the motor protection so that successful starting may occur without compromising protection Furthermore the characteristics of the starting thermal damage curve locked rotor and acceleration and the running thermal damage curves may not fit together very smoothly In this instance a custom curve may be necessary to tailor motor protection to the motor thermal limits so it may be started successfully and be utilized to its full potential without compromising protection The distinct parts of the thermal limit curves now become more critical For these conditions it is recommended that the 469 custom curve thermal model be used The custom overload curve feature allows the user to program their own curve by entering trip times for 30 pre deter
296. ing of the thermal model based on Hot Cold motor information and measured stator temperature Each of these elements are described in detail in the sections that follow The 469 integrates stator and rotor heating into one model Motor heating is reflected in the A1 STATUS gt MOTOR STATUS gt V MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED actual value register If the motor has been stopped for a long period of time it will be at ambient temperature 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS and the MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED should be zero If the motor is in overload once the thermal capacity used reaches 100 a trip will occur The THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM may be used as a warning indication of an impending overload trip 5 6 3 Overload Curve Setup Overview The overload curve accounts for motor heating during stall acceleration and running in both the stator and the rotor The OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL settings dictates where the running overload curve begins as the motor enters an overload condition This is useful for service factor motors as it allows the pickup level to be defined The curve is effectively cut off at current values below this pickup Motor thermal limits consist of three distinct parts based on the three conditions of operation locked rotor or stall acceleration and running overload Each of these curves may be provided for a hot and a cold motor A hot motor is defined as one that has been running fo
297. ings and actual values The following procedure illustrates the key sequence to access the Current Demand actual values gt Press the MENU key until you reach the actual values main menu gt Press MESSAGE or ENTER key to enter the first actual values page 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 158 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A key to scroll through pages until the A2 METERING DATA page appears 5 A2 METERING DATA Press the MESSAGE ENTER key to display the first sub page heading for the Metering Data actual values page METERING Pressing the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys will scroll the display up and down through the sub page headers Pressing the 4 MESSAGE or ESCAPE key at any sub page heading will return the display to the heading of the corresponding settings or actual value page Pressing it again will return the display to the main menu header gt Press the MESSAGE key until the DEMAND METERING sub page heading appears METERING At this point pressing MESSAGE or ENTER key will display the messages under this sub page If instead you press the MESSAGE key it will return to the previous sub page heading In this case METERING When the symbols m and gt appear on the top line it indicates that additional sub pages are available and can be accessed by pressing the MESSAGE or ENTER key gt Press MESSAGE
298. input will be changed in this example from the generic General Sw A to something more descriptive If an application is to be using the relay as a station monitor it is more informative to rename this input Station Monitor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 15 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Press the decimal key to enter the text editing mode The first character will appear underlined as follows SWITCH NAME General Sw A Press the VALUE keys until the character S is displayed in the first position Press the decimal key to store the character and advance the cursor to the next position Change the second character to a t in the same manner Continue entering characters in this way until all characters of the text Stn Monitor are entered Note that a space is selected like a character If a character is entered incorrectly press the decimal key repeatedly until the cursor returns to the position of the error Re enter the character as required Once complete press the ENTER key to remove the solid cursor and view the result Once a character is entered by pressing the ENTER key it is automatically saved in flash memory as a new settings SWITCH NAME Stn Monitor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 5 14 Application Example 14 1 Description The 469 Motor Management Relay contains many features designed to accommod
299. is stopped or running the digital input will be monitored If a closure occurs a trip will occur after the specified delay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 29 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Digital Counter PATH SETTINGS gt V S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 4 INPUT 1 FUNCTION See above ASSIGNABLE Digital Counter COUNTER UNITS Range 6 alphanumeric characters Units COUNTER PRESET Range 0 to 1000000000 in steps of 1 ESSAGE VALUE 0 COUNTER TYPE Range Increment Decrement ESSAGE Increment COUNTER Range Off Latched Unlatched ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 ESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None gt COUNTER ALARM Range 0 to 1000000000 in steps of 1 lt gt LEVEL 100 ESSAGE COUNTER ALARM Range Over Under COUNTER ALARM Range On Off These settings apply only if the INPUT 1 4 FUNCTION is Digital Counter ESSAGE Once the Digital Counter function is chosen for one of the assignable digital inputs the settings messages shown here will follow the assignment message Each closure of the switch will be counted by either incrementing or decrementing the counter value An alarm may be configured when a certain count is reached The counter value may be viewed the A4 MAINTENANCE gt V GENERAL COUNTERS gt V DIGITAL COU
300. it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current A low level differential fault can develop into a short circuit in an instant gt A trip occurs once the magnitude of either OF phase differential exceeds the Pickup Level x Differential CT Primary for a period of specified by the delay Separate pickup levels and delays are provided for motor starting and running conditions The Differential trip element is programmable as a fraction of the rated CT The level may be set more sensitive if the Differential CTs are connected in a flux balancing configuration 3 CTs If 6 CTs are used in a summing configuration the values from the two CTs on each phase during motor starting may not be equal since the CTs are not perfectly identical asymmetrical currents may cause the CTs on each phase to have different outputs To prevent nuisance tripping in this configuration the STARTING DIFF TRIP PICKUP level may have to be set less sensitive or the STARTING DIFF TRIP DELAY may have to be extended to ride through the problem period during start The running differential delay can then be fine tuned to an application such that it responds very fast to sensitive low differential current levels 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 65 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 8 S7 Motor Starting 5 8 1 Acceleration Timer PATH SETTINGS gt V S7 MOTOR STARTING gt
301. it current to less than FLA throughout the start Since the 469 is a generic motor relay it cannot differentiate between a motor with a slow ramp up time and one that has completed a start and gone into overload Therefore if the motor current does not rise to greater than full load within 1 second on start the acceleration timer feature is ignored In any case the motor is still protected by the overload curve 5 8 2 Start Inhibit PATH SETTINGS S7 MOTOR STARTING gt V START INHIBIT 61 START INHIBIT Range On Off 47 IBLOCK Off TC USED Range 0 to 2596 in steps of 1 MESSAGE CIN 25 The Start Inhibit feature prevents motor starting if there is insufficient thermal capacity The largest THERMAL CAPACITY USED value from the last five successful starts is multiplied by 1 TC USED MARGIN and stored as the LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY This thermal capacity margin ensures a successful motor start If the number is greater than 10096 10096 is stored as LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY A successful motor start is one in which 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS phase current rises from 0 to greater than overload pickup and then after acceleration falls below the overload curve pickup level If the Start Inhibit feature is enabled the amount of thermal capacity available 10096 THERMAL CAPACITY USED is compared to the LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY each time the motor is stopped If the thermal capaci
302. ith each unit A metal demo case may be ordered for demonstration or testing purposes 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION 2 1 3 Order Codes Base Unit Phase Current Inputs Control Power Analog Outputs Display Harsh Environment H Table 2 1 469 Order Codes Ce 469 469 Motor Management Relay 1A phase CT secondaries 5 A phase CT secondaries 20to 60 V DC 20 to 48 V AC at 48 to 62 Hz 90 to 300 V DC 70 to 265 V AC at 48 to 62 Hz Four 4 O to 1 mA analog outputs Four 4 4 to 20 mA analog outputs Basic display Enhanced display larger LCD Enhanced with Ethernet 10Base T Enhanced display with DeviceNet Harsh chemical environment conformal coating P5 LO HI A20 2 1 4 Example Order Codes 1 The 469 P1 LO A20 E code specifies a 469 Motor Management Relay with 1 A CT inputs 20 to 60 V DC or 20 to 48 V AC control voltage 4 to 20 mA analog outputs and enhanced display option with larger LCD 2 469 P5 HI A1 T H code specifies a 469 Motor Management Relay with 5 A CT inputs 90 to 300 V DC or 70 to 265 V AC control voltage 0 to 1 mA analog outputs enhanced display with Ethernet 10Base T communications and a harsh environment conformal coating 2 1 5 Accessories The following accessories are available for the 469 Motor Management Relay EnerVista 469 Setup software No charge softwa
303. lay displays the Settings menu header B SETTINGS Press MESSAGE ENTER SETTINGS Press MESSAGE V Press SETTINGS MESSAGE ENTER Press MESSAGE V CURRENT Press VT CONNECTION VOLTAGE MESSAGE gt or ENTER Press the VALUE keys until VT CONNECTION Open Delta is displayed Press the ENTER key to store the settings Press ENABLE SINGLE VT MESSAGE OFF Press VOLTAGE TRANS MESSAGE FORMER Press the VALUE keys until 115 00 1is VOLTAGE TRANS displayed or enter the value directly via FORMER the numeric keypad Press the ENTER key to store the NEW SETTINGS settings HAS Press MOTOR NAMEPLATE MESSAGE V VOLTAGE 4000 V Press the VALUE keys until 13800 V 15 NAMEPLATE displayed or enter the value directly 7 13800 v the numeric keypad Press the ENTER key to store the settings If an entered settings value is out of range the relay displays the following message 100 36000 indicates the range and 1 indicates the step ENTER value where 100 is the minimum settings value 36000 is the maximum and 1 is the step value To have access to information on maximum minimum and step value press the HELP key 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 1 3 5 Output Relay Settings Output relays Trip or Alarm can be associated to the
304. le Blocked Self test Warning 9 The event Self test warning 9 is caused by unexpected microprocessor reset System input measurements were interrupted for at least 2 seconds 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 7 Product Info 6 7 1 469 Model Information PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V PRODUCT INFO gt 469 MODEL INFORMATION 469 Range Displays relay order code MODEL gt 22 3 and installed options INFORMATION 5 20 469 SERIAL NO Range Displays the serial number of A3050001 2 Range Displays the firmware revision ESSAGE SION of the relay BOOT REVISION Range Displays the boot software ESSAGE 3 00 revision of the relay Range Displays the hardware revision ESSAGE lt gt of the relay MOD NUMBER Range Displays the relay modification All of the 469 model information may be viewed here when the unit is powered up In the event of a product software upgrade or service question the information shown here should be jotted down prior to any inquiry 6 7 2 Calibration Information PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V PRODUCT INFO gt V CALIBRATION INFORMATION Range month day year ORIGINAL CALIBRA pcm TION INFO TION DATE Jan 01 1995 LAST CALIBRATION Range month day year MESSAGE DATE Jan O1 1995 The date of
305. le when removing the unit from the case This extra length allows the network cable to be disconnected from the RJ45 connector from the front of the switchgear panel Once disconnected the cable can be left hanging safely outside the case for re inserting the unit back into the case The unit may then be re inserted by first connecting the network cable to the units rear RJ45 connector see step 3 of Unit Withdrawal and Insertion on page 3 5 Ensure that the network cable does not get caught inside the case while sliding in the unit This may interfere with proper insertion to the case terminal blocks and damage the cable FIGURE 3 10 Ethernet Cable Connection To ensure optimal response from the relay the typical connection timeout should be set as indicated in the following table TCP IP sessions Timeout setting up to 2 2 seconds up to 4 3 seconds 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Sof 3 8 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 1 6 DeviceNet Connection CAUTION If using the 469 DeviceNet option Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide ensure that the network cable is disconnected from the rear terminal block before removing the unit out of the case to prevent any damage to the connector The unit may also be removed from the case with the network cable connector still attached to the rear terminal block provided that there is at least 16 of network cable available when removing the unit
306. lity Ground the shield at one point only as shown in the figure below to avoid ground loops Correct polarity is also essential The 469s must be wired with all the terminals connected together and all the terminals connected together Each relay must be daisy chained to the next one Avoid star or stub connected configurations The last device at each end of the daisy chain should be terminated with a 120 watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the and terminals Observing these guidelines provides a reliable communication system immune to system transients 120 Ohm Inf TERMINATING TERMINATING RESISTOR CAPACITOR ome pow z 027 1025 1026 Sm PERSONAL COMPUTER UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNIT 32 RS485 85485 CONVERTER 806815A5 DWG 120 Ohm Inf TERMINATING TERMINATING RESISTOR CAPACITOR FIGURE 3 27 RS485 Communications Wiring 3 2 13 Dielectric Strength may be required to test a complete motor starter for dielectric strength flash or hipot with the 469 installed The 469 is rated for 1 9 kV AC for 1 second or 1 6 kV AC for 1 minute per UL 508 isolation between relay contacts CT inputs VT inputs trip coil supervision and the safety ground terminal G12 Some precautions are required to prevent dam
307. lue displays in this corresponding sub page gt Pressthe 4 MESSAGE key to reverse the process described above and return the display to the previous level STARTING Press the 4 MESSAGE key twice to return to the A3 LEARNED DATA page header A3 LEARNED DATA 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 7 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 1 2 2 Panel Keying Example The following figure gives a specific example of how the keypad is used to navigate through the menu structure Specific locations are referred to throughout this manual by using a path representation The example shown in the figure gives the key presses required to read the learned starting current denoted by the path A3 LEARNED DATA V MOTOR STARTING gt V LEARNED STARTING CURRENT gt Press the menu key until the relay displays the actual values page ACTUAL VALUES gt Press MESSAGE or ENTER key ACTUAL VALUES gt Press the MESSAGE amp key ACTUAL VALUES gt Press the MESSAGE key ACTUAL MOTOR ACCELERA MESSAGE MESSAGE VALUES gt Z srTARTING TION LEARNED STARTING MESSAGE cU 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 1 3 Changing Settings 1 3 1 Introduction wv NOTE There are several classes of settings each distinguished by the way their values are displayed and edited The relay s menu is arranged in a tree struc
308. m default value As per the information provided above there will be six RTDs two per phase located in the Stator and two Bearing RTDs one to monitor the ambient temperature For Stator Overtemperature protection enter the following settings in the 58 RTD TEMPERTURE gt V RTD 1 to RTD6 menus RTD 1 APPLICATION Stator RTD 1 NAME ST Ph A1 RTD 1 ALARM Unlatched ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS Alarm RTD 1 ALARM TEMPERATURE 135 C RTD 1 HIGH ALARM Off HIGH ALARM RELAYS Alarm default value RTD 1 HIGH ALARM TEMPERATURE 135 C default value RTD 1 ALARM EVENTS On RTD 1 TRIP Latched RTD 1 TRIP VOTING RTD 5 ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip RTD 1 TRIP TEMPERATURE 155 C The settings for the other RTDs are entered in similar fashion Refer to S8 RTD Temperature on page 5 70 for additional settings and additional information on RTD monitoring 1 4 10 Other Settings Undervoltage Protection In addition to the settings illustrated above there will be cases in motor applications where additional settings will be required to monitor other system parameters such as voltage levels The following sub section will illustrate the procedures to set the 469 Motor Management Relay to meet those requirements Description Using the same system information the following example illustrates the steps to set the 469 for Undervoltage protection The following settings are provided
309. m port The display and status indicators update alarm and status information automatically The control keys are used to select the appropriate message for entering settings or displaying measured values The RS232 program port is also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista 469 Setup software The 40 character liquid crystal display allows visibility under varied lighting conditions While the keypad and display are not being used the screen will display system information by scrolling through a maximum of 20 user selected default messages These default messages will only appear after a user programmed period of inactivity Pressing any key during default message scrolling will return the display to the last message shown before the default messages appeared Any trip alarm or start block is displayed immediately automatically overriding the default messages 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 1 4 2 413 LED Indicators CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES There are three groups of LED indicators They are 469 Status Motor Status and Output Relays RELAY IN SERVICE STOPPED 1 TRIP SETPOINT ACCESS STARTING 2 AUXILIARY COMPUTER RS232 RUNNING 3 AUXILIARY COMPUTER 5485 OVERLOAD PICKUP 4 ALARM AUXILIARY RS485 UNBALANCE PICKUP 5 BLOCK START LOCKOUT GROUND PICKUP 6 SERVICE RESET HOT RT POSSIBLE orem MESSAGE LOSS OF LOAD 806977A1 CDR FIGURE 4 1 469 LED INDICATORS 469 Status LED Indicators 469
310. me way as any electronic calculator number is entered one digit at a time with the 0 to 9 and decimal keys The left most digit is entered first and the right most digit is entered last Pressing ESCAPE before the ENTER key returns the original value to the display The second method uses the VALUE A key to increment the displayed value by the step value up to a maximum allowed value Likewise the VALUE W key decrements the displayed value by the step value down to a minimum value For example Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V VOLTAGE SENSING gt MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE settings message MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE 4000 V gt Press the 1 3 8 0 and 0 keys The display message will change as shown MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE 13800 V Until the ENTER key is pressed editing changes are not registered by the relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED gt Therefore press the ENTER key to store the new value in memory This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process NEW SETTINGS HAS BEEN STORED 1 3 4 Enumeration Settings The example shown in the following figures illustrates the keypress sequences required to enter system parameters such as the phase CT primary rating ground CT primary rating bus VT connection type secondary voltage and VT ratio The following values will be entered Phase CT primary rating 600 A Motor Full Load Cur
311. med that a motor is more important than a process the service relay normally closed contact may also be wired in parallel with the trip relay on a breaker application or the normally open contact may be wired in series with the trip relay on a contactor application This will provide failsafe operation of the motor that is the motor will be tripped off line in the event that the 469 is not protecting it If however the process is critical annunciation of such a failure will allow the operator or the operation computer to either continue or do a sequenced shutdown See the following figure for details 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 23 3 24 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION CONTROL POWER RELAYS SHOWN WITH NO a CONTROL POWER APPLIED 7 SEAL IN CONTACT 2 1 TRIP F1 STOP 1 Co a 42 F2 2 AUXILIARY ES F3 5 3 AUXILIARY F4 E4 F5 4 ALARM ALARM ANNUNCIATOR N Fe 5 BLOCK 5 7 r1 F8 6 SERVICE E9 SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR F9 806817A6 DWG FIGURE 3 26 Alternate Wiring for Contactors 3 2 11 Drawout Indicator The Drawout Indicator is simply a jumper from terminals E12 to F12 When the 469 is withdrawn from the case terminals E12 and F12 are open This may be useful for different
312. mediately Major Caused by a failure of the analog to digita Major converter A D1 The integrity of system input measurements is affected by this failure Self Test Warning 2 Replace Immediately Caused by a failure of the analog digita converter 02 The integrity of system input p y measurements is affected by this failure Caused by out of range reading of self test RTD 13 The integrity of system input measurements is affected by this failure Self Test Warning 5 Replace Immediately Major Caused by out of range reading of self test Major RTD 14 The integrity of system input measurements is affected by this failure Self Test Warning 6 Replace Immediately Caused by out of range reading of self test Major RTD 15 The integrity of system input measurements is affected by this failure Self Test Warning 7 Replace Immediately Caused by out of range reading of self test Major RTD 16 The integrity of system input measurements is affected by this failure Self Test Warning 8 Replace Immediately Clock Not Set Program Date Time Minor Occurs if the clock has not been set Caused the detection of unacceptably low less Minor than 40 C or high greater than 85 C temperatures detected inside the unit Unit Not Calibrated Replace Immediately This warning occurs when the relay has not been factory
313. minal List Table 3 1 469 Terminal List AE Description Terminal Description 01 1 Hot 021 Assignable Switch 3 A02 RTD 1 Compensation D22 Assignable Switch 4 A03 RTD Return 023 Switch Common A04 RTD 2 Compensation D24 Switch 24 V DC A05 RTD 2 Hot D25 Computer 85485 06 3 Hot 026 Computer 85485 07 RTD 3 Compensation D27 Computer 5485 Common A08 RTD Return E01 1 Trip NC 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 9 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Table 3 1 469 Terminal List Terminal Description Terminal Description A09 RTD 4 Compensation E02 1 Trip NO A10 4 Hot E03 2 Auxiliary Common A11 RTD 5 Hot E04 3 Auxiliary NC 12 5 Compensation E05 3 Auxiliary NO A13 RTD Return E06 4 Alarm COMMON A14 RTD 6 Compensation E07 5 Block Start NC A15 RTD 6 Hot E08 5 Block Start NO A16 Analog Output Common E09 6 Service Common A17 Analog Output 1 E10 not used A18 Analog Output 2 E11 Coil Supervision A19 Analog Output 3 E12 469 Drawout Indicator A20 Analog Output 4 F01 1 Trip Common A21 Analog Shield F02 2 Auxiliary NO A22 Analog In 24 V DC Power Supply F03 2 Auxiliary NC 23 Analog Input 1 204 3 Auxiliary
314. mined current levels As seen in the figure below if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve with the locked rotor overload curve the motor could not start at 8096 line voltage A custom curve is required 5 44 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS e GE Multilin TYPICAL CUSTOM CURVE 6500 HP 13800 VOLT INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR 10000 PROGRAMMED 469 CUSTOM CURVE 2 RUNNING SAFETIME STATOR LIMIT ACCELERATION SAFETIME ROTOR LIMIT MOTOR CURRENT at 100 VOLTAGE 1000 j MOTOR CURRENT at 80 VOLTAGE 100 N 22 lt 10 TIME TO TRIP IN SECONDS 1 0 T 1000 MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT 806803A6 CDR FIGURE 5 7 Custom Curve Example During the interval of discontinuity the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nuisance tripping during motor starts NOTE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 45 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Voltage Dependent Overload Curves If the SELECT CURVE STYLE is set to Voltage Dependent in the Thermal Model the following setti
315. ms default to the 4 ALARM relay Only special control functions are defaulted to Auxiliary Relays 2 and 3 It is recommended that these assignments be reviewed once all the settings have been programmed 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 7 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 2 51469 Setup 5 2 1 gt PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt PASSCODE m 4 ENTER PASSCODE Range 1 to 8 numeric digits PASSCODE FOR j Range Permitted Restricted settings ACCESS g Permitted Range No Yes MESSAGE 2 PASSWORD A passcode access security feature is provided in addition to the settings access jumper When shipped from the factory the passcode is defaulted to 0 Passcode protection is ignored when the passcode is 0 In this case only the settings access jumper is required for changing settings from the front panel Passcodes are also ignored when programming settings via the RS485 port However when programming settings using the front RS232 port and the EnerVista 469 Setup software a passcode is required if enabled The ENTER PASSCODE FOR ACCESS settings is seen only if the passcode is not 0 and SETTINGS ACCESS is Restricted The SETTINGS ACCESS and CHANGE PASSWORD settings are seen only if the passcode is 0 and the SETTINGS ACCESS is Permitted To enable passcode protection on a new relay follow the procedure below 1 Press MESSAGE gt then MESSAGE until CHANGE PASSCODE is display
316. n numerical pre set values e g VT CONNECTION TYPE above in the Voltage Sensing tab click anywhere within the settings value box to display a drop down selection menu arrow gt Click on the arrow to select the desired settings Current Sensing Pumping Station Serial Comm Control Reduced voltage Current Sensing Voltage Sensing Power System SETTING PARAMETER Save VoltageTransformer Connection Type Open Delta Enable Single VT Connection Restore Voltage Transformer Ratio Delta Motor Nameplate Voltage Restore 7 Default 469 Relay 1 Settings System Setup For settings requiring an alphanumeric text string e g message scratchpad messages the value may be entered directly within the settings value box gt In the Settings System Setup dialog box click on Save to save the values into the 469 Click Yes to accept any changes gt Click No and then Restore to retain previous values and exit 4 4 3 File Support Opening any EnerVista 469 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide focus to the already opened application If the file is a Settings file has a 469 extension which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu it will be added back to the Settings List tree New files will be automatically added to the tree which is sorted alphabetically with respect to Settings f
317. n the motor current falls below the user s programmed Transition Level transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for 1 second If the timer expires before that transition is initiated the transition will be initiated regardless e If Current and Timer is selected when the motor current falls below the user s programmed Transition Level and the timer expires transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for 1 second If the timer expires before current falls below the Transition Level an Incomplete Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip relays 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 21 v NOTE CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 469 REDUCED VOLTAGE BLOCK TRIP STOP START e o CC1 469 SEAL IN 3 AUX cc2 FULL VOLTAGE CONTACTOR CC2 SEAL IN 808724A2 CDR FIGURE 5 1 Reduced Voltage Start Contactor Control Circuit When the currrent falls below MOTOR AMPS the Transition Level and or the FLA Timer expires the Auxiliary Relay activates for 1 second 3xFLA P amm c M E Transition i Level gt Transition Time signifies 808725A1 CDR Open Transition FIGURE 5 2 Reduced Voltage Starting Current Characteristic If this feature is used the Starter Status Switch input must be either from a common control contact or a parall
318. n the motor is operating at a load greater than FLA If the motor layg is less than FLA unbalance is defined as 5 4 layg FLA This derating is necessary to prevent nuisance alarms and trips when a motor is lightly loaded The U B BIASED MOTOR LOAD value shows the equivalent motor heating current caused by the unbalance factor 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 71 6 3 2 Temperature CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V A2 METERING DATA gt gt V TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE gt 182 ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE Range HOTTEST STATOR RTD RTD 1 40 C gt RTD 1 Range gt TEMPERATURE 40 C RTD 42 Range gt 40 C gt RT 3 gt 40 C gt 4 TEMPERATURE 40 C 5 gt TEMPERATURE 40 C gt 6 gt 40 C gt 7 gt 40 C RTD 48 Range x TEMPERATURE 40 C gt 9 gt 40 C gt 10 gt 40 C gt RTD 11 x TEMPERATURE 40 C RTD 12 Range gt TEMPERATURE 40 C 50 to 250 C RTD open
319. nbalance Bias Unbalanced phase currents also cause additional rotor heating not accounted for by electromechanical relays and also not accounted for in some electronic protective relays When the motor is running the rotor rotates in the direction of the positive sequence current at near synchronous speed Negative sequence current with a phase rotation opposite to positive sequence current and hence opposite to the rotor rotation generates a rotor voltage that produces a substantial rotor current This induced current has a frequency approximately 2 times the line frequency 100 Hz for a 50 Hz system or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system The skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency causes a significant increase in rotor resistance and therefore a significant increase in rotor heating 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufacturer as these curves assume only positive sequence currents from a perfectly balanced supply and motor design The 469 measures the ratio of negative to positive sequence current The thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current when the motor is running This biasing is accomplished by creating an equivalent motor heating current rather than simply using average current This equivalent current is calculated as shown bel
320. nded as any mistake may cause a nuisance trip The following procedure may be used to access and alter settings This specific example refers to entering a valid passcode to allow access to settings if the passcode was 469 gt Press the MENU key to access the header of each menu which will be displayed in the following sequence ACTUAL VALUES gt TARGET MESSAGES gt Press the MENU key until the display shows the header of the Settings menu gt Press the MESSAGE gt or ENTER key to display the header for the first settings page The set point pages are numbered have an S prefix for easy identification and have a name which gives a general idea of the settings available in that page Pressing the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys will scroll through all the available settings page headers Settings page headers look as follows 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 gt enter a given Settings page press the MESSAGE ENTER key gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys to scroll through sub page headers until the required message is reached The end of a page is indicated by the message END OF PAGE The beginning of a page is indicated by TOP OF PAGE Each page is broken further into subgroups Press MESSAGE or MESSAGE A to cycle through subgroups until the desired subgroup appears on the screen gt Pressthe MESSAGE ENTER key to ente
321. ng or slightly higher then the thermal memory is fully biased and THERMAL CAPACITY USED is forced to 100 At values between the maximum and minimum the THERMAL CAPACITY USED created by the overload curve and the thermal model is compared to the Bias thermal capacity used from the Bias curve If the RTD Bias thermal capacity used value is higher then that value is used from that point onward The RTD BIAS CENTER POINT should be set at the rated motor running temperature The 469 automatically determines the THERMAL CAPACITY USED value for the center point using the HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO settings at 8c 1 hot cold x 10096 EQ 5 8 At RTD Bias Center temperature Bias zu D edite EQ 5 9 used T center At RTD Bias Center temperature Taetual T RTD Bias E uve en 100 sea at rac TCused at RBC EQ 5 10 center where Bias TC used due to hottest stator RTD Tactual current temperature of the hottest stator RTD Tmin RTD Bias minimum settings Teenter RTD Bias center settings Tmax RTD Bias maximum settings TCused at Rac used defined by the HOT COLD SAFE STALL RATIO settings 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 57 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS In simple terms the RTD bias feature is real feedback of the measured stator temperature This feedback acts as correction of t
322. ngs will appear PATH SETTINGS S5 THERMAL MODEL gt V OVERLOAD CURVE SETUP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s steps of 0 1 OVERLOAD 6 1 01 x FLA gt TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE 1 05 x FLA gt TO TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of O 1 ESSAG 1 10 x FLA 0 09 09 09 9 09 09 09 07 69 07 69 69 09 0 Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s steps of 0 1 ESSAG 1 20 x FLA 795 4 rm TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 1 30 x FLA 507 2 ESSAG Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 1 40 x FLA 364 6 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 1 50 x FLA 280 0 ESSAGE TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAG 1 75 x FLA 169 7 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSAG TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA ius TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 ESSA TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 eT TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 TIME TO TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 TIME TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 Range 0 5 10 99999 9
323. ni eror tre differential phase current digitali deter ground CUEN ie phase current E INSERTION tree rh INSPECTION CHECKLIST INSTALLATION description ccce teta electrical mechanical putting the relay in Ready state SetpointS INTENTIONAL S C TRIP DELAY J JOGGING BLOCK SOLD 5 67 5 wie esses 2 9 L LAST TRIP DATA actual values test switch LEARNED DATA 6 27 LEARNED PARAMETERS mero hee e Soares 5 24 6 27 LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY eie RN RR 6 27 EEARNED STARTING CURRENT ttti tete OH E Orte 6 27 LED INDICATORS LINE VOLTAGE MINIMUM ceteri teer peer reris LOAD SHED frequency edet arbe b de e Pee ee dern specifications tiim nr LOAD SHED TRIP Lu eet ene eri ie e Date re ERES LOCKOUT TIME te LONG TERM STORAGE ee eee e ERRORES LOOP POWERED TRANSDUCER CONNECTION 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL
324. nning during default message display This might be useful for reminding operators to perform certain tasks The messages may be entered from the communications ports or through the keypad The following procedure demonstrates the use of the message scratchpad 1 Select the user message to be changed 2 Press the decimal key to enter text mode An underline cursor will appear under the first character 3 Use the VALUE keys to display the desired character A space is selected like a character 4 Press the decimal key to advance to the next character To skip over a char acter press the decimal key If an incorrect character is accidentally stored press the decimal key enough times to scroll the cursor around to the character 5 When the desired message is displayed press ENTER to store or ESCAPE to quit 5 2 7 Clear Data The message is now permanently stored Press ESCAPE to cancel the altered message PATH SETTINGS gt S1 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA CLEAR CLEAR LAST TRIP Range No Yes DATA D DATA No ESSAGE gt RESET MWh and Range No Yes gt Mvarh ESSAGE CLEAR PEAK DEMAND No Yes lt gt DATA No ESSAGE gt CLEAR RTD Range No Yes i gt MAXIMUMS ESSAGE CLEAR ANALOG I P Range Yes gt No CLEAR TRIP Range No Yes i 4 gt COUNTERS No ESSAGE PRESET DIGITAL Range No Yes lt gt couNTER
325. nterruption of the process ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS Alarm the Alarm contact could be use for local indication or to send local signal to reduce load before a trip is issued THERMAL CAP ALARM LEVEL 8096 THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM EVENT Yes captures event in the event report As well select the overload curve for the Thermal model with the following settings in the S5 THERMAL MODEL gt V OVERLOAD CURVE SETUP menu STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE NUMBER 7 1 4 7 56 Current Elements The S6 Current Elements settings page contains settings for entering protection element characteristics In our example these characteristics are specified under Motor Protection heading From this data and the resulting calculations program the S6 settings page as indicated When setting the relay for the first time other settings not listed in this example should be left disabled 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 33 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED For the Short Circuit element enter the following values in the 86 CURRENT ELEMENTS gt SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP page Press the MESSAGE key after each settings is entered to move to the next message SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP Latched SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP OVEREACH FILETER Off no filtering of DC component is required refer to Short Circuit Trip on page 5 59 for additional information ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP PICKUP 11 7 INTENTIONAL S C TRIP DELAY 0 ms Inst
326. ntical see Upgrading Settings Files to a New Revision on page 4 31 for details on changing the Settings file version gt Right click on the selected file Select the Write Settings to Device item The 469 Setup software will generate the following warning message to remind the user to remove the relay from service before attempting to load settings into an in service relay 469Setup A Warning Make sure the relay is removed from protection penes Select the target relay from the list of devices shown gt Click Send If there is an incompatibility an error of the following type will occur x A Incompatible device order codes or versions Target 469 Version 4 00 Source 469 Version 2 80 Please use Properties in File menu to convert version If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the Settings file the data will be transferred to the relay An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in the bottom of the main menu 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES 4 5 Upgrading Relay Firmware 4 5 1 Description To upgrade the 469 firmware follow the procedures listed in this section Upon successful completion of this procedure the 469 will have new firmware installed with the original settings The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at http www GEindustrial com multilin
327. ny key returns the last message viewed AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD CALCULATION PERIOD This settings adjusts the period of time over which the average motor load is calculated The calculation is a sliding window and is ignored during motor starting TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Temperature measurements may be displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit Each temperature value is displayed as C or F RTD settings are always displayed in degrees Celsius TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER POSITION Sets the trigger position for waveform capture This value represents the percentage of cycles captured and recorded in the trace memory buffer prior to the trigger trip TRACE MEMORY BUFFERS Sets the number of traces to capture and the number of cycles for each of the 10 waveforms captured Note 10 waveforms are captured for each trace showing all currents and voltages DISPLAY UPDATE INTERVAL Sets the duration for which the metered current and voltage readings are averaged before being displayed It does not affect relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 9 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS protection or function timing in any way It can be used to steady the display when readings are bouncing e MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL This value when non zero averages current and power factor for the programmed number of cycles using a running average technique This settings is intended for use on synchronous motors running at low RPM and driving reciprocating loads
328. o default using the 51 469 SETUP gt V INSTALLATION RESET MOTOR INFORMATION settings If motor load during starting is relatively consistent the LEARNED ACCELERATION TIME may be used to fine tune the acceleration protection Learned acceleration time will be the longest time of the last five successful starts The time is measured from the transition of motor current from zero to greater than overload pickup until line current falls below the overload pickup level LEARNED STARTING CURRENT is measured 200 ms after the transition of motor current from zero to greater than overload pickup This should ensure that the measured current is symmetrical The value displayed is the average of the last 5 successful starts If there are less than 5 starts Os will be averaged in for the full 5 starts The LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY is used to determine if there is enough thermal capacity to permit a start refer to Start Inhibit on page 5 66 for more information on start inhibit If there is not enough thermal capacity for a start a start inhibit will be issued Starting will be blocked until there is sufficient thermal capacity 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 27 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 4 2 Average Motor Load PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V LEARNED DATA gt V AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD AVERAGE MOTOR Range 0 00 to 20 00 LOAD LEARNED 0 00 x MOTOR LOAD FLA The 469 can learn the average motor load over a period of t
329. on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site Enterthe desired site name in the Site Name field If desired a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site In this example we will use Pumping Station 2 as the site name Click the OK button when complete The new site will appear in the upper left list gt Click the Add Device button to define the new device gt Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description optional 4 18 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 gt Select Ethernet from the Interface drop down list Device Setup E Pumping Station 1 Pumping Station 2 B V 4 3 4 Connecting to the Relay This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality Enter the IP address assigned to the relay Enter the slave address and Modbus port values from the 51 469 SETUP gt V SERIAL PORTS menu in the Slave Address and Modbus Port fields Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 469 device and upload the order code communications error occurs ensure that the 469 Ethernet communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values Click OK when the relay order cod
330. one value of stall current and therefore only one safe stall time NOTE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS The following two figures illustrate the resultant overload protection curves for 8096 and 10096 line voltage respectively For voltages in between the 469 will shift the acceleration curve linearly and constantly based on measured line voltage during a motor start e GE Multilin HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP 13 2 kV REACTOR COOLANT PUMP 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 TIME TO TRIP SECONDS 8 20 Oo gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS 806825 4 FIGURE 5 12 Voltage Dependent Overload Protection at 80 Voltage 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 54 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS GE Multilin HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP 13 2 kV REACTOR COOLANT PUMP 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 TIME TO TRIP SECONDS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS 806826A4 CDR FIGURE 5 13 Voltage Dependent Overload Protection at 10096 Voltage U
331. only if at least 1 RTD is set gt as Stator 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 5 Y NOTE CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES HOTTEST BEARING Range 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F ESSAGE RTD Seen only if at least 1 RTD is set as Bearing HOTTEST OTHER RTD Range 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F ESSAGE S ly if at least 1 RTD is set RTD 11 0 C Pre een only if at leas is se as Other AMBIENT RTD Range 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F ESSAGE Seen only if at least 1 RTD is set RTD 12 0 C Pre as Ambient Vab 0 Vbc Range 0 to 20000 V Not seen if VT ESSAGE 0 Connection is set as None Van 0 Vbn Range 0 to 20000 V Seen only if VT ESSAGE Connection is set as Wye Range Not seen if VT Connect set as PRETRIP SYSTEM FREQUENCY 0 00 None 0 kW 0 Range 50000 to 50000 kVA Not seen ESSAGE kVA if VT Connection set as None POWER FACTOR Range 0 01 to 0 99 Lead or Lag 0 00 PreTrip 0 00 1 00 Not seen if VT Connection is set as None Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if Analog Input 1 is Disabled ESSAGE ESSAGE PreTrip 0 Units Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if ESSAGE Analog Input 2 is Disabled PreTrip 0 Units Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if ESSAGE Analog Input 3 is Disabled PreTrip 0 Units Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if Analog Input 4 is Disabled 9 06009060 09 69 09 69 09 69 69 69 Pils Sills Bilw H H H H
332. or Diagram for Wye Connection Using the same example as for the open delta connection except for CONNECTION TYPE setting to Wye the following quantities are displayed by the relay and EnerVista 469 Setup software In the A2 METERING DATA gt V VOLTAGE METERING menu VAB 4025 Volts VBC 4025 Volts VCA 4025 Volts AVERAGE LINE VOLTAGE 4025 Volts VAN 2323 Volts 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 23 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES VBN 2323 Volts VCN 2323 Volts AVERAGE PHASE VOLTAGE 2323 Volts SYSTEM FREQUENCY 60 00 Hz In the A2 METERING DATA PHASORS menu VA PHASOR 95 8 at 0 Lag VB PHASOR 95 896 at 120 Lag VC PHASOR 95 896 at 240 Lag IA PHASOR 100 096 at 18 Lag IB PHASOR 100 096 at 138 Lag IC PHASOR 100 096 at 258 Lag The following phasor diagram illustrates the system vector diagram where the vT CONNECTION TYPE setting is selected as Wye By definition power factor is the cosine of the angle between the phase to neutral voltages and the corresponding phase current In this example 18 2 is the angle between Van and la Vbn and Ib and Vcn and Ic The phase to phase quantities are not shown in the A2 METERING DATA gt V PHASORS menu and the EnerVista 469 Setup software However they are shown on the following figure Phase Rotation gt 0c System Voltages Van Vab Vbn Vbc Vcn Vca Vab Measured Voltages G2 G1 V
333. or output could be taken to one of the assignable digital inputs configured as a counter or tachometer Refer to Specifications on page 2 6 for maximum current draw from the 24 V DC switch supply 3 2 7 Analog Inputs The 469 provides terminals for four to 1mA 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA current input signals field programmable This current signal can be used to monitor external quantities such as vibration pressure or flow The four inputs share one common return Polarity of these inputs must be observed for proper operation The analog input circuitry is isolated as a group with the analog output circuitry and the RTD circuitry Only one ground reference should be used for the three circuits Transorbs limit this isolation to x36 V with respect to the 469 safety ground In addition the 24 V DC analog input supply is brought out for control power of loop powered transducers Refer to Specifications on page 2 6 for maximum current draw from this supply ANALOG 1 0 ANALOG INPUTS 4 SHIELD Vac 1 2 3 4 A20 21 22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 e SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL VIBRATION VIBRATION FLOW PRESSURE MOTOR MOTOR BEARING BEARING LOOP POWERED TRANSDUCERS 806818A3 DWG FIGURE 3 21 Loop Powered Transducer Connection 3 2 8 Analog Outputs T
334. ormal running temperature but below the bearing temperature rating Trip voting has been added for extra reliability in the event of RTD malfunction If enabled a second RTD must also exceed the trip temperature of the RTD being checked before a trip will be issued If the RTD is chosen to vote with itself the voting feature is disabled Each RTD name may be changed if desired 5 9 4 RTD 11 PATH SETTINGS gt V S8 RTD TEMPERATURE V RTD 11 RTD 11 MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE lt gt lt gt lt gt 02 8 lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt F gt 2 tg lt gt 11 11 ALARM ASSIGN ALARM RTD 11 ALARM TEMPERATURE 809 7 HIGH ALARM RTD 11 HIGH ALARM RTD 11 ALARM EVENTS Off RTD 11 TRIP Off RTD 11 TRIP VOT ING RTD 11 TRIP TEMPERATURE 90 C 6 RTD 11 APPLICA Range gt TION Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Stator Bearing Ambient Other None 8 alphanumeric characters Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatche
335. ormation e DATE ENTRY WAS OUT OF RANGE This message appears if and invalid entry is made for the DATE e g 15 entered for month e DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN ADDED Any time a new default message is added to the default message list this message will appear as verification e DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN REMOVED Any time a default message is removed from the default message list this message will appear as verification e DEFAULT MESSAGE LIST IS FULL If an attempt is made to add a new default message to the default message list when 20 messages are already assigned this message will appear In order to add a message one of the existing messages must be removed e DEFAULT MESSAGES 6 of 20 ARE ASSIGNED This message appears each time the 51 469 SETUP gt V DEFAULT MESSAGES settings group is entered It notifies the user of the number of assigned default messages e END OF LIST This message will indicate when the bottom of a subgroup has been reached e OF PAGE This message will indicate when the bottom of a page has been reached e ENTER NEW PASSCODE FOR ACCESS If the passcode is zero the passcode security feature is disabled If the Change Passcode settings is entered as yes this flash message will appear prompting the user to enter a non zero passcode which in turn will enable the feature e INPUT FUNCTION IS ALREADY ASSIGNED The Assignable Digital Input functions may only be used once If an attempt is made to assign
336. ort Options dialog box will appear gt Select Actual Values in the upper section gt Select either Include All Features for a complete list or Include Only Enabled Features for a list of only those features which are currently used in the filtering section gt Click OK Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device in the device list and selecting the Print Device Information option Loading Settings from a File An error message will occur when attempting to download a Settings file with a revision number that does not match the relay firmware If the firmware has been upgraded since saving the Settings file see Upgrading Settings Files to a New Revision on page 4 31 for instructions on changing the revision number of a Settings file The following procedure illustrates how to load settings from a file Before loading a Settings file it must first be added to the EnerVista 469 Setup environment as described in Adding Settings Files to the Environment on page 4 24 gt Select the previously saved Settings file from the File pane of the EnerVista 469 Setup software main window gt Select the File gt Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the target relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 33 4 34 4 5 If the versions are ide
337. ose coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the start control circuit for a contactor application A contactor sealing contact would be used to maintain the circuit For details on issuing a start or stop command via communications refer to the GE Publication GEK 106491 469 Communications Guide Make the following changes to the communications settings in the 82 SYSTEM SETUP gt V SERIAL COMM CONTROL page SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL On ASSIGN START CONTROL RELAYS Auxiliary2 The Auxiliary 2 relay will be used to start the motor Note that this auxiliary relay can not be used for any other application 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 51 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED Once the signal is received the motor will be started across the line Therefore the following settings are left with their default values In the S2 SYSTEM SETUP gt V REDUCE VOLTAGE STARTING settings page REDUCE VOLTAGE STARTING Off ASSIGN CONTROL RELAYS Auxiliary3 available for other use TRANSITION ON Current Only ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS Trip REDUCE VOLTAGE START LEVEL 10096 FLA REDUCE VOLTAGE START TIMER 200 s 1 4 5 53 Digital Inputs Settings The S3 settings page is for entering the characteristics of the digital inputs In our example these characteristics are specified under the Control System Requirements heading Program the S3 settings as indicated Some of the functions assigned to the digital inp
338. ote Reset Only ESSAGE All Resets Keypad Reset Only A latched trip or alarm may be reset at any time providing that the condition that caused the trip or alarm is no longer present Unlatched trips and alarms will reset automatically once the condition is no longer present If any condition may be reset the Reset Possible LED will be lit All Block Start features reset automatically when the lockout time has expired and the trip has been reset The other relays may be programmed to Resets which allows reset from the front keypad or the remote reset switch input or the communications port Optionally relays 1 through 6 may be programmed to reset by the Remote Reset Only by the remote reset switch input or the communications port or Keypad Reset Only reset only by relay keypad NO trip or alarm element must EVER be assigned to two output relays where one is Remote Reset Only and the other is Keypad Reset Only The trip or alarm will not be resettable if this occurs 5 34 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS For example serious trips such as Short Circuit and Ground Fault may be assigned to the 2 AUXILIARY relay so that they can only be reset via the remote reset terminals D18 and 023 or the communication port The remote reset terminals should be connected to a keyswitch so that only authorized personnel could reset such a critical trip e Assign only Short Circuit and Ground Fault to th
339. ounters b General counter such as number of motor starts number of emergency restarts number of starter operations digital counter for other purposes not listed above C Timers such as motor running hours time between starts timer and five start timers used to calculate the average start time of the motor RTD Learned Data which includes the maximum temperature measured by each of the 12 RTDs Event recorder downloading tool Product information including model number firmware version additional product information and calibration dates Oscillography downloading tool Alarm trip conditions diagnostics and system flash messages are grouped under Target Messages gt Press the MENU key to access the header of each menu which will be displayed in the following sequence SETTINGS To access settings 1 4 gt Press the MENU key until the display shows the header of the Settings menu gt Press the MESSAGE ENTER key to display the header for the first Settings page The Settings pages are numbered have an S prefix for easy identification and have a name which provides a general idea of the settings available in that page Pressing the MESSAGE W and MESSAGE A keys will scroll through all the available Settings page headers Settings page headers look as follows 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED SETTINGS gt 51 RELAY SETUP To ent
340. ous trips during a start if the trip is less than 50 ms 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 2 4 Alarm Status PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V ALARM STATUS M ALARM NO ALARMS STATUS gt 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 9 09 9 09 00 09 09 69 09 69 09 69 69 09 69 9 09 09 ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAG rm ESSAGE ESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL REMOTE ALARM STATUS Active PRESSURE SWITCH VIBRATION SWITCH DIG COUNTER ALARM TACHOMETER GENERAL SW A u u n H w H H gt gt gt H o H H d o d d ALARM 100 USED XX XX x FLA OVER UNDERCURRENT ALARM CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM 15 GROUND FAULT ALARM 25 3 A STATOR RTD 1 ALARM 135 C OPEN SENSOR ALARM SHORT LOW TEMP ALARM UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Vab 4992 V 120 SYSTEM FREQUENCY ALARM 59 4 Hz POWER FACTOR ALARM PF 0 00 Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range N A Message seen when no alarms are active Active Latched Active Latched Active Latched
341. out of the case when pulled by the handle It may sometimes be necessary to adjust the handle position slightly to free the unit FIGURE 3 9 Slide Unit out of Case To insert the unit into the case Raise the locking handle to the highest position gt Hold the unit immediately front of the case and align the rolling guide pins near the hinges of the locking handle to the guide slots on either side of the case gt Slide the unit into the case until the guide pins on the unit have engaged the guide slots on either side of the case gt Grasp the locking handle from the center and press down firmly rotating the handle from the raised position toward the bottom of the unit 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION CAUTION When the unit is fully inserted the latch will be heard to click locking the handle in the final position No special ventilation requirements need to be observed during the installation of the unit The unit does not require cleaning 3 1 5 Ethernet Connection CAUTION If using the 469 with the Ethernet 10Base T option ensure that the network cable is disconnected from the rear RJ45 connector before removing the unit from the case This prevents any damage to the connector The unit may also be removed from the case with the network cable connector still attached to the rear RJ45 connector provided that there is at least 16 of network cable availab
342. ow leg 7 Prec 1 2 EQ 5 3 1 where leg equivalent motor heating current unit unit current based on FLA l negative sequence current 4 positive sequence current k constant The figure below shows recommended motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance recommended by NEMA the National Electrical Manufacturers Association Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 x FLA and a negative sequence impedance of 0 167 voltage unbalances of 1 2 3 4 and 596 equal current unbalances of 6 12 18 24 and 3096 respectively Based on this assumption the GE Multilin curve illustrates the motor derating for different values of k entered for the UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR settings Note that the curve created when k 8 is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve 1 05 1 05 1 00 1 00 oc 095 0 05 it 0 90 ir 0 90 0 2 085 2 0 85 4 E 0 80 080 k 6 P 25 0 0 70 0 70 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE NEMA GE MULTILIN 808728A4 CDR FIGURE 5 14 Medium Motor Derating Factor due to Unbalanced Voltage If a k value of 0 is entered the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured per unit motor current k may be calculated as
343. ow be altered and stored any time the passcode security feature is enabled and a valid passcode is entered settings ACCESS IS NOW RESTRICTED This message appears if the passcode security feature is enabled a valid passcode has been entered and the 51 469 SETUP gt 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES PASSCODE gt SETTINGS ACCESS settings value is Restricted This message also appears anytime that settings access is permitted and the access jumper is removed THIS FEATURE NOT PROGRAMMED If an attempt is made to enter an actual value message subgroup when the settings are not configured for that feature this message will appear TIME ENTRY WAS NOT COMPLETE Since the TIME settings has a special format HH 55 5 if ENTER is pressed before the complete value entered this message appears and the new value is not stored Another attempt will have to be made with the complete information TIME ENTRY WAS OUT OF RANGE If and invalid entry is made for the time e g 35 entered for hour this message will appear TOP OF LIST This message will indicate when the top of subgroup has been reached TOP OF PAGE This message will indicate when the top of a page has been reached 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 41 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 42 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL Digital Energy Multilin 469 Motor Management Relay Chapter 7 Testing 7
344. p 1 01 to 1 25 service factor Pickup accuracy as per phase current Inputs screen 100 ms or 2 of total time El ments ace eu epis Trip and Alarm OVERVOLTAGE PICKUP level ttes 1 01 to 1 10 x rated in steps of 0 01 of any one phase Time delay 0 1 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 iate as per voltage inputs TIMING 100 ms or 0 5 of total time etate Trip and Alarm 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 9 CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION PHASE DIFFERENTIAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT Pick p 0 05 to 1 0 x CT primary in steps of 0 01 of any one phase Tirme delays itte td 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Pickup accuracy as per phase differential current inputs Timing 50 ms duties Trip PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT Pickup level eee 2 0 to 20 0 x CT primary in steps of 0 1 of any one phase Tite delays tte tette 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Pickup accuracy as per phase current inputs Operate time 0 ms time delay 25 ms 60 Hz I gt 1 5 x Pickup 30 ms Q 50 Hz I gt 1 5 x Pickup Timing accuragy 50 ms El rtientss aetatis Trip Applies if Voltage phase A detected Motor Status Running and frequency within 596 of nominal 50ms if these conditions are not met REDUCED VOLTAGE START Tr
345. pages and sub pages as shown below Each page of settings e g S2 SYSTEM SETUP has a section which describes in detail all the settings found on that page SETTINGS 6 PASSCODE lt gt MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE MESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A lt gt COMMUNICATIONS E REAL gt lt gt n gt DEFAULT 2 ___ gt gt CLEAR gt lt gt s INSTALLATION END OF PAGE See page page page page page page page page 10 13 13 14 15 16 5 1 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS gt See page 17 SETTINGS 6 ESSAGE gt 19 gt VOLTAGE ESSAGE See page 19 POWER ESSAGE lt gt SERIAL See page 20 gt gt ESSAGE See page 21 REDUCED ESSAGE END OF PAGE lt gt gt S 25 SETTINGS ESSAGE gt See 25 lt ASSIGNABLE ESSAGE See page 25 lt ASSIGNABLE ESSAGE See page 25 ASSIGNABLE ESSAGE See page 25 ASSIGNABLE ESSAGE END OF PAGE lt gt gt 8 34 SETTINGS RELAY MESSAGE See page 35 gt FORCE MESSAGE E
346. perature rating of 155 C therefore the Stator RTD Trip level should be set to between 140 C to 155 C with 155 C being maximum The RTD alarm level should be set to provide a warning that the motor temperature is rising For this example 135 C would be appropriate since this motor is designed for class B rise 130 C is it s normal hot operating temperature e Bearing RTDs The Bearing RTD alarm and trip settings will be determined by evaluating the temperature specification from the bearing manufacturer Unbalance bias of thermal capacity Enable the Unbalance Bias of Thermal Capacity so that the heating effect of unbalance currents is added to the Thermal Capacity Used Unbalance bias factor The K value is used to calculate the contribution of the negative sequence current flowing in the rotor due to unbalance It is defined as 1 1 where rotor negative sequence resistance rotor positive sequence resistance A formula based on empirical data states that K is equal to 230 divided by the per unit locked rotor current squared From the data sheet the locked rotor amps 63196 FLA or 6 31 x FLA Therefore 230 230 25 6 312 1 2 per unit locked rotor amps e Hot cold curve ratio The hot cold curve ratio is calculated by simply dividing the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time or use the motor thermal limits curve For this example both
347. power system quantities 4 46 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES Active alarms Relay date and time Present blocking conditions General system status indication including the status of output relays active pickup alarm and trip conditions 2 Metering Data Instantaneous current measurements including phase differential unbalance ground average motor load and differential currents RTD Temperatures including hottest stator RTD Instantaneous phase to phase and phase to ground voltages depending on the VT connections average voltage and system frequency Motor Speed Power Quantities including Apparent Real and Reactive Power Current and power demand including peak values Analog inputs Vector information 3 Motor Learned Data Learned Acceleration Time Learned Starting Current Learned Starting Capacity Last Acceleration Time Last Starting Current Last Starting Capacity Average Motor Load Learned 4 Maintenance data This is useful statistical information that may be used for preventive maintenance It includes Trip counters General counter such as Number of Motor Starts Number of Emergency Restarts Number of Starter Operations Digital Counter for other purposes not listed above Timers such as Motor Running Hours Time Between Starts Timer and five Start Timers used to calculate the average start time of the motor 5 RTD Learned Data This incl
348. puts may be used for tripping and alarming on any transducer input such as vibration pressure flow etc 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION S ANSI 51 Overload 86 Overload Lockout e 66 Starts Hour amp Time Between Starts e Restart Block Anti Backspin Timer 50 Short Circuit 4 Short Circuit Backup Mechanical Jam e 32 37 Undercurrent Underpower 46 Current Unbalance 50G 51G Ground Fault 4 Ground Fault Backup 87 Differential e Acceleration e e 49 Stator RTD 38 Bearing RTD Other RTD 4 Ambient RTD Open Alarm e Short Low RTD e 27 59 Undervoltage Overvoltage 47 81 Reactive Power 55 78 Power Factor Analog Input Demand Alarm kW kVA e e SR469 Self Test Service e Trip Coil Supervision e Welded Contactor e Breaker Failure e Remote Switch 14 Speed Switch 4 Tachometer Trip Load Shed Switch Pressure Switch Vibration Switch 19 Reduced Voltage Start 48 Incomplete Sequence Reduced Voltage Start Remote Start Stop e Over Torque Forced Relay Operation e PROCTLAS CDR FIGURE 2 2 Protection Fe
349. r a period of time at full load such that the stator and rotor temperatures have settled at their rated temperature A cold motor is a motor that has been stopped for a period of time such that the stator and rotor temperatures have settled at ambient temperature For most motors the distinct characteristics of the motor thermal limits are formed into a smooth homogeneous curve Sometimes only a safe stall time is provided This is acceptable if the motor has been designed conservatively and can easily perform its required duty without infringing on the thermal limit In this case the protection can be conservative and process integrity is not compromised If a motor has been designed very close to its thermal limits when operated as required then the distinct characteristics of the thermal limits become important The 469 overload curve can take one of three formats Standard Custom Curve or Voltage Dependent Regardless of the selected curve style thermal memory is retained in the A1 STATUS gt MOTOR STATUS gt V MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED register This register is updated every 100 ms using the following equation 100 ms seg att at t 100ms time to trip x 100 EQ 5 1 where time to trip time taken from the overload curve at leg 95 function of FLA The overload protection curve should always be set slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer this will ensure that the motor is tripped b
350. r a subgroup 55 Each sub group has one or more associated settings messages gt Press the MESSAGE or MESSAGE A keys to scroll through settings messages until the desired message appears ENTER PASSCODE FOR ACCESS The majority of settings are changed by pressing the VALUE keys until the desired value appears and then pressing ENTER Numeric settings may also be entered through the numeric keys including decimals If the entered settings is out of range the original settings value reappears If the entered settings is out of step an adjusted value will be stored e g 101 for a settings that steps 95 100 105 is stored as 100 If a mistake is made entering the new value pressing ESCAPE returns the settings to its original value Text editing is a special case described in detail in Entering Alphanumeric Text on page 4 5 Each time a new settings is successfully stored a message will flash on the display stating NEW SETTINGS HAS BEEN STORED gt Press the 4 6 9 keys then press ENTER The following flash message is displayed NEW SETTINGS HAS BEEN STORED SETTINGS ACCESS PERMITTED 1 Press ESCAPE MESSAGE 4 to exit the subgroup Pressing ESCAPE MESSAGE 4 numerous times will always return the cursor to the top of the page and the display returns to 4 1 7 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic messages are automatically displayed for any active conditions in the relay such as trips alarms
351. rag the cursor lines with the left mouse button WAVEFORM The trended data from the 469 relay FIGURE 4 8 Trending Screen 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES 4 6 5 Event Recorder The 469 event recorder can be viewed through the EnerVista 469 Setup software The event recorder stores generator and system information each time an event occurs e g breaker failure A maximum of 256 events can be stored where E256 is the most recent event and E01 is the oldest event E01 is overwritten whenever a new event occurs Refer to Event 01 to Event 256 on page 6 33 for additional information on the event recorder Use the following procedure to view the event recorder with EnerVista 469 Setup With EnerVista 469 Setup running and communications established gt Select the Actual gt A4 Event Recorder item from the main menu This displays the Event Recorder window indicating the list of recorded events with the most current event displayed first EVENT SELECTION EVENT LISTING Select an event row Lists the last 256 events with the most recent displayed at top of list which will be display window to the right f view event data information to EVENT NUMBER ed in the event is shown The event data information is related to the selected CLEAR EVENTS Click the Clear Events button to clear the event list from memory 71 enerVista 469Setup
352. re environment 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES Files Untitled 469 C Program Files GE Power Management 469PC Test 469 C Program Files GE Power Management 463 c New 469 C Program Files GE Device Definition 469 Setup System Setup Digital Inputs Output Relays Protection Monitoring Analog 1 0 469 Testing Two Speed Motor Modbus User Map 9 6 6 8 6 6 69 68 69 D Enter appropriate settings manually to complete the new Settings File Upgrading Settings Files to a New Revision It is often necessary to upgrade the revision code for a previously saved Settings file after the 469 firmware has been upgraded for example this is required for firmware upgrades This is illustrated in the following procedure gt Establish communications with the 469 relay gt Select the Actual gt Product Information menu item gt Record the Software Revision identifier of the relay firmware as shown below 158469 Model Info Pumping Station 1 469 Relay m xi 58469 Model Info Calibration Info SETTIHG Product Hardware Revision Product Software Revision Product Modification Number Boot Program Revision Boot Program Modification Number 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Product Information gt Load the Settings file to be upgraded into the EnerVista 469 Set
353. re provided with each relay Demo Metal Carry Case in which 469 unit may be mounted SR 19 1 Panel Single cutout 19 inch panel SR 19 2 Panel Dual cutout 19 inch panel SCI Module RS232 to RS485 converter box designed for harsh industrial environments Phase CT 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 750 1000 HGF3 HGF5 HGF8 For sensitive ground detection on high resistance grounded systems 469 1 inch Collar For shallow switchgear reduces the depth of the relay by 1 3 8 inches 469 3 inch Collar For shallow switchgear reduces the depth of the relay by 3 inches Optional Mounting Kit Additional mounting support 1819 0030 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 8 2 2 Specifications 2 5 221 Inputs CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION Specifications are subject to change without notice ANALOG CURRENT INPUTS 0 to 1 mA 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20 mA settings Input impedance 226 10 Conversion range 010 21 mA 1 of full scale TYPO c passive Analog in supply 24 V DC at 100 mA max Response time 100 ms DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT INPUTS CIT 110 50004 CT secondary 1Aor 5 settings 0 2 VA at rated load Conversion range 0 02
354. re used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated settings They also decrement and increment numerical settings Numerical settings may also be entered through the numeric keypad Pressing the HELP key displays context sensitive information about settings such as the range of values and the method of changing the settings Help messages will automatically scroll through all messages currently appropriate The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not presently active This includes resetting latched output relays latched Trip LEDs breaker operation failure and trip coil failure 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 The MESSAGE Y and MESSAGE keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring elements that are picked up operating or latched When the Message LED is on there are messages to be viewed with the MENU key by selecting target messages as described earlier Entering Alphanumeric Text Text settings have data values that are fixed in length but user defined in character They may be comprised of upper case letters lower case letters numerals and a selection of special characters The editing and storing of a text value is accomplished with the use of the decimal VALUE and ENTER keys gt Moveto message S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 gt
355. remaining four digital inputs are assignable that is to say the function that the input is used for may be chosen from one of a number of different functions Some of those functions are very specific others may be programmed to adapt to the user requirements If the Two Speed Motor feature is enabled Assignable Input 4 will be dedicated as the Two Speed Motor Monitor Access Switch Terminals C1 and C2 must be shorted to allow changing of any settings values This safeguard is in addition to the settings passcode feature which functions independently see Passcode on page 5 8 Test Switch Once the 469 is in service it may be tested from time to time as part of a regular maintenance schedule The relay will have accumulated statistical information relating historically to starter and motor operation This information includes last trip data demand data if the metering features are in use MWh and Mvarh metering RTD maximums the event record analog input minimums and maximums number of motor trips number of trips by type total motor running hours learned parameters number of starter operations number of motor starts number of emergency restarts and the digital counter Shorting the 469 Test input terminals C3 and C4 prevents all of this data from being corrupted or updated when the relay is under test The In Service LED will flash while the test terminals are shorted Emergency Restart Shorting terminals 017 and 023 dis
356. renaigzteudomusio o 5 19 open delta 5 3 17 6 19 see VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER single VT a eere eer esed MENGE roe 5 19 WIS 3 17 WARRANTY sheer a e io eg n o pec Rte E RARI HP ea A 14 WAVEFORM CAPTURE rS trace memory buffers trace memory trigger WITELBRAMAL sinet re er Hr ere rere epe e EUR 2 ZERO SEQUENCE 3 14 5 18 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL
357. rent 318 A Ground CT ratings 50 5 A Phase Differential CT None Voltage Transformer Connection Type Open Delta Motor Nameplate Voltage 13800 V VT Ratio 115 1 To set the phase CT primary rating modify the 52 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt PHASE CT PRIMARY settings as shown below gt Press the MENU key until the relay displays the Settings menu header SETTINGS Press MESSAGE ENTER SETTINGS Press MESSAGE V Press Press PHASE CT PRIMARY SETTINGS MESSAGE gt CuRRENT MESSAGE gt or ENTER Press VALUE keys until 600 is PHASE CT PRIMARY displayed or enter the value directly via a the numeric keypad Press the ENTER key to store the settings set the phase Motor Full Load Amps FLA modify the 82 SYSTEM SETUP gt CURRENT SENSING gt V MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA settings as shown below gt Press the MENU key until the relay displays the Settings menu header 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 71 SETTINGS Press MESSAGE or ENTER SETTINGS Press MESSAGE V SETTINGS Press MESSAGE ENTER CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 55 PHASE PRIMARY CURRENT MESSAGE gt MOTOR FULL LOAD MESSAGE V AMPS Press the VALUE keys until 318 is MOTOR FULL LOAD displayed or enter the value directly via awps the numeric keypad Press
358. ress 17 User Map Address 18 User Map Address 19 User Map Address 20 User Map Address 21 User Map Address 22 User Map Address 23 User Map Address 24 User Map Address 25 User Map Address 26 User Map Address 27 User Map Address 28 User Map Address 29 User Map Address 30 User Map Address 31 469 Relay 1 Settings Modbus User Map 2 ER This window allows the desired addresses to be written to User Map locations The User Map values that correspond to these addresses are then displayed 4 6 7 Viewing Actual Values You can view real time relay data such as input output status and measured parameters From the main window menu bar selecting Actual Values opens a window with tabs each tab containing data in accordance to the following list 1 Motor and System Status Motor status either stopped starting or running It includes values such as motor load thermal capacity used motor speed and instantaneous values of power system quantities e The status of digital inputs Last trip information including values such as cause of last trip time and date of trip motor speed and load at the time of trip pre trip temperature measurements pre trip analog inputs values and pre trip instantaneous values of
359. rotection for undervoltage conditions before and during starting In the event of system problems causing asymmetrical voltage conditions where at least one voltage remains above pickup an Alarm condition will occur indicating that the voltage on at least one phase is below acceptable levels The trip relay will not be energized unless the UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP MODE is set to 1 Phase The factory default setting for UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP MODE is 1 Phase To prevent for nuisance undervoltage trips due to VT Fuse Failure set the UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP MODE to 3 The alarm relay will be energized in the event of a single phase undervoltage which can also be an indication of a potential VT fuse failure Typically a fuse failure is detected when there are significant levels of negative sequence voltage indicating voltage unbalance due to the loss of one phase without correspondingly significant levels of negative sequence current indicating current unbalance measured at the output CTs If the conditions for Fuse Failure exist an alarm will occur after a time delay due to an undervoltage condition in at least one phase If the motor is running the voltage in the faulted phase will be zero and the measured load current should not indicate a significant amount of negative or unbalance currents Therefore the motor can be kept in service until the opportunity to replace the faulty fuse is available If the alarm is caused by an abnormal
360. rotor conditions voltage is induced in the rotor at line frequency 50 or 60 Hz This voltage causes a current to flow in the rotor also at line frequency and the heat generated is a function of the effective rotor resistance At 50 or 60 Hz the reactance of the rotor cage causes the current to flow at the outer edges of the rotor bars The effective resistance of the rotor is therefore at a maximum during a locked rotor condition as is rotor heating When the motor is running at rated speed the voltage induced in the rotor is at a low frequency lapproximately 1 Hz and therefore the effective resistance of the rotor is reduced quite dramatically During running overloads the motor thermal limit is typically dictated by stator parameters Some special motors might be all stator or all rotor limited During acceleration the dynamic nature of the motor slip dictates that rotor impedance is also dynamic and a third overload thermal limit characteristic is necessary The figure below illustrates typical thermal limit curves The motor starting characteristic is shown for a high inertia load at 8096 voltage If the motor started quicker the distinct characteristics of the thermal limit curves would not be required and the running overload curve would be joined with locked rotor safe stall times to produce a single overload curve The motor manufacturer should provide a safe stall time or thermal limit curves for any motor they sell To program
361. rque Metering is Enabled aNALOG I P 1 Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if ESSAGE Analog Input 1 is Disabled EVENTO1 0 Units ANALOG I P 2 Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if ESSAGE is Di EVENTO1 0 Units Analog Input 2 is Disabled ANALOG 3 Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if ESSAGE is EVENTO1 0 Units Analog Input 5 is Disabled ANALOG I P 4 Range 50000 to 50000 Not seen if ESSAGE gt EVENTO1 0 Units Analog Input 4 is Disabled The event recorder stores motor and system information each time an event occurs An event description is stored along with a time and date stamp for troubleshooting purposes Events include all trips any alarm optionally except Service Alarm and 469 Not Inserted Alarm which always records as events loss of control power application of control power emergency restarts and motor starts when a blocking function is active The latter event could occur if the block start contacts were shorted out to bypass the 469 and start the motor EVENT 01 is the most recent event and EVENT 256 is the oldest event Each new event bumps the other event records up one until EVENT 256 is reached The event record in EVENT 256 is lost when a new event occurs This information can be cleared using the s1 469 SETUP gt V CLEAR DATA D V CLEAR EVENT RECORD settings Table 6 3 Cause of Events Sheet 1 of 2 TRIPS Acceleration Trip Analog Diff 1 2 Trip Analog Diff
362. s 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 8 4 Restart Block PATH SETTINGS S7 MOTOR STARTING gt V RESTART BLOCK Range 1 to 50000 s steps of 1 BLOCK 5 The Restart Block feature may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping a motor and restarting that motor This timer feature may be very useful for some process applications or motor considerations If a motor is on a down hole pump after the motor stops the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin the rotor backwards It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time In another scenario a motor may be driving a very high inertia load Once the supply to the motor is disconnected the rotor may continue to turn for a long period of time as it decelerates The motor has now become a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase may result in catastrophic failure The Restart Block feature is strictly a timer The 469 does not sense rotor rotation wv NOTE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 9 S8 RTD Temperature 5 9 1 RTD Types PATH SETTINGS S8 RTD TEMPERATURE gt RTD TYPES RTD 9 STATOR RTD Range see below TYPES gt 100 Ohm Platinum gt RTD TYPE Range see below MESSAGE amp 100 Ohm Platinum gt AMBIENT RT
363. s are true e setpoint System Nominal Frequency is Variable e Input Voltage is not at frequency 60 Hz 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 81 5 113 Reactive Power CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS PATH SETTINGS gt V S10 POWER ELEMENTS gt V REACTIVE POWER BLOCK kvar ELE Range 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 REACTIVE MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAG rm ESSAGE gt REACTIVE POWER Range ALARM Off gt ASSIGN ALARM Range gt RELAYS gt POSITIVE kvar Range lt gt ALARM gt NEGATIVE kvar Range ALARM gt REACTIVE POWER Range gt ALARM gt POWER gt ALARM gt POWER Range TRIP Off gt ASSIGN TRIP Range POSITIVE kvar Range TRIP gt NEGATIVE kvar Range TRIP REACTIVE POWER Range A TRIP Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 0 2 to 30 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 0 2 to 30 0 5 in steps of 0 1
364. s selected during settings programming are displayed If any alarm or trip condition is generated a diagnostic message overrides the displayed message and this indicator flashes If there is more than one condition present MESSAGE can be used to scroll through the messages Pressing any other key return to the normally displayed messages While viewing normally displayed messages the Message LED continues to flash if any diagnostic message is active To return to the 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 diagnostic messages from the normally displayed messages press the MENU key until the following message is displayed TARGET MESSAGES gt Now press the MESSAGE P key followed the MESSAGE key to scroll through the messages Note that diagnostic messages for alarms disappear with the condition while diagnostic messages for trips remain until cleared by a reset Motor Status LED Indicators e STOPPED The motor is stopped based on zero phase current and starter status auxiliary contact feedback STARTING Motor is starting RUNNING Motor is running normally below overload pickup level e OVERLOAD Motor is running above overload pickup e UNBALANCE PICKUP Level of current unbalance has exceeded the unbalance alarm or trip level e GROUND PICKUP Level of ground current has exceeded the ground fault alarm trip level e One of the RTD measuremen
365. s 100 Q Platinum DIN 43760 100 Q Nickel 120 Nickel or 10 2 Copper RTDs must be three wire type Every two RTDs shares a common return The RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance provided that each of the three leads is the same length Lead resistance should not exceed 25 Q per lead for platinum nickel RTDs or 3 Q per lead for copper RTDs Shielded cable should be used to prevent noise pickup in the industrial environment RTD cables should be kept close to grounded metal casings and away from areas of high electromagnetic or radio interference RTD leads should not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as high current carrying wires 469 Ru 3 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE MOTOR RELAY Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors CHASSIS TERMINALS GROUND MOTOR SHIELD B1 o E z wo RTD IN Gls 2 A compensation A2 OR BEARING RTD N TERMINALS Maximum total lead resistance IN MOTOR 25 ohms Platinum amp Nickel RTDs STARTER 3 ohms Copper RTDs 806819A5 CDR FIGURE 3 22 RTD Wiring B IMPORTANT The circuitry 15 isolated as a group with the Analog Input circuitry and v the Analog Output circuitry Only one ground reference should be used for the three circuits Transorbs limit this isolation to 36 V with respect to the 469 safety ground Reduced RTD Lead Number Application The 469 requir
366. s how to create new Settings Files gt Inthe File pane right click on File gt Select the New Settings File item The EnerVista 469 Setup software displays the following window allowing the configuration of the Settings File as shown below Note that this window allows you to choose between creating your Settings File manually or using the Motor Settings Auto Config as detailed above 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 29 New Settings File CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that settings not available 2 in a particular version are downloaded into the relay NOTE gt gt 4 30 Select the Firmware Version for the new Settings File For future reference enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the device and the purpose of the file To select a file name and path for the new file click the button beside the File Name box Select the file name and path to store the file or select any displayed file name to update an existing file All 469 Settings Files should have the extension 469 for example motor1 469 Click the appropriate radio button yes or no to choose between Auto Config or manual creation of the Settings File Click OK to complete the process Once this step is completed the new file with a complete path will be added to the EnerVista 469 Setup softwa
367. s in steps of 0 1 ESSAG gt TO TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 5 TO TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 s in steps of 0 1 18 2 ESSAGE gt H N N N N Kile la kls Kis Kie Kila kls kli alle x x x Sam w ds Ui HE e D ad D di o w w lt 5 46 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 9 69 09 69 69 09 00 09 69 09 60 09 69 09 69 69 09 69 AH H H gt 16 2 TIME TO TRIP AT 5 00 x FLA 14 6 TIME TO TRIP AT 5 50 x FLA 12 0 TIME TO TRIP AT 6 00 x FLA 10 0 TIME TO TRIP AT 6 50 x FLA 8 5 s TIME TO TRIP AT TIME TO TRIP AT TIME TO TRIP AT 8 00 x FLA 5 6 s TIME TO TRIP AT 10 0 x FLA 5 6 s TIME TO TRIP AT 15 0 x FLA 5 6 s TIME TO TRIP AT 2 H f E E z LINE VOLTAGE 80 n N H g BIS tj 5 2 5 2 5 H 2 SAFE STALL TIME ine 20 0 s H 2 lt m 3 M p Q Q Ei
368. s will appear On solidly grounded systems where fault currents may be quite large the 469 1A or 5A secondary ground CT 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 17 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS input should be used for either zero sequence or residual ground sensing If the connection is residual the Ground CT secondary and primary values should be the same as the phase CT If however the connection is zero sequence the Ground CT secondary and primary values must be entered The Ground CT primary should be selected such that potential fault current does not exceed 20 times the primary rating When relaying class CTs are purchased this precaution will ensure that the Ground CT does not saturate under fault conditions The PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CT PRIMARY must be entered if the differential feature is to be used If two CTs are used per phase in a vectorial summation configuration the CTs should be chosen to ensure there is no saturation during motor starting If however a core balance CT is used for the differential protection in each phase a low CT rating of 50 or 100 A allows for very sensitive differential protection When the two speed motor feature is used a value for a second set of Phase CTs and motor FLA must be entered here for Speed 2 If the Phase CTs are the same as the speed 1 phase CTs simply enter the same value here as well Example 1 Consider a 469 with a 5 A Phase CT secondary and Ground Fault Detection set to Residual
369. sion Product code 30 469 FIGURE 4 6 Firmware File Format The EnerVista 469 Setup software automatically lists all filenames beginning with 30 Select the appropriate file gt Click OK to continue The software will prompt with another Upload Firmware Warning window This will be the final chance to cancel the firmware upgrade before the flash memory is erased Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the upgrade A C Program Files GE Power Managementl469PClFirmwarel30H400A8 000 will be uploaded to relay continue Yes No The EnerVista 469 Setup software now prepares the 469 to receive the new firmware file The 469 will display a message indicating that it is in Upload Mode While the file is being loaded into the 469 a status box appears showing how much of the new firmware file has been transferred and how much is remaining as well as the upgrade status The entire transfer process takes approximately five minutes Update Firmware Pumping Station 1 469 Rel UPLOADING FIRMWARE TO DEVICE PLEASE WAIT p STATUS Turing Flash Mode 1 4 The EnerVista 469 Setup software will notify the user when the 469 has finished loading the file gt Carefully read any displayed messages Click OK to return the main screen 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 iy Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade N
370. solute difference in units or a percentage difference The second analog input 2 for 1 2 is used as the reference value for percentage calculations The comparison logic can also be selected as one input greater than the other 1 gt 2 or vice versa 2 1 or as absolute difference 1 lt gt 27 The compared analog inputs must be programmed with the same un 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL its type prior to programming this feature 5 95 5 96 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS For example two motors on a dual motor drive are each protected a 469 The motors should be at the same power level KW Connect the analog outputs programmed for kW from both relays to the analog inputs of one relay Program the analog input differential to monitor the two motors kW and trip at a predetermined level 5 13 4 Analog Input Diff 3 4 PATH SETTINGS S12 ANALOG ANALOG INPUT DIFF 3 4 ANALOG INPUT gt ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE NOTE 9 09 09 09 09 09 9 69 09 69 09 9 09 e zl el 2 PH ORS EI BI B TB Al BH BI B OJIK Q o Q Q 2 Q Q Q Q 2 Q H Q Q Q Q Q H H H H H H H H tj H H H H H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 H H
371. speed as an impedance relay would The change in impedance is reflected by motor terminal voltage and line current For any given speed at any given line voltage there is only one value of line current 5 48 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS e GE Multilin HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP 13 2 kV REACTOR COOLANT PUMP 1000 900 800 10 1 Running Overload Thermal Limit 600 2 Acceleration Thermal Limit 80 V 500 3 Acceleration Thermal Limit 100 V 4 Locked Rotor Thermal Limit 400 5 Motor Acceleration Curve 80 V 6 Motor Acceleration Curve 1007 V 300 200 0 100 90 _ 8 2 8 g 92 n 40 30 2 V 10 9 8 T 5 0 5 4 3 i O 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS 806821A4 CDR FIGURE 5 8 Thermal Limits for High Inertial Load To illustrate the Voltage Dependent Overload Curve feature the thermal limits of FIGURE 5 8 Thermal Limits for High Inertial Load will be used 1 Construct a custom curve for the running overload thermal limit If the curve does not extend to the acceleration thermal limits extend it such that the curve intersects the acceleration thermal limit curves see the Custom Curve below 2 Enter the per unit current value for the acceleration overload
372. st be explicitly set in the relay via the interface from which access is desired A front panel command can disable settings access once all modifications are complete For the communications ports writing an invalid passcode into the register previously used to enable settings access disables access In addition settings access is automatically disabled on an interface if no activity is detected for thirty minutes The EnerVista 469 Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relay s passcode as well as enabling and disabling settings access For example when an attempt is made to modify a settings but access is restricted the software will prompt the user to enter the passcode and send it to the relay before the settings is actually written to the relay If a SCADA system is used for relay programming it is the programmer s responsibility to incorporate appropriate security for the application 1 3 2 The HELP Key Pressing the HELP key displays context sensitive information about settings such as the range of values and the method of changing the settings Help messages will automatically scroll through all messages currently appropriate 1 3 3 Numerical Settings Each numerical settings has its own minimum maximum and step value These parameters define the acceptable settings value range Two methods of editing and storing a numerical settings value are available The first method uses the 469 numeric keypad in the sa
373. started loaded the BLOCK UNDERCURRENT FROM START settings should be disabled programmed as 07 The UNDERCURRENT ALARM DELAY UNDERCURRENT TRIP DELAY is typically set as quick as possible i e 1 second 5 7 5 Current Unbalance PATH SETTINGS gt V S6 CURRENT ELEM gt V CURRENT UNBALANCE UNBALANCE Range Off Latched Unlatched CURRENT ALARM Off ASSIGN ALARM Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 MESSAGE RELAYS Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 4 to 40 in steps of 1 ALARM PICKUP 15 9 69 09 69 69 09 69 ESSAGE CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 1 to 60 s in steps of 1 15 ESSAGE CURRENT UNBALANCE Range On Off ALARM EVENTS Off ESSAGE CURRENT UNBALANCE Range Off Latched Unlatched TRIP Off ESSAGE ASSIGN TRIP Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp ESSAGE BELAYS amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 4 to 40 in steps of 1 ESSAGE TRIP PICKUP 20 CURRENT UNBALANCE Range 1 to 60 s in steps of 1 TRIP DELAY 1 s ESSAGE For the 469 relay unbalance is defined as the ratio of negative sequence to positive sequence current l2 l4 if the motor is operating at a load greater than FLA If the motor layg is less than FLA unbalance is defined as 2 11 x layg FLA This derating is necessary to prevent nuisance alarms when a mo
374. t also de energizes when 469 control power is lost and will be in its operated state All other 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION WARNING relays being non failsafe will normally be de energized and energize when called upon to operate When the 469 control power is lost these relays are de energized and in their non operated state Shorting bars in the drawout case ensure that no trip or alarm occurs when the 469 is drawn out However the 6 SERVICE output will indicate that the 469 has been drawn out Each output relay has an LED indicator on the front panel that turns on when the associated relay is in the operated state Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the 469 is energized If the output relay contacts are required for low voltage accessible applications it is the customer s responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels 1 TRIP The trip relay should be wired to take the motor off line when conditions warrant For a breaker application the normally open 1 TRIP contact should be wired in series with the Breaker trip coil For contactor applications the normally closed 1 TRIP contact should be wired in series with the contactor coil Supervision of a breaker trip coil requires that the supervision circuit be in parallel with the 1 TRIP relay output contacts With this connection made the supervision input circuits place an impedance across the contacts that draws a 2 mA
375. tecting the motor must be able to distinguish between a locked rotor condition an accelerating condition and a running condition The Voltage Dependent 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 47 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Overload Curve feature is tailored to protect these types of motors Voltage is continually monitored during motor starting and the acceleration thermal limit curve is adjusted accordingly The Voltage Dependent Overload Curve is comprised of the three characteristic shapes of thermal limit curves as determined by the stall or locked rotor condition acceleration and running overload The curve is constructed by entering a custom curve shape for the running overload protection curve Next a point must be entered for the acceleration protection curve at the point of intersection with the custom curve based on the minimum allowable starting voltage as defined by the minimum allowable line voltage The locked rotor current and safe stall time must also be entered for that voltage A second point of intersection must be entered for 10096 line voltage Once again the locked rotor current and the safe stall time must be entered this time for 10096 line voltage The protection curve created from the safe stall time and intersection point will be dynamic based on the measured line voltage between the minimum allowable line voltage and the 10096 line voltage This method of protection inherently accounts for the change in motor
376. ted for the measured values in the 469 when the simulation mode is Simulate Pre Fault 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 99 5 14 3 Fault Setup PATH SETTINGS S13 469 TESTING gt V FAULT SETUP B FAULT ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAG ESSAGE ESSAG rm ESSAG rm ESSAG rn ESSAG ESSAG ESSAG rm FAULT CURRENT Range PHASE B 0 00 x gt FAULT CURRENT Range PHASE C 0 00 x gt FAULT GROUND Range gt CURRENT 0 0 gt FAULT VOLTAGES Range gt VLINE 1 00 x gt FAULT CURRENT Range LAGS VOLTAGE 0 gt FAULT DIFF AMPS Range gt IDIFF 0 00 x CT FAULT STATOR Range gt RTD TEMP 40 C gt FAULT BEARING Range gt RTD TEMP 40 C gt FAULT OTHER Range gt RTD TEMP 40 C FAULT AMBIENT Range gt RTD TEMP 40 C FAULT SYSTEM Range lt gt FREQUENCY 60 0 gt FAULT ANALOG Range gt INPUT 1 05 FAULT ANALOG Range INPUT 2 05 gt FAULT ANALOG Range INPUT 3 05 FAULT ANALOG Range INPUT 4 0 FAULT CURRENT Range PHASE A 0 00 x CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 0 00 to 20 00 x CT in steps of 0 01 0 00 20 00 x CT in steps of 0 01 0 00 20 00 x CT in steps of 0 01 0 0 to 5000 0 A in steps of 0 1 0 00 to 1 10
377. teps of 0 01 0 5 to 60 0 s steps of 0 1 If enabled once the magnitude of either Vab Vbc or Vca rises above the pickup level for a period of time specified by the delay a trip or alarm will occur pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage An overvoltage on running motor with a constant load results in decreased current However iron and copper losses increase causing an increase in motor temperature The current overload relay will not pickup this condition and provide adequate protection Therefore the overvoltage element may be useful for protecting the motor in the event of a sustained overvoltage condition 5 10 3 Phase Reversal PATH SETTINGS gt V S9 VOLTAGE ELEM gt V PHASE REVERSAL 4 PHASE REVERSAL Range Off Latched Unlatched TRIP Off MESSAGE A mud Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS The 469 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltage If the Phase Reversal feature is turned on when all 3 phase voltages are greater than 5096 motor nameplate voltage and the phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not the same as the settings a trip and block start will occur in 500 to 700 ms iy This feature does not work when single VT operation is enabled NOTE 5 10 4 Frequency PATH SETTINGS S9 VOLTAGE ELEM gt V FREQUENCY FREQUENCY R
378. the 469 for maximum protection it is necessary to ask for these items when the motor is out for bid These thermal limits are intended to be used as guidelines and their definition is not always precise When operation of the motor exceeds the thermal limit the motor insulation does not immediately melt Rather the rate of insulation degradation has reached a point that motor life will be significantly reduced if it is run any longer in that condition 5 36 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 400 HIGH 300 INERTIA MOTOR RUNNING OVERLOAD 100 A B AND C ARE THE 1 80 ACCELERATION THERMAL LIMIT 60 CURVES AT 100 90 AND 809 VOLTAGE REPECTIVELY 40 a 2 20 2 HP 10 8 4 ARE THE SAFE STALL THERMAL LIMIT 2 TIMES 100 90 AND 809 VOLTAGE REPECTIVELY _ 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 CURRENT 806827 1 FIGURE 5 5 Typical Time Current and Thermal Limit Curves ANSI IEEE C37 96 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 37 5 6 2 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS Thermal Model PATH SETTINGS gt V 55 THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL SELECT CURVE Range Standard Custom Voltage THERMAL 6 STYLE Dependent gt OVERLOAD PICKUP Range 1 01 to 1 25 in steps of 0 01 LEVEL 1 01 x FLA ASSIGN TRIP Ran
379. the original calibration and last calibration may be viewed here 6 36 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 8 Diagnostics 6 8 1 Diagnostic Messages Some actual value messages are helpful in diagnosing the cause of Trips Alarms or Start Blocks The 469 automatically defaults to the most important message The hierarchy is Trip and PreTrip messages Alarm and lastly Start Block Lockout To simplify things the Message LED indicator will flash prompting the operator to press the NEXT key When NEXT is pressed the next relevant message is automatically displayed The 469 cycles through the messages with each keypress When all of these conditions have cleared the 469 reverts back to the normal default messages Any time the 469 is not displaying the default messages because other Actual Value or settings messages are being viewed and there are no trips alarms or blocks the Message LED indicator will be on solid From any point in the message structure pressing the NEXT key will cause the 469 to revert back to the normal default messages When normal default messages are being displayed pressing NEXT displays the next default message immediately Example When an overload trip occurs an RTD alarm may also occur as a result of the overload and a lockout time associated with the trip The 469 automatically defaults to the A1 STATUS V LAST TRIP DATA gt CAUSE OF LAST TRIP actual valu
380. the same CT ratio DIFF PHASE A CT OY A DIFF PHASE B CT DIFF PHASE C CT 5 DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS 806847A2 DWG FIGURE 3 17 Core Balance Method 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DIFF DIFF PHASE A CT PHASE A CT 1 FF 1 DIFF d PHASE B 8 MOTOR Y DIFF PHASE B CT DON DIFF PHASE 4 DIFF PHASE C CT Y N 3 E e e 1 5 COM 50 025 5 1A 5A PHASE A PHASE PHASE C GROUND GROUND PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C CURRENT INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS FIGURE 3 18 Summation Method with Phase CTs DIFF DIFF PHASE CT PHASE CT DIFF PHASE C CT DIFF DIFF PHASE B PHASE B B MOTOR a DIFF bi PHASE C CT COM 14 5 COM 14 54 PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C
381. there is a non fatal network error Off indicates no errors DeviceNet Connection Refer to GEK 106491C 469 Communications Guide PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V NETWORK STATUS DEVICENET PORT Range Not powered operational Data gt Not powered size error Unrecoverable fault Minor fault gt DEVICENET LINK Range Not online Online connected ESSAGE online Online disconnected Critical failure Connection timeout Range Nonexistent Configuring ESSAGE ES Established Time out Deferred Delete _ POLLED I O Range Nonexistent Configuring ESSAGE lt gt Nonex Established Time out Deferred Delete _ COS CONNECTION Range Nonexistent Configuring ESSAGE STATUS Nonexis Established Time out Deferred Delete These values appear when the relay is ordered with the DeviceNet 0 option 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 2 2 Motor Status PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt A1 STATUS gt V MOTOR STATUS MOTOR MOTOR STATUS Range Tripped Stopped Starting STATUS gt Stopped Running Overload Range 0 to 10096 MESSAGE e MOTOR THERMAL g 0 gt USED 0 5 ESTIMATED TRIP Range 0 to 10000 sec Never MOTOR SPEED Range High Speed Low Speed Seen if MESSAGE 2 two speed motor is enabled Low Speed These messages des
382. tings Auto Config The EnerVista 469 Setup software displays the following box allowing the configuration of the Settings File as shown Motor Settings Auto Config y It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that settings not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay NOTE Select the Firmware Version for the new Settings File 4 26 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 gt For future reference enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the device and the purpose of the file gt To select a file name and path for the new file click the button beside the File Name box gt Select the file name and path to store the file or select any displayed file name to update an existing file All 469 Settings Files should have the extension 469 for example motor1 469 gt Click Next and OK to continue the process Anew window Step 1 will appear Motor Settings Auto Config gt the fields as indicated gt When complete press Next The next window Step 2 will appear as follows As each Step is completed the user will be prompted to make appropriate changes to what has been entered if the Auto Config determines that the parameter entered is incorrect inappropriate for the situation 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INST
383. tion lag 45 lag 02 lag 45 lead lead Va 0 0 lag 0 lag 0 lag 0 Vb 240 240 240 240 240 Vc 120 120 120 120 120 la 75 45 0 515 285 Ib 515 285 240 195 165 Ic 195 165 120 75 45 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 25 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Table 6 2 Three phase Wye VT Connection ABC 0 3 pf 72 5 0 7 pf 1 00 pf 0 7 pf 0 3 pf 72 5 rotation lag 45 lag 02 lag 45 lead lead kW kVAR 0 kVA kW 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 4 Learned Data 6 4 1 Motor Starting PATH ACTUAL VALUES gt V LEARNED DATA gt MOTOR STARTING Range 0 0 to 200 0 sec LEARNED ACCELERA TIME 0 0 s LEARNED STARTING Range 0 to 50000 0 LEARNED STARTING Range 0 to 100 CAPACITY 0 used LAST ACCELERATION Range 0 0 to 200 0 sec 0 0 5 STARTING ESSAG iiu Range 0 to 50000 ESSAGE LAST STARTING g CURRENT Range 0 to 10096 ESSAGE LAST STARTING CAPACITY 0 used The 469 learns the acceleration time the starting current as well as the thermal capacity required during motor starts This data is accumulated based on the last five starts The 469 also keeps statistics for last acceleration time last starting current and last starting capacity This information can be reset t
384. to 50000 1 0 100 Torque 0 to 999999 9 0 1 0 100 5 13 2 Analog Inputs 1 to 4 PATH SETTINGS 512 ANALOG gt ANALOG INPUT 1 4 ANALOG INPUT 1 Range Disabled 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 ANALOG 6 ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE ESSAGE 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL lt gt 9 09 69 09 609 00 0909 60 00 60 09 0 Disabled ANALOG INPUT 1 NAME ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 1 MAXIMUM 100 BLOCK ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 1 ALARM Off ANALOG INPUT 1 ALARM ANALOG INPUT 1 ALARM ANALOG INPUT 1 ALARM ANALOG INPUT 1 ALARM ANALOG INPUT 1 TRIP Off ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS H 2 Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range 1 mA 12 alphanumeric characters 6 alphanumeric characters 50000 to 50000 in steps of 1 50000 to 50000 in steps of 1 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 50000 to 50000 in steps of 1 Units reflect ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS above Over Under 0 1 to 300 0 s in steps of 0 1 On Off Off Latched Unlatched Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3
385. to 1 x CT primary Nominal frequency 20 to 70 Hz Frequency range 20to 120 Hz 0 5 of 1 x CT for 5 A 0 5 of 5 x CT for 1 A CT WIhSEOFIQ scettr iced 1 second at 80 x rated current 2 seconds at 40 x rated current continuous at 3 x rated current DIGITAL INPUTS 9 opto isolated inputs External switch dry contact lt 400 or open collector NPN transistor from sensor 6 mA sinking from internal 4 pull up at 24 V DC with Vce 4 V DC See Digital Inputs on page 2 11 for additional specifications GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CT primary 110 5000 CT Secondalye 1A or 5 A settings BUIEN ainia 0 2 VA at rated load for or 5 A 0 25 50 0 025 CTs at25A Conversion range 0 02 to 1 x CT primary Nominal frequency 20 to 70 Hz Frequency range 20to 120 Hz AGGUFOCVS iid 0 5 of 1 x CT for 5 A CTs 0 5 of 5 x CT for CTs 0 125 A 50 0 025 CTs 1 A 5 A withstand 1 second at 80 x rated current 2 seconds at 40 x rated current continuous at 3 x rated current CT 50 0 025 withstand continuous at 150 mA PHASE CURRENT INPUTS CT primary 110 5000 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION 2 2 2 Outputs CT Secondadty
386. to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 1 50 x FLA 280 0 SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 1 75 x FLA 169 7 ESSAGE 9 ESSAG SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 ESSAG SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 A A Ww Ww Ww Ww N u T u T x x x x x x x x x x j BAIS BIS BIS BIS EIE Alle N N N w w E D gt gt N lt w Oo ESSAGE SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 0 ESSAG SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 9 ESSAG SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAGE aD SPEED2 TRIP AT Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 7 amp 4 50 x FLA 18 2 gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 ESSAG 4 75 x FLA 16 2 lt gt SPEED2 TRIP Range 0 5 to 99999 9 in steps of 0 1 5 00 x FLA 14 6 O SPEED2 TRIP AT
387. tomatically become disabled and the output relays will revert back to their normal states If any relay is forced the 469 In Service LED will flash indicating that the 469 is not in protection mode 5 14 5 Test Analog Outputs PATH SETTINGS gt V S13 469 TESTING gt V TEST ANALOG OUTPUT FORCE ANALOG OUT Range Enabled Disabled Range 0 to 10096 step 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 g 6 step gt FORCED VALUE 0 OUTPUT 2 Range 0 to 100 step 1 ESSAGE 4 FORCED VALUE 0 ANALOG OUTPUT 3 Range 0 to 10096 step 1 FORCED VALUE 0 Range 0 to 10096 step 1 ESSAGE ANALOG OUTPUT 4 9 FORCED VALUE 05 In addition to the simulation modes the TEST ANALOG OUTPUT settings group may be used during startup or testing to verify that the analog outputs are functioning correctly The analog outputs can only be forced if the motor is stopped and there are no trips alarms or start blocks active When the FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS FUNCTION is Enabled the output reflects the forced value as a percentage of the 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 1 mA range Selecting Disabled places all four analog output channels back in service reflecting the parameters programmed to each If the 469 measures phase current or control power is cycled the FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS FUNCTION is automatically disabled and all analog outputs revert back to their normal state Any time the analog outputs are forced the 469 In Service LED will flash indic
388. tool to identify wiring errors Use the phasors displayed by the relay and the tables on pages 22 and 25 to determine if VTs and CTs are on the correct phases and their polarity is correct Problems arising from incorrect wiring include e Extremely high unbalance levels CTs e Erroneous power readings CTs and VTs e Phase reversal trips VTs To correct wiring simply start the motor and record the phasors The correct phasors can be determined using the tables along with recorded phasors system rotation VT connection type and motor power factor Note that the phase angle for Vab if delta is always assumed to be 0 and is the reference for all angle measurements Common problems include Phase currents 180 from proper location CT polarity reversed e Phase currents or voltages 120 or 240 out CT VT on wrong phase An explanation of how the relay identifies and displays system quantities follows Assume that the relay is connected to a balanced three phase system and that Va and are the relay ID names for terminals G2 H1 H2 and G1 respectively When the relay is set for the Open Delta VT connection type voltages are measured at terminals G2 Va and H2 The voltage at terminal H1 Vg is not measured however the corresponding system quantity is calculated assuming a balanced three phase system where Va Vg Vc 0 leading to Vg Vc In the ACTUAL VALUES
389. tor 4 5 4 6 CHAPTER 4 INTERFACES The 469 does not have or keys Negative numbers may be entered in one of two manners gt Immediately pressing one of the VALUE keys causes the settings to scroll through its range including any negative numbers gt After entering at least one digit of a numeric settings value pressing the VALUE keys changes the sign of the value where applicable 4 1 6 Settings Entry To store any settings terminals C1 and C2 access terminals must be shorted a keyswitch may be used for security There is also a settings passcode feature that restricts access to settings The passcode must be entered to allow the changing of settings values A passcode of 0 effectively turns off the passcode feature in this case only the access jumper is required for changing settings If no key is pressed for 5 minutes access to settings values will be restricted until the passcode is entered again To prevent settings access before the 5 minutes expires the unit may be turned off and back on the access jumper may be removed or the SETTINGS ACCESS settings may be changed to Restricted The passcode cannot be entered until terminals C1 and C2 access terminals are shorted When settings access is allowed the settings Access LED indicator on the front of the 469 will be lit Settings changes take effect immediately even when motor is running However changing settings while the motor is running is not recomme
390. tor is lightly loaded If enabled a trip and or alarm occurs once the unbalance magnitude equals or exceeds the CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM TRIP PICKUP for a period of time specified by the CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM TRIP DELAY If the unbalance level equals or exceeds 4096 or when 2 25 FLA and current in any one phase is zero the motor is considered single phasing and a trip occurs within 2 seconds Single phasing protection is disabled if the unbalance trip feature is turned Off When setting the CURRENT UNBALANCE ALARM TRIP PICKUP level note that a 196 voltage unbalance typically translates into a 696 current unbalance Therefore to prevent nuisance trips or alarms the pickup level should not be set too low Also since short term 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS unbalances are common a reasonable delay should be set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms The unbalance bias feature is recommended to bias the thermal model for motor heating caused by cyclic short term unbalances see page 54 for details v NOTE Unusually high unbalance levels may be caused by incorrect phase CT wiring For example fluctuations of current unbalance levels are typically caused by the supply voltage It may be desirable to have a latched alarm to capture any such fluctuations that go beyond the Unbalance Alarm parameters Also a trip is recommended If the supply voltage is normally unbalanced up to 2 th
391. tput When the programmed interval has transpired the assigned relay will be activated for 1 second This feature should be programmed such that no more than one pulse per second will be required or the pulsing will lag behind the interval activation 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 13 S12 Analog Inputs Outputs 5 13 1 Analog Outputs 1 to 4 ANALOG PATH SETTINGS S12 ANALOG gt ANALOG OUTPUT 1 1 Range See Analog Output Parameter ANALOG 6 Therm Capacity Selection Table on page 5 92 Range 0 to 100 steps of 1 gt USED THERM CAPACITY Range 0 to 10096 in steps of 1 MESSAGE gt USED ANALOG OUTPUT 2 Range See Analog Output Parameter ANALOG Motor Load Selection Table on page 5 92 Range 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA in steps of gt MOTOR LOAD 0 00 i Range 0 00 to 20 00 x FLA in steps of MESSAGE MOTOR LOAD o MAX 1 50 x FLA 7 Range See Analog Output Parameter ANALOG Hottest Stator Selection Table on page 5 92 lt 5 STATOR Range 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 F MESSAGE 4 gt in steps of 1 HOTTEST STATOR Range 50 to 250 C or 58 to 482 MESSAGE in steps of 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 4 Range See Analog Output Parameter 0 Real Power kW Selection Table on page 5 92 Range 50000 to 50000 kW in steps of
392. tre 5 27 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL pressure Switch ea eiia E 5 28 pressure SWITCH etie eye en tie cen m ra ee n a em e ee 5 28 remote alarm remote tpi cuoio e aper E Be e P UR Hbro epe Fa E HER He Fr A E Simalate sinen simulate pre fault i simulate pre fa lt fault rnnt eene ee ertet epe 5 33 Speed switch TACHOMETER vibration switch alarm vibration switch trip DIGITAL INPUTS CIC TUG AS SHUN Os Em description irte specifications DIMENSIONS DISPLAY UPDATE INTERVAL itecto ttt tide te tete irte DRAWOUT INDICATOR E ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION EMERGENCY RESTART pensioen enan ttt ix ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 469 sse 4 49 ENTERING TEX renen rte he t en etie i A EE e Ce eere 4 5 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS sse 2 16 ESTIMATED TRIP TIME ON 6 5 ETHERNET nt Ut E t 6 4 5 e 5 11 clearing motor speed FAULT SETUP
393. ts has exceeded its RTD alarm or trip level LOSS OF LOAD Average motor current has fallen below the undercurrent alarm or trip level or power consumption has fallen below the underpower alarm or trip level Output Relay LED Indicators 4 1 4 5232 Port 1 TRIP The 1 TRIP relay has operated energized 2 AUXILIARY The 2 AUXILIARY relay has operated energized 3 AUXILIARY The 3 AUXILIARY relay has operated energized 4 ALARM The 4 ALARM relay has operated energized 5 BLOCK START The 5 BLOCK START relay has operated energized 6 SERVICE The 6 SERVICE relay has operated de energized 6 SERVICE is failsafe normally energized This port is intended for connection to a portable PC Settings files may be created at any location and downloaded through this port with the EnerVista 469 Setup software Local interrogation of settings and actual values is also possible New firmware may also be downloaded to the 469 flash memory through this port Upgrading of the relay firmware does not require a hardware EPROM change 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 3 4 4 4 1 5 4 5 Description The 469 display messages are organized into main menus pages and sub pages There are three main menus labeled settings Actual Values and Target Messages Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the three main menu headers which appe
394. tuations e g charging a long line to the motor or power factor correction capacitors may cause transient inrush currents during motor starting that may exceed the SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP PICKUP level for a very short period of time The INTENTIONAL S C TRIP DELAY is adjustable in 10 ms increments This delay can be fine tuned to an application so it still responds very fast but rides through normal operational disturbances Normally the INTENTIONAL S C TRIP DELAY is set as quick as possible 0 ms This time may 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 59 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS be increased if nuisance tripping occurs When a motor starts the starting current typically 6 x FLA for an induction motor has an asymmetrical component This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1 6 times the normal RMS starting current If the SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP PICKUP was set at 1 25 times the symmetrical starting current it is probable that there would be nuisance trips during motor starting A rule of thumb has been developed over time that short circuit protection at least 1 6 times the symmetrical starting current value This allows the motor to start without nuisance tripping The overreach filter removes the DC component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment of fault This eliminates overreach however the response time slows slightly 10 to 15 ms but remains within specification 5 7 2 Overload Alarm PATH SETTIN
395. ture Each setting in the menu is referred to as settings and each settings in the menu may be accessed as described in the previous section The settings are arranged in pages with each page containing related settings for example all the Short Circuit Trip settings are contained within the same page As previously explained the top menu page of each setting group describes the settings contained within that page Pressing the MESSAGE keys allows the user to move between these top menus All of the 469 settings fall into one of following categories device settings system settings digital input settings output relay settings thermal model settings current element settings motor starting settings RTD temperatures settings voltage element settings power element settings monitoring settings analog input output settings two speed motor settings and testing settings IMPORTANT Settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after they are entered As such caution must be exercised when entering settings while the relay is in service Modifying or storing protection settings is not recommended when the relay is in service since any incompatibility or lack of coordination with other previously saved settings may cause unwanted operations Now that we have become more familiar with maneuvering through messages we can learn how to edit the values used by all settings classes Hardware and passcode security features are design
396. ty available does not exceed the LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY or is not equal to 10096 the Start Inhibit Block is activated until there is sufficient thermal capacity When a block occurs the lockout time will be equal to the time required for the motor to cool to an acceptable start temperature This time is a function of the Ss THERMAL MODEL gt THERMAL MODEL gt COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED settings If this feature is turned Off the THERMAL CAPACITY USED must reduce to 1596 before an overload lockout resets This feature should be turned off if the load varies for different starts For example if the THERMAL CAPACITY USED for the last 5 starts is 24 23 27 25 and 2196 respectively the LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY is 2796 x 1 25 33 7596 used If the motor stops with 9096 thermal capacity used a start block will be issued When the motor has cooled and the level of thermal capacity used has fallen to 6696 a start will be permitted If the COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED settings is programmed for 30 minutes the lockout time will be equal to t 30 xe 66 90 x e t 96 x 30 9 3 minutes 90 used 7 used star EQ 5 11 5 8 3 Jogging Block PATH SETTINGS gt V S7 MOTOR STARTING gt V JOGGING BLOCK BLOCK Range On Off Eon 7 gt Range 1 to 5 steps of 1 MESSAGE MAX STARTS HOUR g D PERMISSIBLE 3 TIME BETWEEN Range 0 to 500 min in steps of 1 MESSAGE 9 STARTS The Jogging Block
397. udes the maximum temperature measured by each of the 12 RTDs 6 Event recorder downloading tool 7 Product information This includes model number firmware version additional product information and calibration dates 8 Oscillography and data logger downloading tool 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 47 4 5 Selecting an actual values window also opens the actual values tree from the corresponding device in the site list and highlights the current location in the hierarchy For complete details on actual values refer to Chapter 6 To view a separate window for each group of actual values select the desired item from the tree and double click with the left mouse button Each group will be opened on a separate tab The windows can be re arranged to maximize data viewing as shown in the following figure showing actual current voltage and motor status values tiled in the same window oltage Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Actua xj Vec 13204 V c Rm Motor ud 095 FLA c E Equivalent pm Current 035 FLA Ground Current 0004 Motor Load 0000000 Load 0 95 FLA Estimated Time to Trip on Overload 15 Frese Cured a a 13204 V 13204 V 15204 V Average Line Voltage 13204 v System Frequency 60 00 Hz Power Factor 0 86 RealPower sd Power 8267 c Power HP 11086 hp 4840 kvar Apparent Power 9580 Actual Val
398. ues Status 2 FIGURE 4 10 Actual Values Display 4 48 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 4 7 Using EnerVista Viewpoint with the 469 4 7 1 Plug and Play Example EnerVista Viewpoint is an optional software package that puts critical 469 information onto any PC with plug and play simplicity EnerVista Viewpoint connects instantly to the 469 via serial ethernet or modem and automatically generates detailed overview metering power demand energy and analysis screens Installing EnerVista Launchpad see previous section allows the user to install a fifteen day trial version of EnerVista Viewpoint After the fifteen day trial period you will need to purchase a license to continue using EnerVista Viewpoint Information on license pricing can be found at http www enervista com gt Install the EnerVista Viewpoint software from the GE EnerVista CD gt Ensure that the 469 device has been properly configured for either serial or Ethernet communications see previous sections for details gt Click the Viewpoint window in EnerVista to log into EnerVista Viewpoint At this point you will be required to provide a login and password if you have not already done so enerVista VIEWPOINT PLUG amp PLA Y TOOLKIT DEVICE SETUP EDITOR VIEWER ANNUNCIATOR ADMINISTRATION FIGURE 4 11 EnerVista Viewpoint Main Window
399. ufacturer s Representative in the EU Jokin Galletero GE Avenida Pinoa 10 48170 Zamudio Spain Tel 34 94 4858817 Fax 34 94 4858838 Type of Equipment Motor Protection Relay Model Number 58469 First Year of Manufacture 1995 I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards Full Name Jeff Mazereeuw Position Technology Manager Signature 215 rson Ave Markham Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 June 11 2004 A 10 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL A APPENDIX A 5 Change Notes A 5 1 Revision History MANUAL P N REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO 1601 0122 A1 4 0x February 09 2004 1601 0122 A2 4 0x May 21 2004 1601 0122 A3 4 0x May 27 2005 1601 0122 A4 5 0x July 12 2006 1601 0122 A5 5 0x February 9 2007 1601 0122 A6 5 0x March 24 2008 1601 0122 A7 5 0x October 7 2008 1601 0122 A8 5 0x September 15 2009 1601 0122 A9 5 1x April 15 2010 A 5 2 Changes to the 469 Manual Table A 1 Major Updates for 469 Manual Revision A8 SECT SECT CHANGE DESCRIPTION 8 9 Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0122 A9 223 22 35 Update Ground Inst O C Phase S C Timing Accuracy changes 5 11 2 5 11 2 Update Power Factor changes Table A 2
400. uffers In addition to these buffers there is a message that will indicate the status of the last received message 5 14 7 GE Multilin Use Only PATH SETTINGS S13 469 TESTING gt V GE USE ONLY GE 6 GE MULTILIN USE Range N A MULTILIN D 7 ONLY This section is for use by GE Multilin personnel for testing and calibration purposes 5 102 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 15 S14 Two Speed Motor 5 15 1 Description The two speed motor feature provides proper protection for a two speed motor where there will be two different full load values The algorithm integrates the heating at each speed into one thermal model using a common thermal capacity used register value for both speeds If the two speed motor feature is used Assignable Input 4 is dedicated as the two speed motor monitor and terminals D22 and D23 are monitored for a contact closure Contact closure signifies that the motor is in Speed 2 if the input is open it signifies that the motor is in Speed 1 This allows the 469 to determine which settings should be active at any given point in time Two speed motor protection is enabled with the S2 SYSTEM SETUP CURRENT SENSING gt V ENABLE 2 SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION settings Speed2 Overload Setup Overview The settings corresponding to the Speed2 Overload Curve are closely related to the Thermal Model curve style and overload curve settings Refer to 5 6 2 T
401. ult messages Between 1 and 20 default messages can be selected Multiple default messages sequentially scan at a rate determined by the 81 469 SETUP gt PREFERENCES gt DEFAULT MESSAGE CYCLE TIME settings Any actual value can be selected for default display In addition up to five user 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 13 5 14 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS programmable messages can be created and displayed message scratchpad For example the relay can alternately scan a motor identification message the current in each phase and the hottest stator RTD Default messages are shown in this subgroup Use the following procedure to add default messages 1 Enter the correct passcode for 1 469 SETUP gt PASSCODE gt ENTER PASSCODE FOR ACCESS settings unless the passcode has already been entered or the passcode is 0 defeating the passcode security feature Move to the message to be added to the default message list using the MESSAGE W and MESSAGE A keys The selected message can be any actual value or Message Scratchpad message Press ENTER The message PRESS ENTER TO ADD DEFAULT MESSAGES vwill be displayed for 5 seconds Press ENTER again while displayed to add the current message to the default message list If the procedure was followed correctly the DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN ADDED flash message will be displayed To verify that the message was added view the last message in the 51 469 SETUP gt
402. up environment as described in Adding Settings Files to the Environment on page 4 24 gt Inthe File pane select the saved Settings file 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 31 4 5 gt From the main window menu bar select the File gt Properties menu item and note the version code of the Settings file If this version e g 4 0X shown below is different than the Software Revision code noted in step 2 select a New File Version that matches the Software Revision code from the pull down menu For example if the software revision is 2 80 and the current Settings file revision is 4 00 change the Settings file revision to 4 0X as shown below Convert Settings File Settings File Name ings410001352 My DocumentsNApplication Notess468 468Plantl 469 Plant No 1 463 Setpoint 280 New File Version 2 9 Description File Versio Enter any special comments Select the desired setpoint version about the setpoint file here from this menu The 4 0x indicates versions 4 00 4 01 4 02 etc gt When complete click Convert to convert the Settings file to the desired revision A dialog box will request confirmation See Loading Settings from a File on page 4 33 for instructions on loading this Settings file into the 469 Printing Settings and Actual Values The EnerVista 469 Setup software allows the user to print partial or
403. up software are not fixed values WARNING 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 41 4 42 4 5 4 6 4 Trending Data Logger The trending or data logger feature is used to sample and record up to eight actual values at an interval defined by the user Several parameters can be trended and graphed at sampling periods ranging from 1 second up to 1 hour The parameters which can be trended by the EnerVista 469 Setup software are Currents Voltages Phase Currents A B and C and Average Phase Current Motor Load Current Unbalance Ground Current Differential Currents A B and C System Frequency Voltages Vab Vbc Vca Van Vbn amp Vcn Power Power Factor Real KW or hp Reactive kvar and Apparent kVA Power Positive Watthours Positive and Negative Varhours Torque Temperature Hottest Stator RTD Thermal Capacity Used RTDs 1 through 12 Demand Current Peak Current Reactive Power Peak Reactive Power Apparent Power Peak Apparent Power Others Analog Inputs 1 2 3 and 4 Tachometer 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 With EnerVista 469 Setup running and communications established gt Select the Actual Values gt Trending menu item to open the trending window The following window will appear Trending Pumping Station 1 469 Relay 1 Actual alues he 1 fuese 1 4 he
404. ute per UL 508 DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING ANY PRODUCTION TESTS 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION 2 2 9 Certification CERTIFICATION ACA conforms to RF emissions for Australia tick mark Mund conforms to 55011 CISPR 11 50082 2 2 pp m EN50263 EMC CE for Europe conforms to RF emissions for North America part 15 stesse tente conforms to 1010 1 LVD CE for Europe ISOs iis Manufactured under an 1509001 registered system UL listed 83849 for the USA and Canada 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 15 2 2 10 Physical CASE PACKAGING Shipping weight TERMINALS Low voltage B C D terminals High voltage E F G H terminals 2 2 11 Environmental ENVIRONMENT Ambient operating temperature Ambient storage temperature Pollution degree Y NOTE 2 2 12 Long term Storage LONG TERM STORAGE Environment Correct storage eee 17 ssa failure EE Mounting 56 CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION Fully drawout automatic CT shorts Seal provision Panel or 19 inch rack mount IPAO X 12 x 11 x 10 W x H x D 30 5 cm x 27 9 cm x 25 4 cm 17 lbs Max 7 7 kg 12 AWG m
405. uts of the 469 Motor Management Relay are pre defined functions which can be selected from a list There are four user defined functions called General Switch A to D associated to the assignable inputs Set these inputs to operate output relays with or without delay responding to the status change of dry contacts connected to the digital input terminals Use the following procedure to set these functions gt Change the default names to meaningful values so they can be easily identified either via the LCD or when reviewing event reports gt Identify their asserted logic Define the functionality of the digital inputs All the other assignable input functions are pre defined and when selected they can be set to generate Trip or Alarms as well as energize auxiliary outputs as needed For breaker position monitoring set the following pre defined Digital Input called Starter Status As per the information provided above a 52b contact will be used and must be connected between terminals D16 to D23 S3 DIGITAL INPUTS gt V STARTER STATUS gt STARTER STATUS SW Starter Auxiliary b To set the relay to monitor access to the station use Assignable Input 1 as General Switch as follows To define the digital input enter the following data in the S3 DIGITAL INPUTS V ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 settings page To identify the digital input INPUT 1 FUNCTION General Sw A SWITCH NAME Stn Monitor To define the asserted lo
406. x RATED in steps of 0 01 0 to 359 in steps of 1 0 00 to 1 10 x RATED in steps of 0 01 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 50 to 250 C in steps of 1 45 0 to 70 0 Hz in steps of 0 1 O to 100 in steps of 1 O to 100 in steps of 1 O to 100 in steps of 1 O to 100 in steps of 1 The values entered under Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 469 when the simulation mode is Simulate Fault 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 5 14 4 Test Output Relays PATH SETTINGS V S13 469 TESTING V TEST OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE OPERATION Range Disabled 1 Trip 2 Auxiliary OF 3 Auxiliary 4 Alarm 5 Block 6 Service All Relays No Relays In addition to the simulation modes the TEST OUTPUT RELAYS settings group may be used during startup or testing to verify that the output relays are functioning correctly The output relays can only be forced to operate only if the motor is stopped and there are no trips alarms or start blocks active If any relay is forced to operate the relay will toggle from its normal state when there are no trips alarms or blocks to its active state The appropriate relay indicator will illuminate at that time Selecting Disabled places the output relays back in service If the 469 measures phase current or control power is cycled the FORCE OPERATION OF RELAYS settings will au
407. xiliary3 None Range 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 Range Off Latched Unlatched Range Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None Range On Off 1 to 250 in steps of 1 Range Off Latched Unlatched Range RTD 1 to RTD 12 Range Trip Trip amp Auxiliary2 Trip amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Trip amp Auxiliary3 MESSAGE RTD 1 TRIP TEMPERATURE Range CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS 1 to 250 C in steps of 1 RTDs 1 through 6 default to Stator RTD type There are individual alarm and trip configurations for each RTD This allows one of the RTDs to be turned off if it malfunctions The alarm level is normally set slightly above the normal running temperature The high alarm is usually set as a warning of a trip or to initiate an orderly shutdown before tripping occurs The trip level is normally set at the insulation rating Trip voting has been added for extra reliability in the event of RTD malfunction If enabled a second RTD must also exceed the trip temperature of the RTD being checked before a trip will be issued If the is chosen to vote with itself the voting feature is disabled Each RTD name may be changed if desired 5 9 5 RTDs 7 to 10 PATH SETTINGS S8 RTD TEMPERATURE RTD 7 10 E RTD 09 RTD 7 APPLICA 7 D TION MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE ESSAGE
408. y from the Install Software window as shown below gt Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release or select CD if you do not have a web connection 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 13 4 5 gt Click the Add Now button to list software items for the 469 enervVista LAUNCH Y PAD Select Product to Add 239 Motor Protection Relay n 269Plus Motor Management Relay 369 Motor Management Rela 469 Motor Management Relay M Family 489 Generator Management Relay 735 737 Feeder Relay 745 Transformer Management Relay 750 Feeder Management Relay 760 Feeder Management Relay ALPS Advanced Line Protection System B30 Bus Differential Relay B90 Bus Differential System C30 Controller C60 Breaker Management Relay D30 Line Distance Relay 060 Line Distance Relay indicates Set up Program exists in Software Library Add Now 03 14 44 PM EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation process A status window with a progress bar will be shown during the downloading process ic xe E GE Multilin enervVista LAUNCH N PAD options Leg File 4 STATUS WINDOW Select the complete path including the new directory name where the EnerVista 469 Setup software will be installed 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL
409. y3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1 On Off 5 to 90 min in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 50000 kvar step 1 On Off 5 to 90 min in steps of 1 Off Latched Unlatched Alarm Alarm amp Auxiliary2 Alarm amp Aux2 amp Aux3 Alarm amp Auxiliary3 Auxiliary2 Aux2 amp Aux3 Auxiliary3 None 1 to 50000 kVA step 1 On Off The 469 measures motor demand for several parameters current kW kvar and kVA These values may be of interest for energy management programs where processes may be altered or scheduled to reduce overall demand on a feeder Demand is calculated as follows Every minute an average magnitude is calculated for current kW kvar and kVA based on samples taken every 5 seconds These values are stored in a FIFO first in first out buffer The buffer size is dictated by the settings demand 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS period The average value of the buffer is calculated and stored as the new demand value every minute Demand for real and reactive power is only positive quantities kW and kvar N Demand 1 5 12 nz where N programmed demand period in minutes n time in minutes 160 140 1 1204 100 80 60 40 20
410. ys work with angles in the lagging direction This is illustrated below 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 17 CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES Positive Angle Direction 270 Lag 225 Lag 315 Lag 180 Lag s 469 Phase Angle Reference 135 Lag 45 Lag 90 806561 2 FIGURE 6 3 Phase Angle Measurement Convention The EnerVista 469 Setup software follows this convention and displays vectors accordingly The 469 Motor Management Relay works with lagging angles only The following is a typical presentation of a three phase system where current lags the voltage by 30 degrees Phasors 77 New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data ax __ 23258 ___2325 240 __ Seti 6 Select Phasor Sets E 459 Relay 1 Phasors New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values MeteingData 14 Relay 1 Phasors New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data New Site 1 469 Phasors New Site 1 469 Relay 1 Actual Values Metering Data 1 Actual Values Metering Data FIGURE 6 4 Current Lagging Voltage by 30 Display The phasors shown by the relay and the EnerVista 469 Setup software are a clear representation of the relationship between the system quantities as seen by the relay 469 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 ACTUAL VALUES The ACTUAL VALUES gt V PHASORS page is a useful troubleshooting

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

厳選素材EX-5 カタログ    取扱説明書  BioLab Fly Manual FH - Greenville Technical College  取扱説明書  ESTERILIZADOR A VAPOR POR ALTO VACÍO    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file